PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B PTX PRM VGL T5r 254079B

PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B

User Manual: PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 418 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1 Overview
2 Commands
3 Barcodes
4 Exercises And Examples
5 Multinational And International Character Sets
6 Error Codes
- The Purpose of Error Codes
- Error Codes
A Standard ASCII Character Set
B Shading Masks
- Selecting Masks
C Grid Samples
D Page Boundaries
- Paper Selection and Maximum Values
  - Setting Top/Bottom Margins
  - Setting Left Margins
E PTX_SETUP Option
- Overview
- The PTX_SETUP Commands
  - Commands
F VGL Command Support on L7032 Printers
G Glossary
H Contact Information

IGP

/VGL Emulation for Thermal Printers

Code V

Graphics Language

Programmer’s Reference Manual

IGP®/VGL Emulation for Thermal Printers

Code V™ Graphics Language

Programmer’s Reference Manual

Printronix, Inc. makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding

this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of

merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix, Inc. shall not

be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this

material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or

consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or

use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change

without notice.

This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No

part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated

in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,

electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of

Printronix, Inc.

Trademark Acknowledgements

IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of the International Business

Machines Corp.

HP and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.

IGP, LinePrinter Plus, and Printronix are registered trademarks and LaserLine

and PSA are trademarks of Printronix, Inc.

QMS is a registered trademark and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro

Systems, Inc.

CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association.

TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America, Inc.

UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology.

Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated

(Agfa).

CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated (Agfa).

CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype

Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa.

Table of Contents

1 Overview............................................................... 13

About this Manual ...................................................................................13

Warnings and Special Information ...................................................13

Features..................................................................................................14

Online Form and Label Generation..................................................14

Variable Barcodes............................................................................14

Expanded and Compressed Print ....................................................14

Rotated Alphanumerics....................................................................14

Logos ...............................................................................................15

Reversed and Shaded Print .............................................................15

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability.....................................15

Multinational and International Character Sets ................................15

New or Different Features for the VGL ...................................................15

Modes of Operation ................................................................................16

Normal Mode....................................................................................16

Graphics Mode.................................................................................16

Extended Graphics Mode.................................................................16

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode ......................................17

Configuring VGL with the Control Panel.................................................17

2 Commands............................................................ 19

Modes of Operation ................................................................................19

VGL Command Standards......................................................................20

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) ...........................................21

Command Sequence .......................................................................21

Command Parameters .....................................................................21

Brackets ...........................................................................................21

Spaces .............................................................................................22

Comma.............................................................................................22

Terminator........................................................................................22

Character Height, Width, and Intercharacter Spacing......................23

Normal Mode ..........................................................................................23

Graphics Mode .......................................................................................24

Data Positioning ...............................................................................24

Table of Contents

Command Codes....................................................................................26

Graphics Mode Enable Commands .................................................26

Standard Graphics Commands........................................................27

Extended Graphics Commands .......................................................29

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Commands.............................31

Alphanumerics .................................................................................32

Boxes ...............................................................................................39

Carriage Return................................................................................41

Character Height ..............................................................................42

Character Width ...............................................................................44

Character Type ................................................................................46

Compressed Print ............................................................................47

Dark Print .........................................................................................49

Descending Characters....................................................................51

Direct Printer Commands.................................................................53

Dot Slew...........................................................................................54

Duplication, Horizontal .....................................................................54

Duplication, Horizontal (Version II)...................................................56

Duplication, Vertical .........................................................................57

Duplication, Vertical (Version II).......................................................63

Dynamic Form Commands ..............................................................65

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)............................................73

Emphasized Print .............................................................................76

Emulation Switch..............................................................................77

Font Load .........................................................................................77

Font, Selecting Default (Version II) ..................................................78

Fonts, Rotatable...............................................................................82

Fonts, Compressed Print Density ....................................................85

Form Feed........................................................................................88

Form Length.....................................................................................89

Forms Construction..........................................................................90

Forms, Creating Dynamic (Version II)..............................................93

Forms, Deleting Dynamic (Version II) ..............................................94

Forms, Executing Dynamic (Version II)............................................94

Forms, Listing Dynamic (Version II) .................................................95

Forms, Predefined (Version II) .........................................................95

Forms, Resetting Dynamic (Version II) ............................................99

Free Format (Enable/Disable)..........................................................99

Free Format Enable, Non-Graphics ...............................................101

Free Format Disable, Non-Graphics ..............................................102

Graphics Mode Enable...................................................................103

Graphics Mode Disable..................................................................104

Table of Contents

Hex Dump ......................................................................................104

Ignore Data ....................................................................................105

Interrupt..........................................................................................106

Justification, Vertical ......................................................................108

Line Feed .......................................................................................110

Line Slew........................................................................................111

Line Spacing ..................................................................................111

Lines, Dashed ................................................................................113

Lines, Solid.....................................................................................116

Logo Generation (Version II)..........................................................118

Logo, PCX......................................................................................120

Logo, TIFF......................................................................................121

Page, Controlling Paper Options (Version II) .................................122

Passing Hex Values .......................................................................124

Pixel Expansion (Version II) ...........................................................125

Plotting Bitmap Images ..................................................................127

Plotting Graphics (Columns) ..........................................................129

Plotting Graphics (Rows)................................................................132

Reset..............................................................................................135

Reverse Print .................................................................................136

Scaling ...........................................................................................138

Shading ..........................................................................................140

Shading Mask ................................................................................142

Special Function Control Code Change.........................................144

Symbols, Creating Standard User Defined ....................................145

Symbols, Creating Expanded User Defined...................................148

Symbols, Printing ...........................................................................150

Tab, Horizontal...............................................................................151

Tab, Vertical ...................................................................................155

Underlined Print .............................................................................156

Wait For Online ..............................................................................157

3 Barcodes............................................................. 159

Overview...............................................................................................159

Examples .......................................................................................160

Barcode Size/Height Requirements ...............................................160

Barcode Command Format ..................................................................162

Standard Barcode Command Format ............................................163

IBARC, (Version II) Barcode Command Format ............................164

Table of Contents

Barcodes...............................................................................................167

Australian 4-State...........................................................................169

BC412 Barcode..............................................................................174

Codabar .........................................................................................178

Code 39..........................................................................................184

Code 93..........................................................................................191

Code 128........................................................................................195

EAN 8.............................................................................................204

EAN 13...........................................................................................209

German Interleaved 2/5 .................................................................214

GS1-128.........................................................................................219

GS-1 Data Matrix ...........................................................................230

Identicon.........................................................................................239

Intelligent Mail 4-State Barcode .....................................................242

Interleaved 2/5 ...............................................................................244

Maxicode........................................................................................249

MSI.................................................................................................254

PDF417 ..........................................................................................260

Planet .............................................................................................264

POSTNET ......................................................................................269

Royal Mail ......................................................................................273

Telepen ..........................................................................................275

UPC-A ............................................................................................280

UPC-E ............................................................................................285

UPCSHIP .......................................................................................293

UPS 11...........................................................................................297

4 Exercises And Examples .................................... 301

Practice Using VGL ..............................................................................301

Practice Graphic Exercise - Normal Resolution .............................302

Practice Graphic Exercise - High Resolution .................................306

Form Example ......................................................................................311

Page Layout Considerations ..........................................................311

Planning the Form Layout ..............................................................311

Label Example......................................................................................328

Solving Program Errors ........................................................................336

Table of Contents

5 Multinational And International Character

Sets..................................................................... 337

Multinational Character Sets.................................................................337

Character Addresses .....................................................................338

Making Character Substitutions .....................................................338

Accessing Characters and Character Sets...........................................341

Data Bit 8 .......................................................................................341

Power-Up Character Set Selection ................................................341

Building a Character Translation Table..........................................341

Resetting the Character Set...........................................................342

User-Defined Set Command ..........................................................343

Character Set Selection Command................................................345

Selecting an ISO Character Set .....................................................348

Multinational Character Set Charts ................................................349

International Character Sets.................................................................353

6 Error Codes......................................................... 355

The Purpose of Error Codes.................................................................355

Error Codes ..........................................................................................355

A Standard ASCII Character Set............................ 361

B Shading Masks ................................................... 363

Selecting Masks....................................................................................363

C Grid Samples ...................................................... 375

D Page Boundaries ................................................ 379

Paper Selection and Maximum Values.................................................379

Setting Top/Bottom Margins...........................................................380

Setting Left Margins .......................................................................381

E PTX_SETUP Option ........................................... 383

Overview...............................................................................................383

The PTX_SETUP Commands ..............................................................383

Commands.....................................................................................384

F VGL Command Support on L7032 Printers ........ 391

G Glossary.............................................................. 393

Table of Contents

H Contact Information............................................. 403

Printronix Customer Support Center.....................................................403

Printronix Supplies Department ............................................................404

Corporate Offices..................................................................................404

Overview

About this Manual

This manual is divided into chapters that contain all the information required

to use the IGP

/VGL

Emulation. Use this manual in conjunction with your

printer User’s Manual for complete printer-VGL compatibility.

Warnings and Special Information

Information requiring special attention is highlighted under special headings.

Always read and comply with this information. The heading reveals the nature

of the information:

WARNING

Conditions that could cause you physical harm as well as damage the

equipment.

CAUTION

Conditions that indicate the possiblity of damage to a program, device,

system, or data.

IMPORTANT

Information vital to proper operation of the printer.

NOTE: Provides helpful tips about printer operation and maintenance.

Chapter 1

Features

The Code V Graphics Language (VGL) is the QMS compatible Intelligent

Graphics Printing software designed for Printronix thermal, line matrix and

L7032 printers. VGL emulates the QMS Code V Version II programming

language to produce on-line forms, barcodes, and alphanumeric text

generation in both normal and high resolution. The VGL graphics processing

features are detailed below.

Online Form and Label Generation

On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels

with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all

graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and

processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical, horizontal, solid

and dashed lines in normal or high resolution with a variety of thickness,

logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms and graphic designs

can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.

Variable Barcodes

Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print easily with

standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations, in normal

or high resolution. Available barcodes are: Australian 4-State; Codabar; Code

39; Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and C; Code 93; Data Matrix; EAN 8;

EAN 13; German Interleaved 2 of 5; Identicon; Intelligent Mail 4-State;

Interleaved 2 of 5; Maxicode; MSI; Planet; POSTNET; Royal Mail; Telepen;

UCC/EAN-128; UPC-A; UPC-E; UPS 11 and UPC Shipping.

. POSTNET is available only in horizontal direction. Impact printers include a

dark print mode for darker, high-contrast barcodes. The IBARC barcode

command prints barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90, rotated

180 or rotated 270 degrees.

See Table 21 on page 167 for a complete list of barcodes.

Expanded and Compressed Print

Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed.

Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous

range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Six compressed print

sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, 20, and 24 cpi (characters per inch),

permitting up to 204 columns in an 8.5-inch printed area (24 cpi). In high

resolution mode, characters can be sized and positioned to hundredth of an

inch specification.

Rotated Alphanumerics

Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,

expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees

clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down.

Logos

Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of print

and shading features, providing a “customized” appearance for forms,

reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV

, GS-Mark,

, and CSA

symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL, and

you can also define custom symbols.

Reversed and Shaded Print

Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing

white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded

background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing

can be combined with the many other print features to create distinctive

designs.

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.

Individual numeric and barcode data fields can be identified and automatically

incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from any specified

number.

Multinational and International Character Sets

Multinational and International Character Sets provide you with access to

predefined international character sets, each 96 characters in length. The

Multinational Character Set also allows you to create your own character sets

using characters defined and stored in memory.

New or Different Features for the VGL

VGL introduces the QMS-compatible Intelligent Graphics Printing software to

the Printronix thermal printer environment. Certain variations due to the line

matrix versus thermal printing technology change the way the VGL operates

in several ways.

• The “dots” parameter in a command is based on a 60 dots-per-inch (dpi)

horizontal by 72 dpi vertical grid. In normal resolution mode, this grid is

converted to the equivalent number of dots on a high-density, thermal

print engine. For example, 1 horizontal dot on a line matrix printer equals

5 dots on a 300 X 300 dpi thermal printer. In high resolution mode,

however, size and position parameters are specified in inches.

• Thermal and laser printers cannot produce half-dots. Therefore, for same-

cpi fonts on a thermal or laser printer, full dot fonts in draft print and half-

dot fonts in correspondence print would produce the same number of

dots.

Chapter 1

Modes of Operation

• Dark print, used to produce darker looking graphic elements

(e.g., barcodes, shading masks, reverse print, etc.) is a function of line

matrix printers only. The darker looking print is produced by overstriking.

Thermal and laser printers ignore dark print commands.

Modes of Operation

Normal Mode

VGL has two basic modes of operation: Normal and Graphics. In Normal

Mode, all characters and commands are passed directly through VGL to the

Line Printer Plus

Emulation without processing, except to check for the VGL

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) and Graphics Mode command.

All the standard Line Printer Plus Emulation features (such as EVFU,

elongated characters, compressed print, plot mode, etc.) are still available

when VGL is in Normal Mode. However, when VGL receives a Graphics

Mode command, the VGL changes to the Graphics Mode and assumes

control of the printer.

Graphics Mode

In Graphics Mode, all VGL functions are available. The standard graphics

commands provide features such as underline print, horizontal and vertical

duplication, dynamic forms, graphics plotting, and vertical formatting. A

complete listing of all standard graphics commands is provided in the

“Commands” chapter.

Extended Graphics Mode

In addition to the standard graphics commands, the VGL Graphics Mode has

an extended graphics command set, providing more specific graphic features

for forms and labels. Alphanumeric commands, boxes, lines, logos, shading,

special fonts, and all barcodes are part of the extended graphics command

set. Again, complete extended graphics command information is provided in

the “Commands” chapter.

VGL also supports the QMS Version II commands (ILOGO, IPEXP, IISO,

IBARC, IREPH, IREPV, IFONT,S, IHEX, IPLOT, IFORM,C, IFORM,D,

IFORM,E, IFORM,L, and IFORM,R) as well as the original commands

performing the same or similar functions to those in Version II. For example,

the Horizontal Duplication command (S) is still available, while an enhanced

Horizontal Duplication command (IREPH,) is now available with Version II.

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode

Within Graphics Mode, there is an additional high resolution mode called

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode. In this mode, you can access the

extended graphics commands as well as new commands designed to achieve

enhanced resolution for thermal printing.

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode allows you to specify graphic

elements and characters in expanded size and position parameters. Graphic

elements (lines, boxes, and forms) can now be defined in increments of one

thousandth of an inch. Characters can now be specified in increments of one

hundredth of an inch. As a result of these enhancements, you can print forms

and labels that include high resolution text, graphics and barcodes.

The actual positioning and size, however, can be only as “fine” as your printer

resolution (dpi). For example, a graphic position change of 0.001, 0.002, or

0.003 would result in one printer dot at 300 dpi (1 - .0033 inches). Also,

because the actual height of characters changes in increments of seven

printer dots (0.0233 inches at 300 dpi), a size specification of 0.01 inch or

0.02 inch would result in a character of the same size.

Configuring VGL with the Control Panel

Matching certain printer operational settings to those of the host computer is

known as printer configuration. The settings, or configuration parameters,

such as selecting the host interface, parallel/serial data input and file

management, are adjusted according to the printer function switch

descriptions in your printer's User's Manual. Configure VGL in the same way

you would configure the printer for other features.

You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel as

explained in your User's Manual, or by control codes as explained in the

“Commands” chapter. Your User's Manual also contains detailed

configuration menus and diagrams, as well as descriptions of each

configuration parameter available with your printer.

Chapter 1

Configuring VGL with the Control Panel

Commands

Modes of Operation

VGL has two basic modes of operation: Normal mode and Graphics mode. In

Normal mode, the data stream passes unchanged to the printer until the

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) and Graphics Mode Enable command

are detected, indicating that special Graphics mode functions follow. All of the

printer standard features operate in Normal mode (such as the EVFU, plot,

hex dump) and the printer responds to command and control codes as

described in the printer User’s Manual.

In Graphics mode, you can generate alphanumeric characters, graphic

components and barcodes. Once the Graphics mode is enabled, specific

command sequences are used to generate a variety of graphics. The

command parameters define height, width, location, and type of graphic

(boxes, lines, alphanumeric characters).

Three types of command sets are used in the Graphics mode:

• standard graphics

• extended graphics

• extended graphics/high resolution.

Figure 1 illustrates the relationship between the Normal and Graphics modes

of operation as described above. In addition, at the beginning of each

command in this chapter, the graphics mode(s) in which that command

operates are listed.

Chapter 2

VGL Command Standards

Figure 1. Modes of Operation

VGL Command Standards

Many of the commands described in this chapter include an example to

illustrate the application. Commas are used in the example commands to

easily identify the various command parameters.

Many of the example commands shown also require the Free Format

command. Using the Free Format command in the examples more clearly

identifies the data and command parameters.

The commands used to operate VGL have various selectable options and a

specific format that you must follow to obtain the desired results. These

command standards are described in the following sections. Become familiar

with their meaning and use before operating VGL.

VGL

Modes of Operation

Normal Mode Graphics Mode

(Table 1)

Standard Graphics

(Table 2)

Passes data directly

through to printer.

Enabled with PY Command

(see page 103).

An alphanumeric command from

Table 1 must be entered before using

an Extended Graphics command.

Extended Graphics

(Table 3)

Extended Graphics/High Resolution

Mode must be enabled

(^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^-) before

using a high resolution command.

Extended Graphics/

High Resolution

(Table 3)

Special Function Control Code (SFCC)

The SFCC identifies a command directed to VGL to enable a specific VGL

function. Based on the host computer interface or application requirements,

you can set the SFCC to any decimal character from 17 through 255 (hex 11

through hex FF).

When VGL is shipped, the caret symbol (hex 5E), “^”, is configured as the

SFCC. You can change the SFCC as described in your user's manual, or as

described in “Special Function Control Code Change” on page 144.

Throughout the practical examples in this manual, the SFCC is shown as a ^

(caret, hex 5E, dec 94); always use the actual SFCC required by your system

configuration wherever the ^ is shown.

In the general command formats, the SFCC is represented by (cc). Always

substitute the actual SFCC required by your system configuration in the

general command format where (cc) is shown. Do not enter parentheses with

your SFCC.

NOTE: Refer to your User's Manual for a description of SFCC selections.

Perform a configuration printout and examine the configuration option

listing to determine which SFCC is currently selected.

Command Sequence

Individual commands are made up of various command parameters (such as

character height or width parameters). Each command generally begins with

the SFCC. You can string many commands together to form a command

sequence, or command line. After the Graphics Mode is enabled by the

Graphics Mode Enable command, you can input a command sequence. The

command sequence includes all commands and data from the initial SFCC of

the first command to the sequence terminator.

The VGL buffer holds and can process approximately 64K characters in a

single graphics command sequence. However, if a single command

sequence exceeds the buffer capacity, you can use the Interrupt command

(page 106). The Interrupt command breaks the command sequence and

specifies where the sequence begins printing again.

Command Parameters

Most commands have a number of variable parameters for which input is

required. Throughout this manual, actual commands required for input are

shown exactly as they must be entered, while all the variable parameters

associated with that command are shown in italics.

Brackets

Paired brackets [ ] indicate an optional command parameter. You can choose

to use or not use such a command parameter, but do not enter the brackets in

the command sequence.

Chapter 2

VGL Command Standards

Spaces

Spaces are used in the general command formats to visually separate

individual command parameters. You must supply the information for the

command parameter, but do not enter the spaces in the command sequence;

they are shown simply as a visual aid to illustrate where one command

parameter ends and another begins.

Comma

VGL accepts commas as parameter diameters. Commas are often helpful in

distinguishing the various numeric parameters within the command

sequence. Commas are not allowed immediately after the SFCC or before the

first data character. Commas within the command sequence are optional

unless they are a part of the command format (i.e., IBARC, IFONT,S, etc.). If

used, commas occupy character spaces in the buffer and require processing

time. In the practical examples throughout this manual, commas are used in

the command sequences.

Terminator

Each command line, or command sequence, must be followed by a valid

terminator. Valid terminators are as follows: carriage return (CR, hex 0D), line

feed (LF, hex 0A), form feed (FF, hex 0C), vertical tab (VT, hex 0B), EVFU

commands (hex 10-1F), hex 01 and hex 06, and PI line commands. A

complete command sequence is the very first character (including the SFCC)

to and including the terminator.

Certain terminators have different functional effects based on their use with

standard graphics commands or within extended graphics command

sequences. For example, CR, FF, and LF function as sequence terminators

within an extended graphics command sequence.

If the Free Format command is used, host generated terminators are ignored

and only the standard graphics command terminators are recognized. See

Table 2 on page 27 for a list of the Standard Graphics Commands and

appropriate page references where additional information is provided.

Character Height, Width, and Intercharacter Spacing

Alphanumeric height and width parameters include the intercharacter spacing

as shown in Figure 2. The intercharacter spacing is the space between

characters. (Scalable fonts, however, change the size of the intercharacter

gap used depending on the characters used.) Intercharacter spacing is

measured to the right of standard or upside-down characters and to the

bottom of sideways characters.

For example, specifying a character width of .5-inch in normal resolution

results in a five-dot column intercharacter spacing to the right or bottom of that

character based on orientation. Generally, intercharacter spacing is not

accounted for to the left, above, or below characters except when printing

reverse images or descending characters.

Figure 2. Character Height, Width, and Intercharacter Spacing

Normal Mode

In Normal Mode, data passes directly through VGL to the printer without

processing except to check for the SFCC and the Graphics Mode Enable or

the Enable Non-Graphics Free Format command. This normal, or pass-

through, data assumes the standard 10 cpi print mode, and all other standard

printer features function normally according to the configuration and

programming of the printer.

NOTE: Printers must be configured at the control panel for Data Processing

10 cpi (DP 10) print mode at 6 lpi for VGL to operate properly. To set

a line spacing when VGL is active, use the Line Spacing (@L)

command described on page 110.

WIDTH DETERMINED

BY wd PARAMETER

WIDTH DETERMINED

BY wd PARAMETER

HEIGHT

DETERMINED

BY Ht

PARAMETER

HEIGHT

DETERMINED

BY Ht

PARAMETER

INTERCHARACTER SPACING

1 DOT COLUMN PER 0.1" OF WIDTH

INTERCHARACTER SPACING

1 DOT COLUMN PER 0.1" OF HEIGHT

Chapter 2

Graphics Mode

Some graphics commands have different functions depending on whether the

command is used within an extended or a standard graphics command

sequence. For example, the W command identifies a standard graphics

command line slew; when used within an extended graphics command

sequence, W identifies a Character Width Change command. Therefore, be

certain of appropriate command usage to obtain the desired results.

Also, graphic commands have different parameters and different functionality

depending on whether the command is used in normal or high resolution

graphics mode.

Each command in this chapter is presented in alphabetical order. The tables

on the following pages list VGL commands according to the graphics mode in

which it operates. Information specific to the Extended Graphics/High

Resolution Mode, such as expanded parameter definition, is supplied on the

command description page for each command available in the mode.

Data Positioning

In Graphics Mode, you must understand certain positioning rules to obtain the

desired results. Horizontal and vertical starting positions of a command are

determined either by implied relative position to the prior graphics command

or explicit position from a positioning command.

Implied Relative Positioning

For any graphics command sequence (a string of one or more extended

graphics commands), the initial "relative" print position is the current dot row

and column 1 or the Graphics margin, if set.

NOTE: Because previous command sequences may have been used to

define prior printing on the page, the actual physical position of the

print mechanism may be on a different row, but it will be always in

column 1 or the Graphics margin, if set.

Without an immediately preceding positioning command, the starting position

of any command within the sequence is dot row 1 and the first dot column

past the right edge of the previous command "print envelope." This implied

position may be modified horizontally or vertically by specific positioning

commands.

Without explicit horizontal positioning commands, the horizontal print position

constantly increases within the command sequence. Each command starts at

the right edge of the previous command. Without explicit vertical positioning

commands, the vertical print position for each command within a sequence is

always at relative dot row 1 (the current physical position of the print

mechanism resulting from printing the last sequence).

Data Positioning

Explicit Positioning Commands

Use the Horizontal Tab command to change the horizontal print position. With

the Horizontal Tab command, any horizontal print position on the current print

line can be specified as the print position.

NOTE: The control panel form feed key will operate differently depending on

the source of form feed control at the time the key is pressed. Form

feed is controlled by the LP+ and VGL emulation at different times.

The vertical print position can be changed using the Justification command or

justification parameter within one of the alphanumeric commands. The

Justification command or parameter specifies a vertical position down the

form from the current print position. Additionally, you can use standard

graphics commands for line slew, dot slew, line feed, form feed, or EVFU

commands to specify a vertical print position.

These positioning commands and their use are described within this chapter.

It is important to remember that the end of a command sequence always

resets the "origin" for all subsequent positioning to row 1, column 1 or the left

Graphics margin.

Vertical Dot Density

A vertical tenth-inch in normal resolution mode equals 7 dots based on 72 dpi

vertical dot density. A true vertical tenth-inch at 72 dpi would be 7.2 dots.

Since .2 dots is not printable, seven dots are used and the vertical

measurement of a line, box, or similar graphic element is not exact.

A vertical inch in high resolution mode equals 292/300 times the printer

vertical dot density. A vertical inch at 300 dpi would be 292 dots. Therefore,

when specifying the size of your graphic elements, be aware that the vertical

dimensions of your graphic design print slightly smaller than the value

specified in your command.

You can enable the "True vert 1/10" option which allows the vertical size/

position parameter to be in true inches. With this option enabled in normal

resolution, vertical dimensions are as close to true as possible based on a 72

dpi dot density (e.g., 1.0 inch is exact at 72 dots. While 1.2 inch is close at 86

dots, exact would be 86.4 dots.) In high resolution, with true vert 1/10, vertical

dimensions are exact or nearly exact due to the higher dot density.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

The tables on the following pages list each VGL command according to the

Graphics Mode in which it operates. Following these tables, each command in

this chapter is presented in alphabetical order.

Graphics Mode Enable Commands

To enable the Graphics Mode, you must use the Graphics Mode Enable

command. Table 1 summarizes the Graphics Mode Enable and Disable

commands and the four alphanumeric commands, which are fully described

on the referenced pages. After enabling the Graphics Mode, alphanumeric

commands, standard graphics commands, or extended graphics commands

are available.

Table 1. Graphics Mode Commands

Command Description Page #

IPARAM Graphics Resolution 29

PF Free-Format Enable, Non-Graphics 101

PO Free Format Disable, Non-Graphics 102

FFree Format (graphics) Enable 99

OFree Format (graphics) Disable 99

PY Graphics Mode Enable 103

PN Graphics Mode Disable 104

MAlphanumerics, Standard 32

VAlphanumerics, Rotated Clockwise (Top Down) 32

EAlphanumerics, Rotated Counterclockwise (Bottom Up) 32

EAlphanumerics, Rotated Counterclockwise-Reverse String 32

UAlphanumerics, Inverted 32

UAlphanumerics, Inverted-Reverse String 32

in Character Set Selection (Multinational Character Set) 337

IInterrupt 106

un User Set Selection (Multinational Character Set) 343

IPAGE Page, Controlling Paper Options 122

Standard Graphics Commands

NOTE: Some systems pad the data stream with characters and spaces. If the

VGL file on your system contains padded characters or spaces

before the SFCC, this padded data must be ignored before VGL can

operate. The Ignore Data command (X), discussed on page 105, is

provided for this purpose.

Similarly, sometimes you may need VGL to ignore host-generated

paper movement commands (carriage return, line feed, form feed,

etc.) in lengthy data streams. The Free Format command (F),

discussed on page 99, is designed for this purpose.

Standard Graphics Commands

Standard graphics commands can be used any time VGL is in the Graphics

Mode. They set internal control values or are sent directly to the printer for

processing. Standard graphics commands are summarized in Table 2 and

fully described on the referenced pages.

NOTE: The Graphics Mode (Table 1) must be enabled before issuing a

Standard Graphics command.

Table 2. Standard Graphics Commands

Command Description Page #

-Carriage Return 41

@C Character Type 46

#x Compressed Print 47

!Direct Printer Command, Hex 01 53

"Direct Printer Command, Hex 02 53

#Direct Printer Command, Hex 03 53

$Direct Printer Command, Hex 04 53

%Direct Printer Command, Hex 05 53

&Direct Printer Command, Hex 06 53

'Direct Printer Command, Hex 07 53

(Direct Printer Command, Hex 08 53

.Direct Printer Command, Hex 0E 53

/Direct Printer Command, Hex 0F 53

DDot Slew 54

SDuplication, Horizontal 54

IREPH, Duplication, Horizontal (Version II) 56

RDuplication, Vertical 57

YAuto-Increment/Decrement Vertical Duplication 59

Chapter 2

Command Codes

IREPV, Duplication, Vertical (Version II) 63

BDynamic Form 65

[ or { Dynamic Form, Field Length 67

CDynamic Form, Copy Fields 69

RDynamic Form, Repeat Form 71

>EVFU, Start Load 73

?EVFU End Load 73

0-9 EVFU Channels 1 through 10 73

:EVFU Channel 11 73

;EVFU Channel 12 73

<EVFU Channel 13 73

=EVFU Channel 14 73

@E Emphasized Print 76

IEMUL, Emulation Switch 77

,Form Feed 88

LForm Length (with PI Line Enabled) 89

HForm Length 89

ILOAD, Font Load 77

IFONT, Font, Selecting Default (Version II) 78

FFree Format (graphics) Enable 99

OFree Format (graphics) Disable 99

@H Hex Dump 104

XIgnore Data 105

*Line Feed 110

KLine Slew 111

WLine Slew 111

@L Line Spacing 111

QPlotting Graphics (Rows), (Odd Dot Plot) 132

CPlotting Graphics (Rows), (Even Dot Plot) 132

@R Reset 135

Table 2. Standard Graphics Commands (continued)

Command Description Page #

Extended Graphics Commands

Specific graphics functions (lines, boxes, alphanumerics, forms, barcodes,

reverse printing, etc.) are available through commands sent as part of an

extended graphics command sequence. Table 3 summarizes the extended

graphics commands, which are fully described on the referenced pages.

Extended commands must be used as part of an alphanumeric command

sequence (after VGL is in the Graphics Mode). In some cases, the actual

command may have a different meaning and perform a different function

when used within an extended graphics command sequence compared to its

use as a standard graphics command.

NOTE: An alphanumeric command from Table 1 must be used before issuing

an Extended Graphics Command.

NSpecial Function Control Code Change 144

TTab, Horizontal (Set Graphics Margin) 151

+Tab, Vertical 155

@U Underlined Print 156

Table 2. Standard Graphics Commands (continued)

Command Description Page #

Table 3. Extended Graphics Commands

Command Description Page #

IBARC, Barcode (Version II) 164

BBarcode, Horizontal 160

CBarcode, Vertical 160

LB Boxes 39

HCharacter Height 42

WCharacter Width 44

in Character Set Selection 345

KF Dark Print 49

DDescending Characters 51

IREPH, Duplication, Horizontal (Version II) 56

IREPV, Duplication, Vertical (Version II) 63

fFill (for Standard and Expanded User-Defined Symbols) 148

IFONT,S, Font, Selecting Default (Version II) 78

Font Fonts, Rotatable 82

Chapter 2

Command Codes

SFonts, Compressed Print Density 85

LF Forms Construction 90

IFORM,C Forms, Creating Dynamic (Version II) 93

IFORM,D Forms, Deleting Dynamic (Version II) 94

IFORM,E Forms, Executing Dynamic (Version II) 94

IFORM,L Forms, Listing Dynamic (Version II) 95

IFORM,R Forms, Resetting Dynamic (Version II) 99

JJustification, Vertical 108

LD Lines, Dashed 113

LS Lines, Solid 116

QPlotting Graphics (Columns) 129

IHEX, Passing Hex Value to the Printer 124

ILOGO, Logo Generation (Version II) 118

IPCX, Logo, PCX 120

ITIFF, Logo, TIFF 121

IPEXP, Pixel Expansion (Version II) 125

IPLOT, Plotting Bitmap Images 127

RReverse Print 136

KH Shading 140

KL Shading Mask 142

ZSymbols, Printing 150

zx Symbol, Creating Expanded User-Defined 148

zx Symbol, Creating Standard User-Defined 145

TTab, Horizontal 151

Table 3. Extended Graphics Commands (continued)

Command Description Page #

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Commands

In Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode, you can access the extended

graphics commands as well as new commands designed to achieve

enhanced resolution for thermal printing. This mode allows you to specify

graphic elements and characters in expanded size and position parameters.

Graphic elements (lines, boxes, and forms) can now be defined in increments

of one thousandth of an inch. Characters can now be specified in increments

of one hundredth of an inch. As a result of these enhancements, you can print

forms and labels that include high resolution text, graphics and barcodes.

The actual positioning and size, however, can be only as "fine" as your printer

resolution (dpi). For example, a graphic position change of 0.001, 0.002, or

0.003 would result in one printer dot at 300 dpi (1 - .0033 inches). Also,

because the actual height of characters change in increments of seven printer

dots (0.0233 inches at 300 dpi), a size specification of 0.01 inch or 0.02 inch

would result in a character of the same size.

To enable Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode, you must have already

enabled Graphics Mode through use of the ^PY command. You cannot

enable the Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode, however, from within a

graphics pass (an alphanumeric command, ^M, ^E, ^U, or ^V).

Once in Graphics Mode, type the following command to enable Extended

Graphics/High Resolution Mode:

^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^-

Once in Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode, type the following

command to return to normal resolution Graphics Mode:

^IPARAM,NORMAL^G^-

VGL initially operates in normal resolution mode. To switch between normal

and high resolution, send the appropriate command shown above, or use the

"Cmd Resolution" option on the front panel menu.

You can switch between normal and high resolution between graphics passes

on the same page. VGL maintains the current resolution setting after a ^PN

("Exit Graphics Mode") command has been sent.

Example:

^PY^-

^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^-

^M02002001000 text in high resolution^-

^IPARAM,NORMAL^G^-

^M0202100 text in normal resolution^-

^PN^-

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Alphanumerics

Purpose Produces alphanumeric text (i.e., numbers and alphabet letters)

in standard, rotated or inverted orientations. A reverse string

order option is also available in the rotated and inverted

orientations.

Mode Graphics

Format (cc) x ht wd jus data [(cc)G] (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

xRepresents an Alphanumeric command. Replace x

with one of the following alphanumeric orientations:

M for Standard Alphanumerics

V for Rotated Clockwise

E for Rotated Counterclockwise

U for Inverted

ht Normal Resolution:

Defines the character height in tenth (.10) inches.

Enter a two-digit height value ranging from 01

through 99 to define a character height of 0.1

through 9.9 inches. VGL automatically understands

the decimal point between the first and second

digits. Height values of 00 and 01 have special

meanings for rotatable/high-speed fonts as

described in “Fonts, Rotatable” on page 82.

High Resolution:

Defines the character height in hundredth (.01)

inches. Enter a three-digit height value ranging

from 001 through 999 to define a character height

of 0.01 inch through 9.99 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal point

between the first and second digits.

The actual height of the printed character increases

in increments of seven printer dots. Changing the ht

field by one printer dot, therefore, may not produce

a change in the actual printed character. You must

increase the field by at least seven printer dots in

order to produce an actual change in character

height.

wd Normal Resolution:

Defines the character width in tenth (.10) inches.

Enter a two-digit width value ranging from 01

through 99 to define a character width of 0.1

through 9.9 inches. VGL automatically understands

the decimal point between the first and second

digits. Width values of 00 and 01 have special

meanings for rotatable/high-speed fonts as

described in “Fonts, Rotatable” on page 82.

Alphanumerics

High Resolution:

Defines the character width in hundredth (.01)

inches. Enter a three-digit width value ranging from

001 through 999 to define a character width of 0.01

inch through 9.99 inches. VGL automatically

understands the decimal point between the first

and second digits.

The actual width of the printed character increases

in increments of six printer dots (characters per

inch). Changing the wd field by one printer dot,

therefore, may not produce a change in the actual

printed character. You must increase the field by at

least six printer dots in order to produce an actual

change in character width.

NOTE: High Resolution mode does not allow a character height or width

parameter of 0. If 0 is used, a 1 is substituted. Fonts, Rotatable (see

page 82) cannot be accessed in High Resolution.

NOTE: In vertical alphanumeric commands, height refers to the physical

height of the character and intercharacter spacing top to bottom on

the page (from the left to right edge of the printed character). Width

refers to the physical width of the character from left to right on the

page (from the bottom to the top of the printed character).

jus Normal Resolution:

Defines vertical justification (position) for character

printing in tenth inches and dot rows. Enter a three-

digit value ranging from 000 through 999 to define

the printing location down from the starting position

of the command sequence. The first two digits

specify 0.1 through 9.9 inches downward

justification; the third digit specifies an additional 0

through 9 dot rows of downward justification. VGL

automatically understands the decimal point

between the first two digits and the third digit is

automatically interpreted as dot rows.

High Resolution:

Defines vertical justification (position) for character

printing in thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit

value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define

the printing location down from the starting position

of the command sequence from 0.0 inch through

99.999 inches. VGL automatically understands the

decimal point between the second and third digits

as thousandths.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

If the data character immediately following the jus

field is not a digit (zero through nine), then you can

omit trailing zeros. For example, the command

^M10010001ABC, results in a 1.000 inch

justification because the three empty spaces in the

jus field (before the characters “ABC”) are

completed with three implied trailing zero digits.

(See “Justification, Vertical” on page 108.)

NOTE: If your data to be printed begin with a number (not a character), then

you must complete the field; otherwise, VGL assumes the number is

a digit in the field value.

As in normal resolution mode, the ht field of either an alphanumeric

command or a height/width command also specifies the height of any

succeeding barcode in the graphics pass. The field value is not

specified in increments of six or seven printer dots, however. In

normal resolution mode, you can select character sizes 10 characters

per inch (cpi), 12 cpi, 15 cpi and size 0 by height and width

parameters in 0 and 1 digit combinations. You cannot perform this

type of character size selection, however, in Extended Graphics/High

Resolution Mode.

data The data characters to print or a specific graphics

command (such as one of the barcode commands,

a horizontal tab command, etc.).

(cc)G (Optional) Reverses the character data from the

actual input order. This parameter is available only

with the Rotated Counterclockwise command (E) or

the Inverted Rotated Alphanumeric command (U).

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by G.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

Comments

The Graphics Mode (PY) must be enabled before sending an

alphanumeric command. Alphanumeric commands must be a

part of the command sequence before using specific graphics

commands. Alphanumeric commands must be used to initiate

any extended graphic command sequence. Other data or graphic

commands can be used with alphanumeric commands.

Examples Normal resolution examples for each of the four alphanumeric

orientations follow. Rotated Clockwise alphanumerics print

characters with a clockwise vertical rotation; the characters are

read top to bottom. Rotated Counterclockwise alphanumerics

print characters with a counterclockwise vertical rotation; the

characters are read bottom to top. Inverted alphanumerics print

characters upside down; the characters are read right to left.

Rotated Counterclockwise and Inverted Rotated alphanumerics

have an optional reverse string parameter option.

Alphanumerics

NOTE: When the alphanumeric command is used simply to introduce one of

the extended graphics commands (such as Horizontal Tabs,

Justification, Dark Print, etc.), the alphanumeric command

parameters are optional and can be entered only as needed.

However, the alphanumeric command parameters are required for

Barcode commands.

Alphanumerics Examples

The following sample commands in this section illustrate some applications

for standard, rotated and inverted alphanumeric features in normal resolution

mode. (Note that the Free Format enable and disable commands, ^F and ^O,

are used.)

Standard Alphanumerics:

^PY^-^F^-

^M06,04,000AaBb^M04,06,000AaBb^-

^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^-

^M03,03,000I^M03,03,030G^M03,03,060P

^M03,03,060I^M03,03,030G^M03,03,000P^-

^O^-^PN^-

Rotated Clockwise Alphanumerics:

^PY^-^F^-

^V06,04,000AaBb^V04,06,000AaBb^-

^O^-^PN^-

alph

Chapter 2

Command Codes

^PY^-^F^-

^V03,03,000I^V03,03,030G^V03,03,060P

^V03,03,060I^V03,03,030G^V03,03,000P^-

^O^-^PN^-

Rotated Counterclockwise Alphanumerics:

^PY^-^F^-

^E06,04,000AaBb^E04,06,000AaBb^-

^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^-

^E03,03,000I^E03,03,030G^E03,03,060P

^E03,03,060I^E03,03,030G^E03,03,000P^-

^O^-^PN^-

alpha.ex4

alpha.ex5

alpha.ex6

Alphanumerics

Inverted Alphanumerics:

^PY^-^F^-

^U06,04,000AaBb^U04,06,000AaBb^-

^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^-

^U03,03,000I^U03,03,030G^U03,03,060P

^U03,03,060I^U03,03,030G^U03,03,000P^-

^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^-

^U03,03,000IGP^U03,03,060PGI^-

^O^-^PN^-

alpha.e

alpha.ex8

alpha.ex

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Alphanumerics Reverse String:

^PY^-^F^-

^E08,05,000IGP^E08,05,000IGP^G^-

^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^-

^M020,020,01000^T01.500HIGH RESOLUTION SMALL PRINT

^I01.500^-

^M006.008.00000^T01.500SIX BY EIGHT

^M010.010.00000^T03.500TEN BY TEN

^M012.010.00000^T05.500TWELVE BY TEN

^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^-

^M020.020.00000^T01.200HIGH RESOLUTION REVERSE STRING

^I00.500^-

^U055.030.00000^T01.000^D upside down^D^-

^U055.030.00000^T01.000^Dupside down reversed^G^D^-

^O^-^PN^-

Boxes

Purpose Produces a rectangular box.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) LB horz vert h v (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

LB The Box command. Enter LB.

horz Normal Resolution:

Defines the horizontal length of the box in tenth

inches and dot columns. Enter a three-digit

horizontal length value ranging from 000 through

999 to define a horizontal length of 00.0 through

99.9 inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0

through 9 to specify 0 through 9 additional dot

columns of length. VGL automatically understands

the decimal between the second and third digits for

tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth

digit as dot columns. For example, entering 0126

specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6-dot column horizontal

length; entering 1016 specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-

dot column horizontal length.

High Resolution:

Defines the horizontal length of the box in

thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal

value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define

a horizontal length of 0.000 inch through 99.999

inches. VGL automatically understands the decimal

between the second and third digits. The horz field

must be at least twice the value of the thickness of

the vertical sides (v).

vert Normal Resolution:

Defines the vertical length of the box in tenth inches

and dot rows. Enter a three-digit vertical length

value ranging from 000 through 999 to define a

vertical length of 00.0 through 99.9 inches and a

fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0

through 9 additional dot rows of length. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits for tenth inches and

automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot rows.

For example, entering 0204 specifies a 2.0-inch

plus 4-dot row vertical length; entering 0242

specifies a 2.4-inch and 2-dot row vertical length.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

High Resolution:

Defines the vertical length of the box in thousandth

inches. Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from

00000 through 99999 to define a vertical length of

0.001 through 99.999 inches. VGL automatically

understands the decimal between the second and

third digits. The vert field must be at least twice the

value of the thickness of the horizontal sides (h).

hNormal Resolution:

Defines the horizontal border thickness in dot

columns. Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9

to specify a horizontal border thickness from 1

through 9 dots.

High Resolution:

Defines the horizontal border thickness in

thousandth inches. Enter a three-digit value

ranging from 000 through 999 to define a horizontal

border thickness from 0.000 through 0.999 inches.

vNormal Resolution:

Defines the vertical border thickness in dot rows.

Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9 to specify

a vertical border thickness from 1 through 9 dots.

High Resolution:

Defines the vertical border thickness in thousandth

inches. Enter a three-digit value ranging from 000

through 999 to define a horizontal border thickness

from 0.000 through 0.999 inches.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

Comments

Box drawing uses horizontal and vertical length parameters.

Boxes are positioned on the page using an alphanumerics

command sequence (such as horizontal tabs, the justification

parameter, etc.). Consequently, an alphanumeric command must

precede a Box command. The horizontal and vertical border

thickness can also be specified in varying line thicknesses.

Carriage Return

Examples The following commands illustrate boxes in normal resolution. As

shown in the examples, changing the horizontal and vertical

length and border thickness parameter values construct a variety

of boxes. (The Graphics Mode Enable command and an

alphanumerics command were previously sent.)

^LB0425,0150,5,2^-

^LB0052,0123,3,2^- ^LB0100,0100,9,9^-

Carriage Return

Purpose Terminates a command.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

- The graphics CR mnemonic. Enter -.

Comments

The VGL Graphics Mode carriage return (CR) performs the same

function as a standard carriage return (hex 0D) when used to

terminate a standard graphics command. When used to

terminate a graphics sequence in an extended graphics

command when Free Format is enabled, this command functions

as a sequence terminator.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Character Height

Purpose Specifies a new alphanumeric height.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) H ht data (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

H The Character Height command. Enter H.

ht Normal Resolution:

Defines the new character height in tenth inches.

Enter a two-digit height value ranging from 01

through 99 to define a character height of 0.1

through 9.9 inches. The decimal point between the

digits is automatically understood by VGL.

High Resolution:

Defines the new character height in hundredth

inches. Enter a three-digit height value ranging

from 001 through 999 to define a character height

of 0.01 inch through 9.99 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal point

between the first and second digits. The actual

height of the printed character increases in

increments of seven printer dots. Changing the ht

field by one printer dot, therefore, may not produce

a change in the actual printed character. You must

increase the field by at least seven printer dots in

order to produce an actual change in character

height.

The printable data for the new height is input

following the new height parameter.

data Identifies the characters to print at the new height.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

Comments The H command specifies a new alphanumerics height

parameter without sending the complete alphanumerics

command sequence again. Only the character height is affected

by this command; character width, justification, rotation, or any

other parameter specifications remain unchanged. The Character

Height command is input as part of the data in one of the

alphanumeric commands.

Character Height

Examples The following sample commands illustrate character height

changes in normal resolution. (The Graphics Mode Enable

command was previously sent to enable Graphics Mode but is

not shown in the examples.)

^M12,06,000Aa^H10Bb^H05Cc^-

^V05,05,000I^H10G^H15P^-

^U03,04,000up^H05side^H10down^-

charht.

charht.2

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Character Width

Purpose Specifies a new alphanumeric width.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) W wd data (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

W The Character Width command. Enter W.

wd Normal Resolution:

Defines the new character width in tenth inches.

Enter a two-digit width value ranging from 01

through 99 to define a character width of 0.1

through 9.9 inches. VGL automatically understands

the decimal point between the digits.

High Resolution:

Defines the new character width in hundredth

inches. Enter a three-digit width value ranging from

001 through 999 to define a character width of 0.01

inch to 9.99 inches. VGL automatically understands

the decimal point between the first and second

digits.

The actual width of the printed character increases

in increments of six printer dots (characters per

inch). Changing the wd field by one printer dot,

therefore, may not produce a change in the actual

printed character. You must increase the field by at

least six printer dots in order to produce an actual

change in character width.

The printable data for the new width is input

following the new width parameter.

data Identifies the characters to print at the new width.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

Comments

The W command specifies a new alphanumerics width parameter

without sending the complete alphanumerics command

sequence again. Only the character width is affected by this

command; character height, justification, rotation, or any other

parameter specifications remain unchanged. The W command is

input as part of the data in one of the alphanumeric commands.

Character Width

Examples The following sample commands illustrate character width

changes in normal resolution.

^PY^-

^M10,10,000A^W02B^W30C^W05D^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^V05,05,000I^W10G^W15P^-

^PN^-

NOTE: The command sequence below also uses the Horizontal Tab (T012,5

and T017,5) command for character spacing.

^PY^-

^E10,10,000I^T012,5^W02G^T017,5^W25P^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^U05,05,000DOWN^W01SIDE^W10UP^-

^PN^-

harwd

.ex

cha

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Character Type

Purpose Selects a character type or character per inch (cpi) density.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format (cc) @ C type (cc)* data (cc)*

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

@ Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to

begin an @ command function.

C Specifies the Character Type command. Enter C.

type (cc)* Represents the type parameter. Enter one of the 2-

digit codes shown in Table 4 to select a character

type, followed by the SFCC. For example, enter

^@C17^* to select 17.65 cpi. This cpi remains

effective until a new @C command is sent.

data The data to be printed in a selected font.

(cc)* Graphics Mode LF. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by * to end the

command sequence.

Comments

The @C command can be used anytime VGL is in the Graphics

Mode. Once a new character type is selected, all standard

Graphics mode text lines are printed in the selected type until

another type is selected or VGL returns to the Normal Mode. If

another type is selected, it must be introduced on a separate line

from the currently selected character type.

Table 4. Character Type Codes

Character Type Code Character Type Selected

05 Double High (.2”)

0A OCR-A

0B OCR-B

10 Standard 10 cpi

12 12 cpi

13 13.33

15 15 cpi

17 17.65

20 20.0 cpi

24 24.0 cpi

Compressed Print

NOTE: Due to different printing technologies and dot sizes, some printers

may not be capable of printing small characters clearly.

Example The following example illustrates changing character type from

the standard characters to 17.65 cpi characters.

^PY^-

Standard Characters in the Graphics Mode

^@C17^*Compressed 17.65 cpi characters after the Character Type

command^*

^@C10^-

^PN^-

NOTE: The second character type is sent to return VGL to standard 10 cpi

print.

Compressed Print

Purpose Selects a compressed print font.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format (cc) #x (cc)- data (cc)*

(cc) #0 (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

#xSpecifies the compressed print font to use. The

values for x and the corresponding compression

are shown in Table 5.

Table 5. Compressed Print Fonts

Selection

Code (x)Compressed Print Font

Characters per Inch (cpi)

0Terminate compressed print

110 cpi

212 cpi

313.33 cpi

415 cpi

517.65 cpi

6OCR-A

7OCR-B

812 cpi

915 cpi

Chapter 2

Command Codes

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator

representing an end to the initial command

sequence. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

initial sequence.

data The data for compressed print. All characters are

printed in the specified compressed print font until

the compressed print command is terminated (0).

(cc)* Graphics Mode LF used as a sequence terminator

representing an end to the data sequence. Enter

the SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately

followed by * to end the data sequence.

(cc)#0 The command to terminate compressed printing.

On a separate line, enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by #0 to

terminate use of the compressed print font.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

The Compressed Print command can be used anytime VGL is in

the Graphics Mode to select one of the compressed print fonts.

The Compressed Print Off command must be on a separate line

from a Compressed Print On command.

Do not place compressed print and alphanumeric commands

from the Extended Graphics command set on the same print line.

All pass-through text data input after the Compressed Print On

command and before the Compressed Print Off command prints

in the selected compressed print font.

Examples #1: 12 cpi Compressed Print Font. The following command

generates the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the 12 cpi

compressed print font.

^PY^-

^#2^-BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^*

^#0^-

^PN^-

#2: 13.33 cpi Compressed Print Font. The following command

generates the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the 13.33

cpi compressed print font.

^PY^-

^#3^-ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^*

^#0^-

^PN^-

compress

Dark Print

#3: 15 cpi Compressed Print Font. The following command

generates the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the 15 cpi

compressed print font.

^PY^-

^#4^-ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^*

^#0^-

^PN^-

#4: 17.65 cpi Compressed Print Font. The following command

generates the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the 17.65

cpi compressed print font.

^PY^-

^#5^-ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^*

^#0^-

^PN^-

Dark Print

Purpose Activates the dark printing feature on line matrix printers to

produce darker images.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) KF data (cc) KF (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

KF The Dark Print command. Enter KF to turn on the

dark printing feature.

data Represents the data characters for dark printing.

(cc) KF Following the data, enter the Special Function

Control Code (SFCC) for your VGL configuration

and KF to turn off the dark printing feature.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

compress

compress.ex5

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Comments

NOTE: Dark printing has no effect on thermal and laser L7032 printers and is

included for compatibility with line matrix printers.

Dark Print command prints all dot positions at half-dot resolution

to produce images with a darker intensity. The KF command

provides special attention when used with barcodes to provide

darker barcodes, yet not change the critical bar-width

dimensions. Human readable data, however, will print in non-dark

mode. Dark print is discussed further in the Chapter 3, on

page 159.

The KF command operates as a toggle. The first KF command

enables dark printing, the second KF disables dark printing, the

third KF enables dark printing, and so on.

All data following the first KF command will print dark until the

second KF command is encountered.

The KF command is a part of the data contained in an

alphanumeric command. When the alphanumeric command

sequence is terminated, dark printing is also disabled.

Reverse printing and shading or mask shading can be combined

with dark printing to produce a variety of different shades.

Example The following sample commands illustrate dark printing.

Combining shading and dark print is also shown.

^PY^-

^M03,03,000IGP^KFIGP^KHIGP^KH^KF^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^V05,05,000IGP^KFIGP^KHIGP^KF^KH^-

^PN^-

Descending Characters

Purpose Prints descending lowercase characters one of two ways: 1) by

extending below the print baseline, or 2) by raising the characters

slightly to completely contain the descending characters above

the print baseline.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) D data (cc)D (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

D The Descending Character command. Enter D.

data The data characters for descending character

printing. Only lowercase descending characters are

printed extending below the print baseline.

(cc)D Following the data, enter the Special Function

Control Code (SFCC) for your VGL configuration

and D to turn off descending character printing.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

Comments

Descending characters are the lowercase characters g, j, p, q,

and y and are the only characters affected by this command.

Normal descending characters extend below the baseline of

normal print. Unless specified, VGL begins each alphanumerics

command sequence with descending character print turned off,

which means the characters are printed completely above the

print baseline.

The D command operates as a toggle. The first D command

enables descending characters to print below the baseline, the

second D command disables this feature, the third D command

enables, and so on. All lowercase descending character data

following the first D command prints below the print baseline until

the next D command is encountered.

The D command is input as part of the data in one of the

alphanumeric commands. When the alphanumerics command

sequence is terminated, descending character printing is also

terminated.

When the D command is turned on, VGL automatically allows

space for the descending characters whether or not descending

characters are part of the data. The amount of space allowed is

two dot rows per tenth inch of character height. This space

produces a gap under the standard print baseline of

non-descending characters. This space also produces a larger

reverse print character image background area.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

NOTE: The default setting for the D command is OFF.

The default setting for the IFONT command, however, is ON.

If the D command is used after an IFONT command and before the

command terminator, the D command will always be ON. The IFONT

command always overrides a D command.

Example The following sample commands illustrate descending character

printing. In the first example, notice that the alphanumerics

command sequence terminator was also used to end descending

character printing. In the second example, notice that when using

the rotate clockwise (^V) command with descending characters,

and dots are positioned in the first dot column, a .10-inch tab was

required to prevent out-of-bounds descending characters.

^PY^-

^M02,02,000IGP or igp^D and IGP or igp^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^V03,03,000^T0010igp^Digp^D^-

^PN^-

descend.ex2

Direct Printer Commands

Purpose Sends control characters for special purposes directly to the Line

Printer Plus emulation.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format See Table 6.

NOTE: The commands in Table 6 are not supported on L7032 printers.

NOTE: Do not use the ^# direct printer command to send hex 03 to the

printer at the start of a line. This is to avoid confusion with the

Compressed Print command described on page 47.

Comments

A detailed understanding of Line Printer Plus function and

response to the control characters is recommended. Refer to the

Line Printer Plus Programmer’s Reference Manual for information

regarding the hex codes for various printer commands.

The Graphics Mode must be entered before sending the direct

printer commands. However, do not use these commands within

an extended graphics command sequence.

Example The following example command sequence sends hex 05 to the

printer, initiating the printer plot command to plot the data.

^PY^-

^% data ^-

Table 6. Direct Printer Commands

Direct Command Hex Code Sent to the Printer

^ ! 01

^ ” 02

^ # 03 (see note below)

^ $ 04

^ % 05

^ & 06

^ ’ 07

^ ( 08

^ . 0E

^ / 0F

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Dot Slew

Purpose Changes the vertical print position by specifying a number of dot

rows to advance the paper from the current print position.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format (cc) D n (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

D The Dot Slew command. Enter D.

nSpecifies the number of dot rows to advance (slew)

the paper from the current print position. Enter a

two-digit number of dot rows ranging from 01

through 99. For example, enter 05 to slew 5 dot

rows, 21 to slew 21 dot rows.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

The (cc)Dn Dot Slew command dot values are interpreted as 60

dpi P-Series dots.

Duplication, Horizontal

Purpose Activates horizontal duplication.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) S # spacing (cc)- data (cc)S (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

S The Horizontal Duplication command. Enter S to

turn on the horizontal duplication feature.

# Specifies the number of horizontal duplications to

print. Enter a two-digit number ranging from 00

through 99 to specify the number of copies.

spacing Represents the amount of spacing, in tenth inches,

between each duplication. The spacing amount

should include a sufficient space to contain the

complete printed result of the duplicated command

sequence plus space for a margin between copies.

The right edge of the last duplication must not

exceed selected page width. Enter a two-digit

number ranging from 00 through 99 to specify a 0.0

through 9.9 inch spacing for the copies.

Duplication, Horizontal

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator

representing an end to the data. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

- to end the command sequence.

data Represents the data to be repeated. Enter any valid

VGL Graphics Mode command. Specific command

sequences are input as part of the Horizontal

Duplication data. These commands are then

repeated as specified in the Horizontal Duplication

command.

(cc)S (cc)- Mandatory Horizontal Duplication command

sequence terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by S, another

SFCC, and - to end terminate the Horizontal

Duplication command sequence.

Comments

The S command operates as a toggle. The first S command

enables horizontal duplication, the second S command disables

horizontal duplication, the third S command enables duplication,

and so on.

All data following the first S command repeats the number of

times specified until the second S command is encountered.

Copies are produced across the page as many times as

requested or until the page width is reached. Any duplications

that would print beyond column 132 are lost and cause an

Element Off Page error (Error 48).

Example The following sample command illustrates horizontal duplication.

This extended graphics command sequence consists of a

Standard Alphanumeric command using the letters "IGP" printed

at a height of 0.2". "IGP" is being duplicated 5 times with a gap of

0.8" between each duplication (0.6" space plus a 0.2" margin

between each duplication).

^PY^-

^S05,08^-^M02,02,000IGP^-^S^-

^PN^-

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Duplication, Horizontal (Version II)

This command performs the same function as (cc)S described on page 54.

The IREPH command can also operate within an Extended Graphics

command. You must enable the Free Format command for this command to

work properly.

Purpose Defines both the number of times data is horizontally duplicated

(repeated), and the horizontal spacing between each duplication.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected or

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IREPH, n, spacing (cc)G data (cc)IREPE

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IREPH, The horizontal duplication command. Enter

IREPH,.

n, Represents the number of times to duplicate the

data horizontally. Enter a value which allows the

characters to print within the horizontal page

boundaries. Enter a value ranging from 1 through

99.

spacing Represents the amount of horizontal spacing

between the start of each set of repeated data.

Enter up to three numbers.

The first and second digits represent horizontal

tenths, and the third digit represents horizontal

dots. If less than three digits are entered, zeros are

automatically inserted from left to right.

Example:

001

012

123

(cc)G The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by G to

terminate the IREPH command.

data Represents the data to be repeated. Enter any valid

VGL Graphics Mode command. Specific command

sequences are input as part of the Horizontal

Duplication data. These commands are then

repeated as specified in the Horizontal Duplication

command.

One Horizontal Duplication command can be

contained within a Horizontal Duplication

command. The total number of characters within

the command sequence (including all repetitions)

must be 256 characters less than the maximum

size of the input buffer.

Duplication, Vertical

(cc)IREPE The horizontal duplication end command. Enter the

SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately

followed by IREPE to end the horizontal duplication

command.

Comments

Multiple IREPH/IREPE duplication loops can be used in a form

and can also be nested. Vertical duplication loops (IREPV/

IREPE) can also be used in conjunction with IREPH. Each

IREPH must have a corresponding IREPE.

Example The following command repeats "IGP" 3 times horizontally using

the IREPH, command, separating each set of "IGP" with 5 tenths

plus 2 dots of horizontal spacing.

^PY^-^F^-

^IREPH,3,52^G^M02,02,000IGP^-^IREPE

^O^-^PN^-

Duplication, Vertical

Purpose Prints multiple copies of data vertically down the page.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) R # (cc)- data (cc)Z(cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

R Specifies the Vertical Duplication command. Enter

R to activate vertical repetition.

#Specifies the number of times to repeat the data,

that is, specifies the number of copies to print.

Enter a four digit number ranging from 0000

through 9999 to specify the number of copies.

(cc)- Mandatory Graphics Mode CR terminator. Enter

the SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately

followed by - to end terminate the initial Vertical

Duplication command sequence.

data Represents the data to be repeated. Enter any valid

VGL Graphics Mode command. Specific command

sequences are input as part of the Vertical

Duplication data. These commands are then

repeated as specified in the Vertical Duplication

command.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

One Vertical Duplication command can be

contained within a Vertical Duplication command.

The total number of characters within the command

sequence (including all repetitions) must be 256

characters less than the maximum size of the input

buffer.

(cc)Z(cc)- Mandatory Vertical Duplication command

sequence terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by Z, another

SFCC, and - to end terminate the Vertical

Duplication command sequence. If a Vertical

Duplication command is nested within a Vertical

Duplication command, this single terminator

sequence terminates both Vertical Duplication

commands.

If Auto Increment/Decrement command parameters

are used with this command (page 59), this

terminator causes all the numeric fields to increase/

decrease (as specified by the Auto Increment/

Decrement command) at the end of the repeat

pass. If the (cc)ZO(cc)- (alpha O) terminator is

used, all numeric fields are updated sequentially

within the repeat pass. See “Auto Increment/

Decrement Vertical Duplication” on page 59 for

more information.

Example The following example illustrates the Vertical Duplication

command. Alphanumeric commands, line elements, and

standard graphics commands are repeated 3 times down the

page. (The ^*^* causes the two line feeds on which the data is

repeated. See the Free Format commands discussed on pages

99 and 102.)

^PY^-^F^-

^R0003^-^M03,03,000A Line^LS0100,0010^-

^M^D^S4compressed characters^-

^M^D^S1Repeated 3 times^*^*^Z^-

^O^-^PN^-

tdu

Duplication, Vertical

Auto Increment/Decrement Vertical Duplication

Purpose Updates increment and decrement data within a Vertical

Duplication command sequence (page 57).

Format (cc) Y start# +/- amount (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

Y Specifies the Auto Increment/Decrement

command. Enter Y to activate automatic update of

repeated numeric data fields.

start# Represents the starting numeric data to automati-

cally update. Enter the starting number of the

numeric data field ranging from 1 through 12 digits.

This number is the first numeric data printed and

subsequently updated according to the +/- and

amount parameters. Spaces are converted to zeros

when necessary.

+/- Specifies increment or decrement updates to the

numeric data. Enter + to increment the data or

enter - to decrement the data.

amount Represents the numeric amount to update the data

field. Enter the update amount ranging from 1

through 12 digits. Spaces are converted to zeros

when necessary.

(cc)G The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by G to ter-

minate the auto increment/decrement command.

The terminator used in the Vertical Duplication command

determines when each inner auto increment field of a nested

repeat sequence is updated (incremented/decremented). If the

(cc)Z(cc)- Vertical Duplication command terminator is used, each

inner field is updated at the end of the repeat pass. For example,

four fields within a repeat pass would all be updated together at

the end of each repeat pass. If, however, the (cc)ZO(cc)- Vertical

Duplication command terminator is used in the same example,

each of the four inner fields is updated sequentially within the

overall repeat pass.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example 1 The following example illustrates the Vertical Duplication

command with Auto Increment/Decrement of numeric fields

updated at the end of the repeat pass. (The ^* on the fourth line

causes a line feed on which the second set of Invoice data is

printed. See the Free Format commands discussed on pages 99

and 102.)

^PY^-^F^-

^R0002^-^M02,02,000Invoice

^J010^LS0106,0004^J000 #^Y5010+5^G^-

^R0004^-^M01,01,010Part #^Y130+2^G^-^*^Z^-

^O^-^PN^-

Duplication, Vertical

Example 2 The following example illustrates the same Vertical Duplication

command but uses the different terminator for Auto Increment/

Decrement of numeric fields updated sequentially within the

repeat pass. (The ^* on the fourth line causes a line feed on

which the second set of Invoice data is printed. Refer to the Free

Format commands discussed on pages 99 and 102.)

^PY^-^F^-

^R0002^-^M02,02,000Invoice

^J010^LS0100,0004^J000 #^Y5010+5^G^-

^R0004^-^M01,01,010Part #^Y130+2^G^-^*^ZO^-

^O^-^PN^-

(cc)Y can be used in conjunction with IREPV and IREPH to

achieve auto increment/decrement on both vertical duplication

and horizontal duplication for the data, including numeric,

alphabetical and barcode data. (cc)Y can also work with (cc)R

vertical duplication command (page 57), but NOT with (cc)S

horizontal duplication command (page 54). If the data is non-

alphanumeric (except for space characters) and you are using

the (cc)Y command with the (cc)R Vertical Duplication command,

an error occurs. If the data exceeds 12 digits in length, an error

also occurs.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example The following example illustrates the vertical/horizontal

duplication commands using IREPV/IREPH.

^PY^-^F^-

^IREPV,2,0050^G

^IREPH,3,200^G

^M0202010^YABCD+1^G^-

^M0202010^Y0001-2^G^-

^M0202010^Y000A1+3^G^-

^M0505010^IBARC,C39,E,^YCAV+1^G^-

^IREPE^-

^O^-^PN^-

Duplication, Vertical (Version II)

This command performs an enhanced function of the (cc)R command

described on page 57. The IREPV command can also operate within an

Extended Graphics command, and vertical spacing between each duplication

can be specified. You must enable the Free Format command for this

command to work properly.

Purpose Defines both the number of times data is vertically duplicated

(repeated), and the vertical spacing between each duplication.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IREPV, n, spacing (cc)G data (cc)IREPE

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

IREPV, The vertical duplication command. Enter IREPV,.

n, Represents the number of times to duplicate the

data vertically. Enter a value ranging from 1

through 9999.

spacing Represents the amount of vertical spacing to

separate each set of repeated data. Enter up to

four numbers.

The first, second and third digits represent vertical

tenths, and the fourth digit represents vertical dots.

If less than four digits are entered, zeros are

automatically inserted from left to right.

Example:

0001

0012

0123

1234

(cc)G The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by G to

terminate the IREPV command.

data Represents the data to be repeated. Enter any valid

VGL Graphics Mode command. Specific command

sequences are input as part of the Vertical

Duplication data. These commands are then

repeated as specified in the Vertical Duplication

command.

One Vertical Duplication command can be

contained within a Vertical Duplication command.

The total number of characters within the command

sequence (including all repetitions) must be 256

characters less than the maximum size of the input

buffer.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

(cc)IREPE The vertical duplication end command. Enter the

SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately

followed by IREPE to end the vertical duplication

command.

Comments

Multiple IREPV/IREPH duplication loops can be used in a form

and can also be nested. Horizontal duplication loops (IREPH/

IREPE) can also be used in conjunction with IREPV. Each IREPV

must have a corresponding IREPE.

Example The following command repeats "IGP" 3 times vertically using the

IREPV, command, separating each line with 3 tenths plus 4 dots

of vertical spacing.

^PY^-^F^-

^IREPV,3,4^G^M02,02,000IGP^-^IREPE

^O^-^PN^-

Dynamic Form Commands

Purpose Permits an entire form or label to be sent to VGL with variable

data entered into specific locations on each form.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format (cc) B (cc)- data (cc)t

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

B Specifies the Dynamic Form command. Enter B to

begin dynamic forms.

(cc)- The Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by - to ter-

minate the initial Dynamic Form command

sequence.

data Represents the dynamic form data. Any text,

graphics command sequences, or Dynamic Form

Field Length, Copy or Repeat commands are

entered as part of the data. (See Comments.)

This is not the dynamic data for the variable fields;

this data represents all information required for the

boilerplate form.

(cc)tTerminates the complete Dynamic Form command

sequence. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by ] or } to

terminate the Dynamic Form processing. The

dynamic data for the variable fields can be sent

following termination of the completed Dynamic

Form command.

Comments

Dynamic form commands allow a boilerplate form to be

transmitted once. The data that changes with each form is

provided in the variable data fields after the Dynamic Form

command is terminated. Variable fields can include barcode data

fields.

The Dynamic Form commands consist of the primary Dynamic

Form command referenced above, which enables dynamic form

generation, and three additional commands listed below. These

additional commands are added to the primary command

according to your particular dynamic form requirements:

•Dynamic Form Field Length (defined on page 67) specifies the

number of data bytes expected to fill a variable data field.

•Dynamic Form Copy Fields (defined on page 69) copies fields

within the form.

•Dynamic Form Repeat Form (defined on page 71) repeats the

complete form.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Dynamic Form Special Command Definitions

The graphics carriage return, line feed, form feed, vertical tab, and universal

terminator commands are interpreted differently when used within the

Dynamic Form commands. These interpretations are described below.

(CR) Carriage Return (^-) - Fills the remainder of the current dynamic field

with spaces. If this is the only input, the entire field is filled with spaces.

(LF) Line Feed (^*) - Fills (pads) the remainder of the current dynamic field

and all remaining dynamic fields in the form with spaces. If this is the only

input, the entire field is filled with spaces. If used within a dynamic copy

command, all fields to the end of the current copy are filled with spaces. If

used with a dynamic repeat command, all remaining fields of all copies are

filled with spaces.

(FF) Form Feed (^,) - Performs the same function as LF, except for use

within a dynamic copy command. If used within a dynamic copy command, all

fields to the end of copy are filled with spaces, and all fields continue to fill

with spaces until the copy count is complete.

(VT) Vertical Tab (^+) - Causes the remainder of the current dynamic field to

be ignored. No data is printed in the current dynamic field if this is the only

input in the field.

(G) Universal Terminator (^G) - Terminates the dynamic Form function and

completes the current graphics command sequence.

Example Examples using the Dynamic Data command features are

provided following the discussion of each command.

Dynamic Form Commands

Dynamic Form: Field Length

Purpose Assigns a field length to each variable field in a boilerplate

dynamic form.

Format (cc) t length (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

tSpecifies the Dynamic Form Field Length

command. Enter [ or { to designate a field length

follows.

length Represents the field length. Enter a three-digit

number to inform VGL how many data bytes are

expected to fill a certain variable data field. Each

variable data field on the form must have an associ-

ated field length.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

Comments

This Dynamic Form: Field Length command is supplied as part of

the data within the Dynamic Form command. The length is

assigned to a variable field at the current position based on all

other commands and data within the Dynamic Form command.

For example, if alphanumeric commands are input followed by a

tab followed by this length command, the length is assigned

beginning at the position after the alphanumeric command and

tab are executed.

Each variable field in a boilerplate dynamic form must have a field

length assigned. The field length specifies how many data bytes

are required to fill the field. For example, a form might have a

variable field called "quantity" which could be specified as three

data bytes. VGL would then expect three data bytes supplied

dynamically to fill that field.

Following the completed Dynamic Form command, the data is

sent and the forms are processed. The data is sent in the order of

the variable fields. The first data sent fills the first variable field;

the second data sent fills the second variable field, etc. The data

must be the same length as the field or special dynamic form

commands (CR, LF, FF explained on page 66) must be used to

fill the field.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example This example illustrates the Dynamic Form command. Three

variable fields are used: one each for Price, Quantity, and Total.

Following the command sequence, the dynamic data is sent to fill

the variable fields. The special use of the CR command for

dynamic forms is shown in the example with the dynamic data.

^PY^-^F^-

^B^-^M02,02,000Price^T0220^[005^-

^M02,02,002Quantity^T0220^[002^-

^M02,02,002Total^T0220^[006^-^*^*^]

$1.5004$6.00^-

$1.0525$26.25

$8.950^-

^O^-^PN^-

Three sets of dynamic data in this example are defined as follows:

1. $1.50 Price, 04 Quantity, $6.00 Total, CR to fill with spaces

2. $1.05 Price, 25 Quantity, $26.25 total

3. $8.95 Price, 0 Quantity, CR to fill with spaces

4. End of data (^G)

Dynamic Form Commands

Dynamic Form: Copy Fields

Purpose Duplicates specific fields or data within a boilerplate dynamic

form.

Format (cc) C # copydata (cc)Z(cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

C Specifies the Dynamic Form Copy Fields

command. Enter C to copy fields within the form.

# Specifies the number of copies. Enter a two-digit

number to inform VGL how many copies of the

copy data to make within the form.

copydata Represents the copy data. Any text or graphics

command sequences (including Dynamic Form

Field Length) are entered as part of the data.

This is not the dynamic data for the variable fields;

this data represents all information to copy within

the boilerplate form.

(cc)Z(cc)- Terminates the copy sequence. Enter the SFCC for

your VGL configuration immediately followed by Z,

another SFCC, and - or another valid graphics

command mnemonic to terminate the Dynamic

Form Copy Fields sequence.

Comments

The dynamic copy command is supplied as part of the data within

the Dynamic Form command. Do not use this command with the

Dynamic Form: Repeat command (page 71).

The LF and FF commands (as previously described on page 66)

have an additional meaning when used with Dynamic Form:

Copy Fields commands.

Example The following example illustrates the Dynamic Form: Copy Fields

command. As in the previous example (page 68), the same three

variable fields are used for Price, Quantity, and Total, except that

the Price and Quantity fields are copied. Following the Dynamic

Form command sequence, the dynamic data is sent to fill the

variable fields. The special use of the LF command for dynamic

form copy fields is shown in the example with the dynamic data.

^PY^-^F^-

^B^-^M02,02,000Price^T0160^[005^*^*

^C02^M01,01Quantity^T0100^[002

^M01,01^T0170Total^T0250^[006^-

^*^Z^-^*^*^]

$1.5004$06.00

10$15.00

$1.0525$26.25

50$52.50

$8.9502$17.90

$8.95^,

Chapter 2

Command Codes

^O^-^PN^-

The dynamic data in the above example is defined below.

1. $1.50 Price, 04 Quantity, $06.00 Total

2. 10 Quantity, $15.00 Total

3. $1.05 Price, 25 Quantity, $26.25 Total

4. 50 Quantity, $52.50 Total

5. $8.95 Price, 02 Quantity, $17.90 Total

6. End of data in these fields (^*)

7. $8.95 Price, 0 Quantity, and FF to fill all fields with spaces until copy

count is complete.

8. End of data (^G)

dyn.

Dynamic Form Commands

Dynamic Form: Repeat

Purpose Repeats (duplicates) an entire form within a boilerplate dynamic

form.

Format (cc) R formdata (cc)Z(cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

R Specifies the Dynamic Form: Repeat command.

Enter R to repeat the boilerplate form.

formdata Represents the dynamic form data. Any text,

graphics command sequences, or dynamic form

field length, are entered as part of the data.

This is not the dynamic data for the variable fields;

this data represents all information required for the

boilerplate form to be repeated. The number of

copies of the form is specified as part of the

dynamic data sequence after the dynamic form is

processed.

(cc)Z(cc)- Terminates the repeat sequence. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

Z, another SFCC, and - or another valid graphics

command mnemonic to terminate the Dynamic

Form Copy Fields sequence.

Comments

The Dynamic Form: Repeat command is supplied as the first

input of the data parameter within the Dynamic Form command.

Do not use this command with the Dynamic Form: Copy Fields

command (page 69).

The LF and FF commands (as previously described on page 66)

have an additional meaning when used with Dynamic Form:

Repeat commands.

When the data is supplied, the first parameter becomes a four-

digit repeat number field. For example, 0003 before the first

dynamic data byte specifies three repeated forms with the data.

The repeat number field must be supplied with each set of data

when the Dynamic Form: Repeat command is used. If only one

copy of the form is required, enter 0001 as the repeat number.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example This example illustrates the Dynamic Form: Repeat command.

The Price field repeats with a five-digit field length. Following the

Dynamic Form command sequence, the dynamic data with the

repeat quantities is sent. The special use of the CR command for

dynamic forms is shown in the example with the dynamic data.

^PY^-^F^-

^B^-^R^-^M00,00,000^T0160Price^[005^-

^*^*^Z^-^]

0003$1.50

0002$1.0^-

0001$8.95

0000^G

^O^-^PN^-

The dynamic data in this example is defined as:

1. 3 copies with $1.50 Price

2. 2 copies with $1.0 Price, CR to fill with spaces

3. 1 copy with $8.95 Price

4. No data (^G)

dyn.e

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)

Purpose To use the software-controlled vertical formatter which allows you

to program frequently used lines on forms and documents for

efficient printing processes when merging operations (such as

invoicing or payrolling).

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format See Table 7.

NOTE: The codes in Table 7 are not supported on L7032 printers.

Table 7. EVFU Command Codes

EVFU Code Command

Start Load ^ >

Channel: 1 (TOF) ^ 0

Channel 2 ^ 1

Channel 3 ^ 2

Channel 4 ^ 3

Channel 5 ^ 4

Channel 6 ^ 5

Channel 7 ^ 6

Channel 8 ^ 7

Channel 9 ^ 8

Channel 10 ^ 9

Channel 11 ^ :

Channel 12 ^ ;

Channel 13 ^ <

Channel 14 ^ =

End Load ^ ?

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Comments

By flagging each line to be printed, the EVFU automatically

moves the printhead to the identified lines. The EVFU provides

14 channels (line identification codes) to identify up to 132 lines

on a form. For complete EVFU information, refer to your Line

Printer Plus Programmer's Reference Manual.

The EVFU is loaded with a program of line identification codes,

one code for each line of the form. The program includes a Start

Load code to initiate the load routine, a series of line identification

codes, and an End Load code. After the memory is loaded, a line

identification code occurring in the data stream causes the EVFU

to slew to the identified line. To clear the EVFU memory, send a

Start Load code with no channel codes or End Load code.

The Start Load, End Load, and Channel Code commands are

listed in Table 7. A sample EVFU form is shown in Table 8.

Table 8. Sample EVFU Form

Form Data Form Line # EVFU Load

Program

EVFU

Command

Code

Start Load ^>

1Ch 2 ^1

2Ch 2 ^1

Company: Timmy’s Toys 3Ch 1 ^0

4Ch 2 ^1

5Ch 2 ^1

6Ch 2 ^1

7Ch 2 ^1

Item: Tricycle 8Ch 3 ^2

9Ch 2 ^1

Color: Red 10 Ch 4 ^3

11 Ch 2 ^1

12 Ch 2 ^1

Quantity: 45 13 Ch 5 ^4

14 Ch 2 ^1

15 Ch 2 ^1

P/O Number: TT-1203 16 Ch 6 ^5

17 Ch 2 ^1

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)

The format for the form definition program sent from the host computer is as

follows:

1. The EVFU Start Load code (^>) is sent first. VGL must be in the Graphics

Mode to load and use the EVFU in the Graphics Mode.

2. The Channel 2 code (^1) is sent twice to assign the first two lines of the

form as fillers. Filler lines are not called by the print program. The same

channel code can be used to assign all filler lines of the form.

3. The Channel 1 code (^0), the top-of-form (TOF) code, is sent to assign

form line number 3. This is the first line of the form with print data. In the

sample form, this line is used for company name information. (Alternately,

the TOF code could be assigned to the first line of the form and a unique

channel code assigned to line 3.)

4. The Channel 2 code is again sent four times to assign line numbers 4

through 7 as fillers.

5. The Channel 3 code (^2) is sent to assign line number 8. In the sample

form, this line is used for item information.

6. The Channel 2 code is sent to assign line number 9 as a filler.

7. The Channel 4 code (^3) is sent to assign line number 10. In the sample

form, this line is used for color information.

8. The Channel 2 code is sent twice to assign line numbers 11 and 12 as a

fillers.

9. The Channel 5 code (^4) is sent to assign line number 13. In the sample

form, this line is used for quantity information.

10. The Channel 2 code is sent twice to assign line numbers 14 and 15 as a

fillers.

11. The Channel 6 code (^5) is sent to assign line number 16. In the sample

form, this line is used for purchase order number information.

12. The Channel 2 code is sent twice to assign line numbers 17 and 18 as a

fillers.

13. The Channel 7 code (^6) is sent to assign line number 19. In the sample

form, this line is used for date information.

14. The Channel 2 code is sent to assign line number 20 as a filler.

15. The EVFU End Load code (^?) is sent last to terminate the memory load

routine.

18 Ch 2 ^1

Date: 12/24/86 19 Ch 7 ^6

20 Ch 2 ^1

End Load ^?

Table 8. Sample EVFU Form

Form Data Form Line # EVFU Load

Program

EVFU

Command

Code

Chapter 2

Command Codes

After the EVFU is loaded, sending one of the EVFU codes in the data stream

(or as a line terminator) causes the printer to slew the paper to the line

assigned to the EVFU code sent.

Emphasized Print

Purpose Selects emphasized (bold) character printing.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) @ E (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

@ Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to

begin an @ command function.

E Specifies the Emphasized Print command. Enter E

and all characters on the line are emphasized.

Emphasized print is automatically reset upon

receipt of the line terminator.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

Emphasized print is available when VGL is in the Graphics Mode.

Emphasized print is a line-by-line print attribute; it is selected

once and all characters in the line are emphasized. The @E

command must be used prior to any printable data in the line, and

it is automatically reset when a line terminator is received. When

printing text, this command produces the same output as the

Dark Print command.

Example The following example illustrates changing character type from

the standard characters to emphasized characters.

^PY^-

Standard Characters in the Graphics Mode^*

^@E^-Emphasized characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP^*^*

^PN^-

Emulation Switch

NOTE: The Emulation Switch command is not supported on L7032 printers.

Purpose Switches to a different emulation.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IEMUL, des (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IEMUL, The emulation switch command. Enter IEMUL,.

des Enter PGL to switch to PGL emulation. Enter PPI1

to switch to ZGL emulation.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments Once the system is switched to a new emulation, VGL will be

reset as the default. There is no need to exit the graphic mode

separately.

Font Load

Purpose Load binary TrueType font (.ttf) or Intellifont (.sf) into RAMDISK

or flash memory.

Mode Standard Graphics mode

Format (cc)ILOAD, name, size [,DISK] (cc)G data (cc)G(cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

ILOAD, The font load command. Enter ILOAD,.

name Specify associated binary TrueType font or

Intellifont data by name. Enter the name of the font,

including its extension. The maximum length of the

name is 8 characters and the maximum length of

the extension is 3 characters. For example,

93952.sf specifies Courier Bold (Intellifont) and

arial.ttf would represent Arial (TrueType). The

name is used by (cc) IFONT,N command.

size Enter the size, in bytes, of the binary TrueType font

or Intellifont data.

DISK Optional parameter to store the binary data in flash

memory. Enter DISK. By default, the binary data is

stored in RAMDISK when DISK is not specified.

(cc)G The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by G to

terminate the ILOAD, command.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

data The binary TrueType font or Intellifont data to be

stored in memory.

(cc)G The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by G to

terminate the binary font data parameter.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comment When loading fonts to RAMDISK, the printer files will not be

saved to RAMDISK when the printer is powered off. When

loading fonts to flash memory, the printer files will be saved when

the printer is powered off. Both RAMDISK and flash memory

support file operations such as saving, reading, and deleting files.

Font, Selecting Default (Version II)

Purpose Selects a default font.

Mode Standard Graphics or Graphics with an Extended Graphics

Command selected. When this command is executed as an

Extended Graphics command, descender mode automatically

turns on.

Format (cc) IFONT,S, n (cc)G

(cc) IFONT,N, name (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IFONT, Specifies the IFONT command. Enter IFONT,.

S,nRepresents the selected font value. Enter S,.

Replace n with a value ranging from 1 through 13,

or 100 or 101, according to the IFONT values

shown in Table 9 or as shown in the Font Values

section below.

N,name Represents the selected TrueType font or Intellifont

(AGFA) by name. Enter N, and the name of the font

with its extension. The maximum length of the

name is 8 characters and the maximum length of

the extension is 3 characters. For example,

93952.sf specifies Courier Bold (AGFA) and

arial.ttf represents Arial (TrueType). If this

parameter is used, then IFONT S, should not be

used.

(cc)G The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by G to ter-

minate the IFONT,S, command.

Font, Selecting Default (Version II)

NOTE: For thermal printers a Letter Gothic font at the higher quality NLQ is

always used.

Comments

When this command is used within an Extended Graphics

command, the default font is selected for Extended Graphics

printing and the four orientations of the Alphanumerics command

(page 32) are available. When this command is used in a

Standard Graphics command, the default font is selected for

standard printing only.

Table 9. IFONT, Values

Font # (n)Font Description

1Draft 10 cpi

2Draft 12 cpi

3Draft 15 cpi

4Draft 7.5 cpi

5NLQ 10 cpi

6NLQ 12 cpi

7NLQ 13.33 cpi

8NLQ 15 cpi

9NLQ 17.65 cpi

10 OCR-A Size 1 10 cpi

11 OCR-B Size 1 10 cpi

12 Draft 10 cpi

13 Draft 10 cpi

100 20 cpi

101 24 cpi

xxxxx AGFA font or Bitmap font

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Font Values

The ^IFONT,S command is used to select proportional fonts. The following list

indicates each of the font values and how they are used:

0 - 199 These values are already defined. When the

^IFONT command is received with one of

these values, it selects the standard font

(Letter Gothic) and selects the CPI (as

shown in Table 9).

89001 - 89003 These values select an Printronix bitmap font

on the flash memory. The least significant

digit indicates which font is selected (for

example 89001 selects bitmap font 1).

See “Bitmap Fonts” below.

90000 - 99999 These values select a Printronix proportional

font, as described below.

Font Selection

Fonts are selected using the ^IFONT command, as follows:

^IFONT,S,XXXXX^G

The parameter XXXXX indicates the font selected. The rest of the command

is parsed and acted upon based upon the font number selected.

^IFONT,N,name^G

Represents the selected TrueType font or Intellifont (AGFA) by name. Enter

N, and the name of the font with its extension. The maximum length of the

name is 8 characters and the maximum length of the extension is 3

characters.

Bitmap Fonts

Font values of 89001 - 89003 select a bitmap font. The size of the font is

determined by the font. The font on the flash memory is in the HP

PCL

Bitmap format. The file names for the fonts are CUSTOMx.FNT (where x is

the font number from 1 through 3).

Font, Selecting Default (Version II)

Printronix/AGFA Fonts

Font values of 90000 - 99999 select an AGFA font. When using an AGFA or

TrueType font, additional optional parameters are available to modify the font.

The syntax for selecting an AGFA font is:

^IFONT,S,XXXXX [,BOLD] [,RSLANT / ,LSLANT] [POINT [,WIDTH]]^G

The syntax for selecting an AGFA or TrueType font by name is:

^IFONT,N,name [,BOLD] [,RSLANT / ,LSLANT] [POINT [,WIDTH]]^G

The parameter XXXXX indicates the font to be selected, by number. If the font

number is an AGFA font (value 90000 - 99999), then it selects the desired

AGFA font, and also interprets the optional parameters. If a bitmap font is

selected (value 89001 - 89003), then the font is selected, but no optional

parameters are allowed. The name parameter indicates the font to be

selected, by name (e.g. “arial.ttf”)

If the ,BOLD parameter is specified, the font is printed in bold. If the ,RSLANT

or ,LSLANT parameter is specified, the font is printed slanted to the left or

right (pseudo-italics).

If the POINT parameter is specified, it selects the height (point size) of the

text. This is a numeric value in 1/4 points (1/288"). In addition if the POINT

parameter is specified a WIDTH parameter may also be specified. If given, it

is in 1/4 points (or 1/288"). If it is 0 or is not given, the standard aspect ratio is

used.

The file name on the flash memory for the AGFA fonts is XXXXX.SF, where

XXXXX is the font number.

Pass-through Mode

If the font is selected in standard graphics mode, it applies to all text in

standard graphics mode. In addition, this font applies to text printed when

outside graphics mode (i.e. after VGL is terminated with the ^PN^- command).

If the UNIFORM FONTS menu selection is ENABLED, the typeface also

applies to text within extended graphics mode. If it is DISABLED, the standard

font is used within extended graphics mode, and returns to the selected font

when the graphic pass is terminated.

Extended Graphic Mode

If the font is selected when in extended graphics mode, the font selected is

the selected font for this graphics pass. If the UNIFORM FONTS selection is

ENABLED, it also affects the typeface used for standard graphics mode text

and future graphic passes. If the UNIFORM FONTS selection is DISABLED, it

does not affect the font for standard graphics mode text or future graphic

passes.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Examples

The following examples illustrate how to select a font using the IFONT,S, and

IFONT,N, formats.

Example 1. To print “This is Courier font” in Courier font face:

^PY^-^M0202000^IFONT,S,93952^GThis is Courier font^-^PN^-

Example 2. To print “This is TrueType font” in Arial font face:

^PY^-^M0202000^IFONT,N,arial.ttf^GThis is TrueType font^-^PN^-

Fonts, Rotatable

Purpose Using special parameter values within any of the four

alphanumerics commands described on page 32, you can specify

four different fonts.

Mode Normal resolution Graphics with an Extended Graphics

Command selected.

Format (cc) expand font jus data (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

expand Represents one of the alphanumeric command

mnemonics: Enter M for horizontal, V for clockwise,

E for counterclockwise, or U for inverted.

font Represents the four-digit font parameter value

which selects the font. Font parameter values are

shown in Table 10.

jus Normal Resolution:

Defines vertical justification (position) for character

printing in tenth inches and dot rows. Enter a three-

digit value ranging from 000 through 999 to define

the printing location down from the starting position

of the command sequence. The first two digits

specify 0.1 through 9.9 inches downward justifica-

tion; the third digit specifies an additional 0 through

9 dot rows of downward justification. The decimal

point between the first two digits is automatically

understood by VGL and the third digit is automati-

cally interpreted as dot rows.

High Resolution:

Defines the horizontal length of the form in

thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal

value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define

a horizontal length of 0.000 inch to 99.999 inches.

VGL automatically understands the decimal

between the second and third digits.

NOTE: If your data to be printed begin with a number (not a character), then

you must complete the field; otherwise, VGL assumes the number is

a digit in the field value.

Fonts, Rotatable

data The data characters for printing in the rotatable

font.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

Compressed Print Density Fonts provide six other fonts with

higher density print characteristics. See “Fonts, Compressed

Print Density” on page 85.

Each of the three pitches, 10 cpi, 12 cpi, and 15 cpi (measured in

characters per inch, cpi) produce non-expandable characters 0.1-

inch high and 3, 4, or 5 dot columns wide with a one-dot column

intercharacter spacing.

The 7 cpi font produces non-expandable characters 0.2-inch high

and 0.15-inch wide with a 2-dot column intercharacter spacing at

approximately 7 cpi.

You can select any specific font from any of the four

alphanumerics commands using the Font Parameter (special

combinations of the alphanumeric command height and width

parameters) as described in Table 10.

The Rot. Char Size option setting (from the front panel menu)

determines if rotated (clockwise / counter-clockwise), expanded

characters have a different size than an unrotated character with

the same size parameters ("Adjusted") or the same size ("Not

Adjusted"). The previous VGL version always operated in the

Adjusted mode.

The Adjusted mode reflects rotating a fixed 5x7 cell character on

a 60x72 dpi, non-symmetrical printer. The Not Adjusted mode

reflects rotating on a symmetrical dpi printer.

Table 10. Rotatable Fonts

Font Size Impact Printer

Character Dimensions*

(Vert X Horiz)

Alphanumeric Command

Font Parameter Value

7 cpi 14 dots (V) X 8 dots 00,00

10 cpi 7 dots (V) X 5 dots 01,01

12 cpi 7 dots (V) X 4 dots 00,01

15 cpi 7 dots (V) X 3 dots 01,00

* 10, 12, and 15 cpi use an intercharacter spacing of one dot position. The

elongated font uses an intercharacter spacing of two dot positions. Vertical

by horizontal dimensions above are based on the 60 X 72 dpi dots produced

on line matrix printers.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Examples The following examples illustrate the available fonts. For each

example, the Graphics Mode command (^PY^-) was previously

sent but not shown.

10 cpi Font - The following command generates the uppercase alphabet with

numbers 0-9 in 10 cpi:

^M01,01,000ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

12 cpi Font - The following command generates the uppercase alphabet with

numbers 0-9 in 12 cpi:

^M00,01,000ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

15 cpi Font - The following command generates the uppercase alphabet with

numbers 0-9 in 15 cpi:

^M01,00,000ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

7 cpi Font - The following command generates the uppercase alphabet with

numbers 0-9 in 7 cpi:

^M00,00,000ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

Rotatable Font - The following commands combine rotated fonts with

alphanumeric commands.

^M05,05,000IGP^M01,01,000IGP^-

font.ex1

font.ex2

font.ex3

ont.

ex5

Fonts, Compressed Print Density

^V03,03,0003 X 3^V01,00,000IGP^-

Fonts, Compressed Print Density

Purpose Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch (cpi).

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) S f data (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

S The Compressed Print Density command. Enter S.

fRepresents the Compressed Print Density font.

Replace f with a value ranging from 1 through 9 to

select the compressed print density font as

described in Table 11. Standard print density is 10

cpi. Each character font is .1-inch high. The font

sizes are illustrated in the examples beginning on

page 87.

data The data characters for printing in the Compressed

Print Density font.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your configuration immediately

followed by - to end the command sequence.

font.ex6

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Comments

Use Compressed Print Density commands as part of the

Alphanumerics command. Reverse print and rotated commands

are not available with the Compressed Print feature. Characters

selected with this command print only in the standard horizontal

orientation. A Reverse Print or rotated alphanumeric command

specified in the command sequence is ignored.

Table 11. Compressed Print Density Font Selection

fFont Selected

110 cpi

212 cpi

313.33 cpi

415 cpi

517.65 cpi

6OCR-A font at 10 cpi

7OCR-B font at 10 cpi

812 cpi

915 cpi

Fonts, Compressed Print Density

Compressed Print Density Font Examples

The following examples illustrate the commands and print samples which

generate the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the available

compressed print density fonts. Notice the height and width parameters of the

alphanumerics command does not apply to the data specified for compressed

print.

f = 1 (10 cpi)

^PY^-

^M03,02,000^S1ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

^PN^-

f = 2 (12 cpi)

^PY^-

^M03,02,000^S2ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

^PN^-

f = 3 (13.33 cpi)

^PY^-

^M03,02,000^S3ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

^PN^-

f = 4 (15 cpi)

^PY^-

^M03,02,000^S4ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

^PN^-

densi

density

density.ex

Chapter 2

Command Codes

f = 5 (17.65 cpi)

^PY^-

^M03,02,000^S5ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

^PN^-

f = 6 (OCR-A 10 cpi)

^PY^-

^M03,02,000^S6ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

^PN^-

f = 7 (OCR-B 10 cpi)

^PY^-

^M03,02,000^S7ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

^PN^-

Form Feed

Purpose Performs a form feed (hex 0C) function to advance the paper to

the next top of form, or may be used to terminate a graphics

command.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc),

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

, The graphics FF mnemonic. Enter ,.

Comments

The form feed command functions as a terminator only when

used to terminate a graphics sequence in a graphics command

when Free Format is enabled.

The control panel form feed key will operate differently dependent

on the source of form feed control at the time the key is pressed.

Form feed is controlled by the LP+ and VGL emulation at different

times.

density.e

Form Length

Purpose Defines the length of the form in total number of lines.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) L length (cc)-

(cc) H length (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

L or H The Form Length command. If your VGL is

configured with the PI line enabled, enter L. If your

VGL is configured with the PI line disabled, enter H.

length Represents the form length in total number of lines.

Enter a two-digit number of total lines on the form

ranging from 01 through 99. For example, enter 05

for a 5-line form length, 21 for a 21-line form length.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

The L command is available any time VGL is in the Graphics

Mode. The physical length of the paper for the form is a product

of the total lines per form and the current lines per inch (lpi)

setting for the printer. For example, a typical 66-line form at 6 lpi

is 11 inches long. A 48-line form at 6 lpi is 8 inches long; the

same 48-line form at 8 lpi is 6 inches long.

Form feeds following this command advance the form from the

current print position to the top of the next form.

With the Host Form Length configuration option enabled, the form

length defined by this command sets the physical page length on

the printer.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Forms Construction

Purpose Produces vertical lines inside a box to construct forms.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) LF horz vert h v line1 t line2 t (cc)G(cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

LF The Forms Construction command. Enter LF.

horz Normal Resolution:

Defines the horizontal length of the form in tenth

inches and dot columns. Enter a three-digit

horizontal length value ranging from 000 through

999 to define a horizontal length of 00.0 through

99.9 inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0

through 9 to specify 0 through 9 additional dot

columns of length. VGL automatically understands

the decimal between the second and third digits for

tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth

digit as dot columns. For example, entering 0126

specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6-dot column horizontal

length; entering 1016 specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-

dot column horizontal length.

High Resolution:

Defines the horizontal length of the form in

thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal

value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define

a horizontal length of 0.000 inch through 99.999

inches. VGL automatically understands the decimal

between the second and third digits. The horz field

must be at least twice the value of the thickness of

the vertical sides (v).

vert Normal Resolution:

Defines the vertical length of the form in tenth

inches and dot rows. Enter a three-digit vertical

length value ranging from 000 through 999 to

define a vertical length of 00.0 through 99.9 inches

and a fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to spec-

ify 0 through 9 additional dot rows of length. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits for tenth inches and auto-

matically interprets the fourth digit as dot rows. For

example, entering 0204 specifies a 2.0-inch plus 4-

dot row vertical length; entering 0242 specifies a

2.4-inch plus 2-dot row vertical length.

Forms Construction

vert High Resolution:

Defines the vertical length of the form in thousandth

inches. Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from

00000 through 99999 to define a vertical length of

0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits. The vert field must be at

least twice the value of the thickness of the

horizontal sides (h).

hNormal Resolution:

Defines the horizontal border thickness in dot col-

umns. Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9 to

specify a horizontal border thickness from 1

through 9 dots.

High Resolution:

Defines the horizontal border thickness in

thousandth inches. Enter a number ranging from

000 through 999 to specify a border thickness from

0.000 through 0.999 inch. VGL automatically

understands the decimal before the first digit.

vNormal Resolution:

Defines the vertical border thickness in dot rows.

Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9 to specify

a vertical border thickness from 1 through 9 dots.

High Resolution:

Defines the vertical border thickness in thousandth

inches. Enter a number ranging from 000 through

999 to specify a border thickness from 0.000

through 0.999 inch. VGL automatically understands

the decimal before the first digit.

line1 Normal Resolution:

Defines the vertical line position in tenth inches and

dot columns from the form left edge or prior vertical

line right edge. Therefore, the line value for all but

the first vertical line is actually the gap between the

right edge of the previous line and the left edge of

the current line. Enter a three-digit position value

ranging from 000 through 999 to define a position

of 00.0 through 99.9 inches and a fourth digit rang-

ing from 0 through 9 to specify 0 through 9 addi-

tional dot columns. VGL automatically understands

the decimal between the second and third digits for

tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth

digit as dot columns. For example, entering 0126

specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6-dot column position from

the left edge or last vertical line position; entering

1016 specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-dot column posi-

tion.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

line1 High Resolution:

Defines the vertical line position in thousandth

inches from the form left edge or prior vertical line

right edge. The line value for all but the first vertical

line, therefore, is actually the gap between the right

edge of the previous line and the left edge of the

current line. Enter a five-digit position value ranging

from 00000 through 99999 to define a position of

00.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits.

tNormal Resolution:

Defines the vertical line thickness in dot columns.

Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9 to specify

a line thickness from 1 through 9 dots.

High Resolution:

Defines the vertical line thickness in thousandth

inches. Enter a number ranging from 000 through

999 to specify a line thickness from .000 inch

through .999 inch.

line2 The line position parameter is entered repeatedly

as needed for the number of lines required in the

form.

tThe line thickness parameter is entered for each

vertical line position parameter.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command to end the input of vertical line and

form data.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your configuration immediately

followed by - to end the command sequence.

NOTE: You must supply leading and trailing zeros for all fields.

Comments

The LF command produces vertical lines inside a box using a

single command sequence. Forms are positioned by the

parameters or commands of an alphanumerics command

sequence (such as horizontal tabs, the justification parameter,

etc.). Therefore, one of the alphanumerics commands must

precede an LF command.

Using appropriate values for the horizontal and vertical length

parameters constructs a variety of form shapes. The horizontal

and vertical border thickness can also be specified in varying line

thicknesses. Any number of vertical lines can be drawn inside the

form. The position of the vertical line is based on the left edge of

the form or the last vertical line drawn.

Forms, Creating Dynamic (Version II)

Example The following sample command illustrates forms construction in

normal resolution. In addition to enabling the Free Format, an

alphanumerics command was sent for form positioning.

^PY^-^F^-

^M01,01,000

^LF0500,0320,2,2,0123,1,0200,3,0090,1^G^-

^O^-^PN^-

Forms, Creating Dynamic (Version II)

NOTE: This command operates similar to the Dynamic Form Commands

described beginning on page 65.

Purpose Creates a new dynamic form and stores it in memory under a

specified name.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IFORM,C name [,DISK] (cc)G data (cc)]

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IFORM,C The command to create buffered forms. Enter

IFORM,C.

name Represents the form name. Enter a name up to 15

characters long. Another form in memory by the

same name is overwritten with the new form.

DISK Optional parameter to store the form in the printer’s

flash memory. Enter DISK.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command to end the input of the form name.

data The form data. Enter any number of valid Graphics

or Extended Graphics command sequences.

(cc)] Ends the form and all contents. Enter the specific

SFCC for your VGL configuration followed by the

right bracket ( ] ) to end the form.

Forms, Deleting Dynamic (Version II)

Purpose Deletes an existing dynamic form stored in memory under a

specified name.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IFORM,D name (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IFORM,D The command to delete the form. Enter IFORM,D.

name Represents the form name. Enter the form name

exactly as created in the IFORM,C command (page

93).

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command terminator to end the data.

Forms, Executing Dynamic (Version II)

NOTE: This command operates similar to the Dynamic Form Commands

described beginning on page 65.

Purpose Executes an existing dynamic form stored in memory under a

specified name.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IFORM,E name [,DISK] (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IFORM,E The command to execute the form. Enter

IFORM,E.

name Represents the form name. Enter the form name

exactly as created in the IFORM,C command

(page 93).

Forms, Listing Dynamic (Version II)

DISK Optional parameter to print the form stored in the

printer’s flash memory.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command terminator to end the data.

Forms, Listing Dynamic (Version II)

Purpose Lists all previously created forms including the form size, in bytes,

used by each form name.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IFORM,L (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IFORM,L The command to list the forms in memory. Enter

IFORM,L.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command terminator to end the data.

Forms, Predefined (Version II)

Purpose Loads one of three predefined forms from memory (AIAG,

Primary Metals, and Odette). These forms are selected and

completed using the commands and legends described.

Mode Graphics with standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IFORM,Eformname.QMS (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IFORM,Eformname.QMS

The command to retrieve the specified predefined

form. Enter IFORM,Eformname.QMS, where

formname ia AIAG, METALS, or ODETTE.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command terminator to end the data.

Comments The IFORM,E command not only loads the desired predefined

form, but provides the means to fill out the form. The following

three examples show the method of specifying the data to be

placed on the forms.

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example 1 The following sample command illustrates forms construction

after loading the AIAG form from memory.

^PY^-^F^-

^IFORM,EAIAG.QMS^G

14015248^+

900^+900^+

046068722

1284^+1284^+

Acme Motor Company^+

^O^-^PN^-

Forms, Predefined (Version II)

Example 2 The following sample command illustrates forms construction

after loading the Primary Metals form from memory.

^IFORM,EMETALS.QMS^G

D9ABAB37401C^+D9ABAB37401C^+

51403^+51403^+

B1834001^+B1834001^+

06-441001-6075906-441001-60759^+

0072818^+0072818^+

3812038120

3740137401

1^+1^+

.034^+

44.000^+

COIL^+

GA SJ EX 6M61X^

TRIAL COIL^+

REF.4162A-216^+

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example 3 The following sample command illustrates forms construction

after loading the Odette form from memory.

^IFORM,EODETTE.QMS^G

ABC CAR CORP^+

DETROIT^+

-005^+

143576451143576451

CHICAGO^

240^+270^+

16-6^+1345935^+

1882^+1882^+

P04^+^+880223

216231627S216231627

8801006^+8801006^+

CHICAGO, IL^+^G

Forms, Resetting Dynamic (Version II)

Purpose Resets dynamic form memory by deleting all forms stored in

memory.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IFORM,R (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IFORM,R The command to reset forms memory. Enter

IFORM,R.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command terminator to end the data.

Comments

Standard predefined forms are not deleted from forms memory

with this command. If predefined forms were previously deleted,

they are reinstalled in the forms memory after execution of this

command.

Free Format (Enable/Disable)

Purpose Enables VGL to ignore all host generated paper motion

commands ranging from hex 00 through 1F.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) F (cc)-

data

(cc) O (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

F Specifies the Free Format command. Enter F.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

data Represents the data, commands, and all other

codes for processing in Free Format. All VGL

features are available with Free Format enabled.

(cc)O Turns off the Free Format mode. Following the data

for processing in the Free Format, enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

O (alpha O) to end the Free Format.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

100

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Comments

Some host systems automatically generate forms control codes

such as CR or LF after a specific number of characters. These

host generated forms control codes could prematurely terminate

the graphics command sequence. The Free Format command

allows VGL to accept incoming data as one continuous stream

even though the data stream may include host generated forms

control codes.

Free Format is available when VGL is in the Graphics Mode.

When enabled, VGL recognizes only the Free Format terminator

commands (Table 12) for forms control until the Free Format is

disabled. If the Graphics Mode is disabled, Free Format

command is automatically disabled.

NOTE: Free Format commands may be used in the normal Graphics Mode

even though Free Format is not enabled. However, when the Free

Format command is enabled, the only valid terminators are the Free

Format commands; others are ignored.

Example The following command enables and disables Free Format in the

Graphics Mode.

^PN^-^F^-

data

^O^-PN^-

Table 12. Free Format Terminator Commands

Command Meaning

^ * Line Feed (LF)

^ , Form Feed (FF)

^ - Carriage Return (CR)

^ + Vertical Tab (VT)

^ > EVFU Start Load

^ ? EVFU End Load

^ 0-9 EVFU Chs 1 - 10

^ : EVFU Ch 11

^ ; EVFU Ch 12

^ < EVFU Ch 13

^ = EVFU Ch 14

Free Format Enable, Non-Graphics

101

Free Format Enable, Non-Graphics

Purpose Permits VGL to override host-generated paper motion commands

when not in Graphics Mode.

Mode Normal

Format (cc) PF (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

PF Specifies the Enable Non-Graphics Free Format

command; enter PF.

(cc)- Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - (Graphics

Mode CR) or other valid terminator.

Comments

Use the PF command with host systems that send blocks of data

padded with NULs or other control characters that may interfere

with a graphics sequence (such as unformatted LU 3 mode,

coaxial environments). When the Graphics Mode Disable

command (^PN^-) is used to exit the Graphics Mode, it also

automatically terminates the Free Format command and disables

the Ignore Data commands. This can result in unwanted paper

motion if Graphics Mode is exited between forms or labels, since

host-generated line feeds, form feeds, etc., are no longer ignored

by the firmware. (Refer to the Free Format and Ignore Data

commands on pages 99 and 105 for more information on these

functions.)

The PF command must be issued before the Graphics Mode

Enable command (PY). Host-generated line terminators are then

ignored by VGL and only the following standard graphics format

control commands are recognized:

(cc) *Line Feed (hex 0A)

(cc), Form Feed (hex 0C)

(cc)- Carriage Return (hex 0D)

NOTE: When VGL is in the Graphics Mode, the Enable Non-Graphics Free

Format command has no effect on the host data stream. In the

Graphics Mode, use the Free Format and Ignore Data commands

(pages 99 and 105, respectively) to ignore unwanted data.

102

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example The example below illustrates the use of the Enable Non-

Graphics Free Format command:

^PF^-(LF)(LF)(LF)(LF)^PY^-F^-^M02,02,100 data for form one

^*^X extraneous, unwanted host data^A^M01,01,000 more form one

data ^-(LF)(LF)(LF)(FF)^PN^-^*^*(LF)(LF)

^PY^-^F^-^M02,02,000 data for form two, etc.^-

In this example, all of the host-generated line and form feed

commands, represented by (LF) and (FF), are ignored and paper

motion is controlled by VGL standard graphics format control

commands (^-), (^*), and (^,), even though Graphics Mode is

exited and reentered between the forms. Between the forms two

standard graphics line feed commands (^*) are used to move the

paper instead of the host-generated (LF) commands. Notice that

after the Graphics Mode is enabled, the Free Format and Ignore

Data commands (^F^-), (^X), and (^A) are used to ignore the

unwanted host data. When all of the labels or forms are

completed, sending Free Format Non-Graphics Disable

command (PO, page 102) returns VGL to the fully-transparent

Normal Mode.

Free Format Disable, Non-Graphics

Purpose Disables the Non-Graphics Free Format command (PF), which

allows host-generated paper motion when VGL Graphics Free

Format command is disabled.

Mode Normal

Format (cc) PO (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

PO Specifies the End Non-Graphics Free Format

command; enter PO.

(cc)- Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - (Graphics

Mode CR) or other valid terminator.

Comments

Send the PO command anytime after the Graphics Mode Disable

command (PN).

Example The following command disables Free Format in Non-Graphics

Mode.

^PO^-

Graphics Mode Enable

103

Graphics Mode Enable

Purpose Enables use of Graphics Mode commands.

Mode Normal

Format (cc) PY (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

PY Specifies the Graphics Mode Enable command;

enter PY.

(cc)- Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - (the

Graphics Mode CR) or other valid terminator.

Comments

Following the PY command, the Graphics Mode commands

(page 26) are available. Once in Graphics mode, you can enter

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode. (See page 31 for

more information.)

For the Graphics Mode Enable command to be recognized and

accepted by VGL, the following rules must be followed:

1. If Midline PY is enabled on the printer’s control panel menu,

the Graphics Mode Enable command can be placed

anywhere on a line. If Midline PY is disabled, the Graphics

Mode Enable command must be the first characters of a new

line. See your User’s Manual for more information.

2. The command line must also terminate with a line terminator

(CR, LF, FF, etc.).

3. VGL absorbs all characters between the command and the

line terminator.

Example The following command enables the Graphics Mode:

^PY^-

104

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Graphics Mode Disable

Purpose Exits VGL from Graphics Mode and returns to the Normal Mode.

Mode Graphics

Format (cc) PN (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

PN Specifies the Graphics Mode Disable command;

enter PN.

(cc)- Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - (Graphics

Mode CR) or other valid terminator.

Example The following command disables the Graphics Mode:

^PN^-

Hex Dump

Purpose Prints all data in hexadecimal code equivalent.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) @ H 0 (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

@ Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to

begin an @ command function.

H Specifies the Hex Dump command. Enter H.

0 Specifies the Hex Dump parameter. Enter 0 (zero).

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

The @H command is available when VGL is in the Graphics

Mode. To disable the hex dump, place the printer offline and

change the hex dump parameter from Enable to Disable. Refer to

your User's Manual for instructions.

Ignore Data

105

Ignore Data

Purpose Instructs VGL to ignore data until a (cc)A command is received.

(See Comments below.)

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) X data (cc)A

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

X Specifies the Ignore Data command. Enter X to

ignore all subsequent characters until the Ignore

Data command is disabled.

data Represents the data. Any text and characters sent

following the Ignore Data command are not

processed.

(cc)A Disables Ignore Data. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by A to disable

the Ignore Data feature in order to process

characters.

NOTE: No function occurs if a (cc)A command is used independent of the

(cc)X command.

Comments

Some host systems use fixed record lengths which causes the

end of a line of data in the data stream to be filled (padded) with

characters and spaces. If VGL file on your system contains

padded characters or spaces before the SFCC, this padded data

must be ignored before VGL can operate. When the X command

is sent to ignore data, all data following the command is ignored

until the (cc)A command to ignore data is disabled.

106

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Interrupt

Purpose In cases where a single command sequence exceeds the buffer

capacity, an interrupt can be used to break the command

sequence and specify the position where the sequence begins

printing again.

Mode Graphics with or without an Extended Graphics Command

selected

Format (cc) I dis (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

I Specifies the Interrupt command. Enter I.

dis Normal Resolution:

Defines the interrupt position in tenth inches and

dot columns. Enter a two-digit interrupt position

value ranging from 00 through 99 to define a

position of 0.0 through 9.9 inches and a third digit

ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0 through 9

additional dot columns. VGL automatically

understands the decimal between the first and

second digits for tenth inches and automatically

interprets the third digit as dot columns. For

example, entering 126 specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6-

dot column interrupt position. Setting the interrupt

position parameter to all zeros processes all data in

the VGL buffer before the next sequence is

initiated.

High Resolution:

Defines the interrupt position in thousandth inches.

Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from 00000

through 99999 to define a vertical justification of

0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a command terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration immedi-

ately followed by - to end the command sequence.

NOTE: Only required outside of an Extended

Graphics sequence.

Interrupt

107

Comments

The VGL buffer holds and can process approximately 64K

characters in a single graphics command sequence, which is

sufficient for most applications. However, infrequent situations

may arise where the command sequence is too large for the VGL

buffer to hold for processing as a single command sequence. In

such cases, use the I command to break the printing command

sequence at a specified position and specify where the sequence

resumes printing. Interrupted command sequences are

processed as if a single command sequence occurred.

The I command can also be used for vertical positioning. Use the

I command to skip to a new vertical position and print the data.

Interrupt commands also can be included in a Vertical Duplication

command sequence.

Like the Alphanumeric commands, the Interrupt command also

enables extended graphics functions, if not already in an

Extended Graphics sequence.

To complete the printing of all interrupted command sequences,

use ^I000^- or no ^I command in the last command sequence.

The last technique is used in the following example.

Example The following commands illustrate the interrupt function

combined with form construction using tabs and various

character parameters in normal resolution. The Free Format

Enable command is also used.

^PY^-^F^-

^M01,01,000^LF0550,0200,2,2,0123,3,0150,1,0120,3^I020^-

^M02,02,005^T0010P/N^T0150DESC^T0300QTY^T0420PRICE^I020^-

^M01,01,020^T0010M1011^T0150Marbles^T0300200^T0420$2.50^I020^-

^M01,01,020^T0010J0620^T0150Jacks^T0300035^T0420$1.89^I020^-

^M01,01,020^T0010S4223^T0150Stickers^T0300100^T0420$ .99^I020^-

^M01,01,020^T0010C5632^T0150Cards^T0300012^T0420$ .69^I020^-

^M05,05,084^T0149COMPLETE^-

^O^-^PN^-

108

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Justification, Vertical

Purpose Specifies a lower vertical print position relative to the print

position of the alphanumerics command. This feature is useful for

positioning data within boxes or columns on a form.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) J jus (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

J The Vertical Justification command. Enter J.

jus Normal Resolution:

Defines the new vertical justification (position) for

character printing in tenth inches and dot rows.

Enter a three-digit value ranging from 000 through

999 to define the new print location down from the

starting position of the command sequence. The

first two digits specify 0.1 through 9.9 inches

downward justification; the third digit specifies an

additional 0 through 9 dot rows of downward

justification. The decimal point between the first two

digits is automatically understood by VGL and the

third digit is automatically interpreted as dot rows.

High Resolution:

Defines vertical justification (position) for character

printing in thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit

value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define

the printing location down from the starting position

of the command sequence from 0.0 inch through

99.999 inches. VGL automatically understands the

decimal point between the second and third digits

as thousandths.

If the data character immediately following the jus

field is not a digit (zero through nine), then you can

omit trailing zeros. For example, the command

^M10010000000^J01ABC, results in a 1.000 inch

justification because the three empty spaces in the

jus field (before the characters "ABC") are

completed with three implied trailing zero digits.

NOTE: If your data to be printed begin with a number (not a character), then

you must complete the field; otherwise, VGL assumes the number is

a digit in the field value.

The data to print at the new print position is input

following the Character Justification Change

command.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Justification, Vertical

109

NOTE: This command causes extra vertical blank spaces at the bottom of a

form if its value is greater than the bottom edge of any previously

drawn graphical element in the current command sequence.

Comments

The J command is input as part of the data in one of the

alphanumeric commands and only affects the justification; other

parameters (such as height and width) are not changed.

A justification of 2 inches specifies a print position 2 inches down

from the position of the alphanumerics command; a subsequent

justification of 1 specifies the print position at 1 inch down from

the position of the alphanumerics command.

Example The following sample commands illustrate character justification

changes in normal resolution. (The Graphics Mode Enable

command was previously sent to enable Graphics Mode but is

not shown in the examples.)

^M05,05,000Aa^J105Bb^M10,05,050Cc^J100Dd^-

^V05,05,000I^J050G^J025P^-

^E05,05,000IGP^J050IGP^J100IGP^-

rtj

110

Chapter 2

Command Codes

^U03,05,000DOWN^J100SIDE^J050UP^-

Line Feed

Purpose Performs a line feed (hex 0A) and a carriage return function when

used to terminate a standard graphics command.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc)*

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

* The graphics LF mnemonic. Enter *.

Comments

The line feed command functions as a carriage return only when

it is used to terminate a graphics sequence in an extended

graphics command when Free Format is enabled.

Line Slew

111

Line Slew

Purpose Changes the vertical print position by specifying a number of lines

to advance the paper from the current print position.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) slew n (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

slew Represents a Line Slew command. Enter K or W.

(Both K and W perform the same line slew

command.)

nSpecifies the number of lines to advance (slew) at

the current lines per inch (lpi) setting. Enter a two-

digit number of lines ranging from 01 through 99.

For example, enter 05 to slew 5 lines, 21 to slew 21

lines.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Line Spacing

Purpose Selects a new line spacing in lines per inch (lpi).

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) @ L newlpi (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

@ Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to

begin an @ command function.

L Specifies the Line Spacing command. Enter L to

change the line spacing.

newlpi Represents the line spacing parameter. Enter one

of the two-digit codes shown in Table 13 to select a

new line spacing. For example, enter 10 to select

10 lpi.

Not all values are available on all printer models.

Check with your printer User's Manual for the line

spacing options available.

Once the new line spacing is selected, all lines are

printed at the new lpi setting until another line

spacing is selected or VGL returns to the Normal

Mode.

112

Chapter 2

Command Codes

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Values above 20 (except 72) default to 18. Values

selected but not shown on the table are rounded to

the nearest value. For example, selecting a line

spacing code of 05, would be rounded up to 06.

Example The following example illustrates different line spacings.

^PY^-^F^-

Standard Characters in the Graphics Mode^*

at the standard line spacing^*

of 6 lines per inch.^*

^@L08^-Standard characters in the Graphics Mode^*

at the new line spacing^*

of 8 lines per inch.^*

^@L06^-

^O^-^PN^-

Table 13. Line Spacing Codes

Line Spacing Code Line Spacing (lpi) Selected

01 1

02 2

03 3

04 4

06 6

07 6

08 8

09 9

10 10

12 12

18 18

72 72

Lines, Dashed

113

Lines, Dashed

Purpose Produces dashed lines.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) LD horz vert (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

LD The Dashed Line command. Enter LD.

horz Normal Resolution:

Defines the horizontal length of the line in tenth

inches and dot columns. Enter a three-digit

horizontal length value ranging from 000 through

999 to define a horizontal length of 00.0 through

99.9 inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0

through 9 to specify 0 through 9 additional dot

columns of length. VGL automatically understands

the decimal between the second and third digits for

tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth

digit as dot columns. The additional dots are only

printed if the length is an even number. If the length

is an odd number, the space for the additional dots

is provided but the dots are not printed. For

example, entering 0126 specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6-

dot column horizontal line length; entering 1016

specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-dot column horizontal

line length, but the additional 6 dots are not printed.

The LD command is ignored if either length

parameter is zero plus zero dots.

High Resolution:

Defines the horizontal length of a line in thousandth

inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal value ranging

from 00000 through 99999 to define a horizontal

length of 0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits.

vert Normal Resolution:

Defines the vertical length of the line in tenth inches

and dot rows. Enter a three-digit vertical length

value ranging from 000 through 999 to define a

vertical length of 00.0 through 99.9 inches and a

fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0

through 9 additional dot rows of length. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits for tenth inches and

automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot rows.

The additional dots are only printed if the length is

an even number.

114

Chapter 2

Command Codes

If the length is an odd number, the space for the

additional dots is provided but the dots are not

printed. For example, entering 0004 specifies a 0.0-

inch plus 4-dot row vertical line length; entering

0242 specifies a 2.4-inch plus 2-dot row vertical line

length, but the additional 2 dots are not printed. The

LD command is ignored if either length parameter

is zero plus zero dots.

High Resolution:

Defines the vertical length of a line in thousandth

inches. Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from

00000 through 99999 to define a vertical length of

0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits.

NOTE: Even in High Resolution Mode, dashed lines are still "dashed" in

tenths-of-an-inch increments.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

Line drawing commands are positioned by the parameters or

commands of an alphanumerics command sequence (such as

horizontal tabs, the justification parameter, etc.). Consequently,

an alphanumeric command must precede a line drawing

command.

Using appropriate values for the horizontal and vertical line length

parameters constructs a variety of vertical and horizontal lines in

varying line thicknesses. The dashed line is produced by printing

the odd tenth inches of length only; the even tenth inches of

length are blanked. If the length ends in an even number (2.4" for

example), the last even tenth inch is blank, making the line

appear one-tenth inch too short. A 2.4" dashed line appears to be

the same length as a 2.3" dashed line due to the blanking of the

last even tenth inch.

The vertical or horizontal orientation of the dashed line is

determined by the horizontal and vertical length parameters. If

the horizontal length parameter is the longest, a dashed

horizontal line is printed; conversely, if the vertical length

parameter is the longest, a dashed vertical line is printed. If the

horizontal and vertical line length parameters are equal, VGL

prints a horizontal dashed line.

Lines, Dashed

115

Examples The following examples illustrate dashed lines in normal

resolution mode. Note that changing the horizontal and vertical

line length parameter values constructs a variety of dashed

vertical and horizontal lines in varying line thicknesses. With

horizontal lines, the horizontal length parameter actually specifies

line length and the vertical length parameter determines line

thickness. Similarly with vertical lines, the vertical length

parameter specifies line length and the horizontal length

parameter determines line thickness. Notice that an

alphanumerics command is required for line positioning.

^PY^-

^M01,01,000^LD0200,0010^LD0200,0001^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^M01,01,000^LD0150,0150^-

^PN^-

ines

.ex

116

Chapter 2

Command Codes

^PY^-

^M01,01,000^LD0150,0154^-

^PN^-

Lines, Solid

Purpose Produces solid lines.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) LS horz vert (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

LS The Solid Line command. Enter LS.

horz Normal Resolution:

Defines the horizontal line length in tenth inches

and dot columns. Enter a three-digit horizontal

length value ranging from 000 through 999 to

define a horizontal length of 00.0 through 99.9

inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to

specify 0 through 9 additional dot columns of

length.

VGL automatically understands the decimal

between the second and third digits for tenth inches

and automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot

columns.

For example, entering 0120 specifies a 1.2-inch

plus no-dot column horizontal line length; entering

1016 specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-dot column

horizontal line length. This command is ignored if

either length parameter is zero plus zero dots.

ines.e

Lines, Solid

117

High Resolution:

Defines the horizontal length of a line in thousandth

inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal value ranging

from 00000 through 99999 to define a horizontal

length of 0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits.

vert Normal Resolution:

Defines the vertical length of the line in tenth inches

and dot rows. Enter a three-digit vertical length

value ranging from 000 through 999 to define a

vertical length of 00.0 through 99.9 inches and a

fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0

through 9 additional dot rows of length.

VGL automatically understands the decimal

between the second and third digits for tenth inches

and automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot

rows.

For example, entering 0004 specifies a 0.0-inch

plus 4-dot row vertical line length; entering 0240

specifies a 2.4-inch plus no-dot row vertical line

length. This command is ignored if either length

parameter is zero plus zero dots.

High Resolution:

Defines the vertical length of a line in thousandth

inches. Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from

00000 through 99999 to define a vertical length of

0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

Line drawing commands are positioned by the parameters or

commands of an alphanumerics command sequence (such as

horizontal tabs, the justification parameter, etc.). Consequently,

an alphanumerics command must precede a line drawing

command.

Using appropriate values for the horizontal and vertical line length

parameters constructs a variety of vertical and horizontal lines in

varying line thicknesses. The horizontal or vertical orientation of

the line is determined by the longest length parameter.

118

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example The following commands illustrate solid lines in normal resolution.

As shown in the examples, changing the horizontal and vertical

line length parameter values constructs a variety of vertical and

horizontal lines in varying line thicknesses.

With horizontal lines, the horizontal length parameter actually

specifies line length and the vertical length parameter determines

line thickness.

Similarly with vertical lines, the vertical length parameter specifies

line length and the horizontal length parameter determines line

thickness. (The Graphics Mode Enable command was previously

sent to enable Graphics Mode but is not shown in the examples.

Additionally, an alphanumerics command must be sent for line

positioning but is not shown in the examples.)

^LS0425,0010^-

^LS0100,0100^- ^LS0001,0150^-

Logo Generation (Version II)

Purpose Provides eight pre-designed logos and symbols in different sizes

and rotations totaling 14 new options. Logo Generation is used in

conjunction with the Pixel Expansion command described on

page 125

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) ILOGO, value (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

ILOGO, The Logo Generation command. Enter ILOGO, (the

comma following the command is required).

value Represents the variable which selects the pre-

defined logo or symbol. Enter a 2-digit value from

Table 14 representing the symbol or logo desired.

(cc)G The required terminator for the ILOGO, command.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration fol-

lowed by a G to end the ILOGO, command

sequence.

Logo Generation (Version II)

119

Comments

The Pixel Expansion (IPEXP) command, described on page 125,

may be used with all logos printed using the ILOGO, command.

Logos and symbols created using the Z command (described on

page 150) are still available and do not conflict with the ILOGO,

command. Do not use any alphanumeric-rotation commands with

ILOGO, symbols and logos.

Example The following program and print sample illustrate how the

ILOGO, command. Note that the alphanumerics command ^M is

simply “introducing” an Extended Graphics command; therefore,

the alphanumeric command parameters (01,01,000) are optional.

^PY^-

^M^IPEXP,06,06^G^ILOGO,41^G^-

^PN^-

Table 14. Logo Generation Values

Value Description

41 Copyright symbol

42 Copyright symbol at 90 degrees

43 Registered trademark symbol

44 Registered trademark symbol at 90 degrees

45 UL symbol, large

46 UL symbol, large, at 90 degrees

47 Trademark symbol

48 Trademark symbol at 90 degrees

49 CSA symbol

4A CSA symbol at 90 degrees

4B UL symbol, medium

4C UL symbol, small

61 TUV Rheinland symbol

62 GS-Mark symbol

ilogo.ex

120

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Logo, PCX

Purpose Downloads and prints PCX format logos.

Mode Standard Graphics format except for option E (see below).

Format

Format 1 (cc) IPCX, option name [,size] [,DISK] (cc)G

PCX logo data

(cc) IPCX, END(cc)G

Format 2 (cc) IPCX, option name [,DISK] (cc)G

Format 3 (cc) IPCX, option (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IPCX, The Logo Generation command. Enter IPCX, (the

comma following the command is required).

option C = Creates/Loads logo into printer memory.

The logo can be printed later.

E = Executes/Prints logo.

D = Deletes logo from printer memory.

R = Resets/Clears logo from printer memory.

L = Lists all the PCX logos that are stored in

printer memory.

name Name of logo. Required for options C, E, and D.

size Size (in bytes) of the logo.

DISK Optional parameter to download a logo to flash

memory or execute (print) a logo stored in flash

memory. Enter DISK. Currently, the DISK

parameter only applies to option C and option E.

(cc)G The required terminator for the IPCX, command.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

followed by a G to end the IPCX, command

sequence.

PCX logo data

Logo data in PCX format. Must be in either

uncompressed or packbits format.

END Ends PCX logo to be downloaded.

NOTE: Format 1 is used for creating/downloading a logo (option C).

Format 2 is used for executing (printing) a logo (option E), or deleting

a logo from memory (option D).

Format 3 is used for listing (option L) or clearing (option R) all logos

from memory.

NOTE: Option E (executing/printing a logo) should be used in Graphics mode

with Extended Graphics Command selected. All other options should

be used in Standard Graphics mode.

Logo, TIFF

121

Example To download a PCX logo:

^IPCX,Cfilename[,size]^G

PCX logo data

^IPCX,END^G

Your host may interpret the PCX data as control codes, which

affects the way the host sends data to the printer. Consult your

host's user manual for sending binary data.

To print a PCX logo in Extended Graphics mode:

^IPCX,Efilename^G

Logo, TIFF

Purpose Downloads and prints TIFF format logos.

Mode Standard Graphics format except for option E (see below).

Format

Format 1 (cc) ITIFF, option name [,size] [,DISK] (cc)G

TIFF logo data

(cc) ITIFF, END(cc)G

Format 2 (cc) ITIFF, option name [,DISK] (cc)G

Format 3 (cc) ITIFF, option (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

ITIFF, The Logo Generation command. Enter ITIFF, (the

comma following the command is required).

option C = Creates/Loads logo into printer memory.

The logo can be printed later.

E = Executes/Prints logo.

D = Deletes logo from printer memory.

R = Resets/Clears logo from printer memory.

L = Lists all the TIFF logos that are stored in

printer memory.

name Name of logo. Required for options C, E, and D.

size Size (in bytes) of the logo.

DISK Optional parameter to download a logo to flash

memory or execute (print) a logo stored in flash

memory. Enter DISK. Currently, the DISK

parameter only applies to option C and option E.

(cc)G The required terminator for the ITIFF, command.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

followed by a G to end the ITIFF, command

sequence.

TIFF logo data

Logo data in TIFF format. Must be in either

uncompressed or packbits format.

122

Chapter 2

Command Codes

END Ends Tiff logo to be downloaded.

NOTE: Format 1 is used for creating/downloading a logo (option C).

Format 2 is used for executing (printing) a logo (option E), or deleting

a logo from memory (option D).

Format 3 is used for listing (option L) or clearing (option R) all logos

from memory.

NOTE: Option E (executing/printing a logo) should be used in Graphics mode

with Extended Graphics Command selected. All other options should

be used in Standard Graphics mode.

Example To download a TIFF logo:

^ITIFF,Cfilename[,size]^G

TIFF logo data

^ITIFF,END^G

Your host may interpret the TIFF data as control codes, which

affects the way the host sends data to the printer. Consult your

host's user manual for sending binary data.

To print a TIFF logo in Extended Graphics mode:

^ITIFF,Efilename^G

Page, Controlling Paper Options (Version II)

NOTE: This command is partially supported on L7032 printers. The L7032

printer supports only EJECT, COPY, ORIENTATION, and MARGINS.

Purpose Controls the paper options for printing.

NOTE: Not all options may be available with your printer. Consult your printer

User's Manual to determine which options are available. If an option

is not available, the emulation ignores the corresponding command.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) IPAGE, option [,value] (cc)G (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IPAGE, The command to control paper options. Enter

IPAGE, (the comma following the command is

required).

option [,value] Represents the option to be set. See Table 15.

Enter the option and comma, then the value.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Page, Controlling Paper Options (Version II)

123

Table 15. Page, Controlling Paper Options

Option Value and Meaning

SPEED,

(Thermal only)

Specifies the print speed in lines per minute at 6 lpi. Enter SPEED and a number in

the range of 0 through 9999.

INTENSITY,

(Thermal only)

Specifies the darkness of the dots. Enter INTENSITY and a number in the range of

-15 through +15.

TEAR,

(Thermal only)

Sets the printer to pause (for the user to tear-off a page) after a specified number of

pages. Enter TEAR and a number in the range of 0 through 256 (0 implies no pause).

CUT, Sets the printer to cut a page after a specified number of pages. Enter CUT and a

number in the range of 0 through 256 (0 implies no cutting). Note: This does not

perform a job separation. Use the EJECT command for job separations.

LABELS,

(Thermal)

Specifies the label sensor. Enter LABELS and a number in the range from 0 through

7 (0 is disable).

0 = No sensor

1 = Reflective gap sensor,

2 = Transmissive gap sensor.

EJECT, Tells the printer to eject a partially-complete page from the printer, regardless of the

current graphical print position. Enter EJECT. (No values follow the command.) On

continuous form printers, EJECT moves enough paper so that all completed or

partially completed pages are fused and moved completely out of the engine.

COPY, Sets the printer to print multiple copies of each "physical page" - that is, one cut sheet

or the distance between perforations on continuous forms, which may contain

multiple forms or labels. (If the page contains incremented fields for a repeated form,

the image is the same.) Enter COPY followed by the number of copies from 001

through 999. (If a partial page has not been printed and an EJECT is performed, then

the selected number of copies of the partial page is produced.)

ORIENTATION, Sets printing orientation. After the IPAGE command, enter either PORT for portrait,

LAND or RLAND for landscape, INV for inverted portrait, or LLAND for inverted

landscape. If any data has been drawn on a page when this command is received

with a new orientation, the current physical page is printed and the next page is in the

new orientation. (Existing margin settings apply to the new orientation.)

MARGINS, Sets the page margins and printable text length. Enter MARGIN followed by four

digits specifying the top margin in hundredths of an inch (0000/0.00 - 9999/99.99),

three digits specifying the text length in character lines at the current line spacing

(001-999), and four digits specifying the left margin in hundredths of an inch (0000/

0.00 - 9999/99.99). (See Appendix D for an explanation of page margins.)

124

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Passing Hex Values

Purpose Sends specified hex values to the printer. This command can be

used in Standard or Extended Graphics mode.

Mode Standard or Extended Graphics mode, with or without an

Extended Graphic Command selected

Format (cc) IHEX, value

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

IHEX, The Pass Hex Values command. Enter IHEX,. (The

comma following the command is required).

value The hex value to be sent to the printer. Valid values

are hex 00 through FF.

Comments

The IHEX command can be used to send graphic and non-

graphic hex data. The difference between the use of the

command is shown in example 1, Standard Graphic mode, and

Example 2, Extended Graphic mode.

Example 1

The following example of the command used in the Standard

Graphic mode, prints A through F with C underlined. The hex 08

is the control code for a backspace.

NOTE: The "Control Code 08" setting for the Line Printer Plus Emulation

must be set to "Backspace" in order for VGL to recognize the hex

code. Refer to your User's Manual for details.

^PY^-

ABC^IHEX,08_DEF

^PN^-

Pixel Expansion (Version II)

125

Example 2 The following example of the command used in the Extended

Graphic mode, prints Schön with the proper accent marks.

^PY^-^F^

^M0202000Sch^IHEX,F6n^-

^O^-^PN^-

Pixel Expansion (Version II)

Purpose Expands those graphics which were plotted using the ILOGO,

command (page 118), the Plotting Graphics (cc)Q command

(page 129), and the Symbols command (page 145).

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphic Command selected

Format cc) IPEXP, horz, vert (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

IPEXP, The Pixel Expansion command. Enter IPEXP, (the

comma following the command is required).

horz The horizontal expansion of the logo or symbol.

Enter a value ranging from 1 through 255. Leading

zeros for values less than three digits are not

required.

vert The vertical expansion of the logo or symbol. Enter

a value ranging from 1 through 255. Leading zeros

for values less than three digits are not required.

(cc)G The required terminator for the IPEXP, command.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration fol-

lowed by a G to end the IPEXP, command

sequence.

Comments

Only use the IPEXP, command in conjunction with graphics

plotting and symbols which were created using the ILOGO,

command, the Plotting Graphics Q command, and the Symbols

command. The IPEXP, command expands these pre-designed

graphics and symbols similar to the way normal characters are

expanded using the Character Height and Character Width

commands.

The IPEXP, command does not affect any other elements, such

as fonts. Unless this command is turned off, once an expansion

factor is selected, that value remains selected until a new IPEXP,

command is received. Turn this command off by entering 1,1 for

the horizontal and vertical expansion values.

126

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Example The following program and print sample illustrate how the TUV

Rheinland symbol (value 61 from Table 14) is called using the

ILOGO, command and expanded 4X by 4X using the IPEXP,

command. Note that the alphanumerics command ^M is simply

“introducing” an Extended Graphics command; therefore, the

alphanumeric command parameters (such as 01,01,000) are

optional.

^PY^-^F^-

^M^IPEXP,04,04^G^ILOGO,61^G^-

^PN^-

Plotting Bitmap Images

127

Plotting Bitmap Images

Purpose Creates and prints bitmap images

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format To create a bitmap image:

(cc) IPLOT, type, id, width, data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

IPLOT, The bitmap image command. Enter IPLOT, (the

comma is required).

type The data type that is used to specify the bitmap.

Enter 4 for 4 bit data, or 8 for 8 bit data. For 4 bit

data, two bytes determine 8 bits of the image. For 8

bit data, one byte determines 8 bits of the image.

id The bitmap identification number. Enter a one digit

number between 0 and 9.

width The width of the bitmap, in bytes. Enter a value

between 1 and 999. Leading zeros for values with

less than 3 digits are not required.

data The bitmap image data. The data may either be

specified in its entirety, or represented in a com-

pressed format using the (cc)B, (cc)W, and (cc)D

commands in any sequence and quantity.

(cc)B pattern, count

Byte repeat specifier. Allows you to repeat a

desired byte pattern. Enter the SFCC, followed by

B. Then enter a 2 character byte pattern, followed

by a comma, followed by a value between 1 and

999 for the number of times (count) to repeat the

pattern. Leading zeros for values with less than 3

digits are not required.

(cc)W count "White" byte (all bits "off") repetition. Enter the

SFCC, followed by W, followed by a value between

1 and 999 for the number of times (count) to repeat

the pattern. Leading zeros for values with less than

3 digits are not required.

(cc)D count "Dark" byte (all bits "on") repetition. Enter the

SFCC, followed by D followed by a value between

1 and 999 for the number of times (count) to repeat

the pattern. Leading zeros for values with less than

3 digits are not required.

(cc)G IPLOT command terminator. Enter the SFCC for

your VGL configuration followed by G to end the

IPLOT command sequence.

128

Chapter 2

Command Codes

To print a previously created bitmap image:

(cc) IPLOT,E, id (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IPLOT,E, The bitmap image execute (print) command. Enter

IPLOT,E, (both commas are required).

id The bitmap identification number. Enter a one digit

number between 0 and 9. The number must

correspond to the identification number used for a

previously created bitmap, or an error is reported.

(cc)G IPLOT command terminator. Enter the SFCC for

your VGL configuration followed by G to end the

IPLOT command sequence.

Comments

Bitmap images are stored in memory only as long as the printer

power is applied, or until being replaced by another bitmap with

the same identification number. The maximum size and number

of bitmaps that may be created is dependent on the amount of

available printer memory. Therefore, it may not be possible to

store up to the maximum number of 10 bitmap images if each is

relatively large.

Bitmap images may be created using the IPLOT, command as a

standard graphics command once graphics mode has been

enabled. However, the IPLOT,E, command must be used as an

extended graphics command within a graphics (^M, ^V, ^E, ^U,

^T, ^J) command sequence to position and rotate the bitmap as

desired.

Example The bit pattern 11000011 is represented by the hex characters

C3. To specify 10 consecutive C3 patterns, you can enter either

C3C3C3C3C3C3C3C3C3C3 or, using the byte repeat format,

(cc)BC3,10. Also, for clarity, commas may be embedded within

the data stream, such as C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3 or

C3C3,C3C3,C3C3,C3C3,C3C3.

A stream of 6 consecutive 00 bytes may be written

00,00,00,00,00,00 or, using the "white" byte repetition format,

(cc)W6.

A stream of 9 consecutive FF bytes may be written

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF or, using the "dark" byte repetition

format, (cc)D9.

The following illustrates how to create and print a simple bitmap

image. The bitmap is created using 4 bit data, is identified as

bitmap number 0, and is 120 bytes wide. On a 300 dpi printer,

this creates an image that is 3 inches wide (120 bytes*8 bits per

byte = 900 bits, or 900 dots, or 3 inches wide).

Plotting Graphics (Columns)

129

^PY^-

^F^-

^IPLOT,4,0,120,

^D40,^W40,^D40,^D40,^W40,^D40,

^G^-

^O^-

^PN^-

The following prints the bitmap:

^PY^-

^M0101000^IPLOT,E,0^G^-

^PN^-

The resulting image:

Plotting Graphics (Columns)

Purpose Creates logos or other graphic patterns by plotting in dot-

addressable columns.

NOTE: Do not confuse this graphics plot command, (cc)Q, with the odd dot

plot command, (cc)Q, discussed on page 132. The graphics plot

command discussed in this section plots in vertical data bytes

(columns) and is effective when an Extended Graphics Command is

selected. Odd dot plot plots in horizontal data bytes (rows) and is

effective when a Standard Graphics Command is selected.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) Q data (cc) G (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

Q The Logo command. Enter Q.

data The hexadecimal logo data. Each hexadecimal

value defines one 7-dot vertical data byte (column)

for each 0.1-inch row.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, to end the input of logo data.

130

Chapter 2

Command Codes

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your configuration immediately

followed by - to end the command sequence.

Comments

Logos are positioned by the parameters or commands of an

alphanumerics command sequence (such as horizontal tabs, the

justification parameter, etc.) and can be created only from within

an alphanumerics command sequence. Consequently, an

alphanumerics command must precede a Logo command.

Any logo that can be designed using the rows of the 0.1-inch x

0.1-inch matrix grid can be produced with the Q command. The

form example in the “Exercises And Examples” chapter on page

301, illustrates how the hand logo was produced. An arrow

pattern is illustrated in the following example.

Graphics designed using this command cannot be stored in VGL

memory for future use. Once your graphic pattern prints, it is

automatically purged from VGL working memory.

Example 1

The bottom-most bit of the data byte corresponds to the least

significant bit (LSB) of the data byte, which corresponds to the

bottom row (row #1); the data byte works up through the other

bits to the top-most significant bit of the data byte, which

corresponds to the top bit row (row #7).

Summing the values determines the data for each column of the

logo. Table 16 shows the decimal value sums for each data byte

(column) for the arrow pattern illustrated. Each byte was

calculated first in decimal and then converted to the equivalent

hexadecimal value (using the ASCII chart in Appendix A). These

hexadecimal values are then entered in the data parameter for

the Q command.

Plotting Graphics (Columns)

131

Table 16. Graphics Logo Plot Data Format

Example 2 The sample command below illustrates the logo function drawing

the arrow shown in Table 16. The six hex data values for each

0.1" x 0.1" matrix are repeated and horizontal tabs and

justification commands are used to produce the arrow in an arrow

pattern. Notice that an alphanumerics command was required for

logo positioning.

^PY^-^F^-

^M01,01,000^T0070^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^-

^M01,01,000^T0090^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^-

^M01,01,000^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,

1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,

0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,

1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^-

^M01,01,000^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,

1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,

0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,

1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^-

^M01,01,000^T0090^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^-

^M01,01,000^T0070^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^-

^O^-^PN^-

Bit#

Decimal

Value

Top

Bottom LSB

Data Bytes (Columns)

123456

Decimal Value:

Hex Value:

12 12 12 45 30 12

0C 0C 0C 0C2D 1E

ogoar

ro.

132

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Plotting Graphics (Rows)

NOTE: The Plotting Graphics command is not supported on L7032 printers.

Purpose Allows you to address and print any individual dot position using

Printronix odd and even dot plot commands. Odd and even dot

plot addresses each dot position using a row method (as

opposed to the column method created in Extended Graphics as

described on page 129.)

NOTE: Do not confuse this odd dot plot command, (cc)Q, with the graphics

plot command, (cc)Q, discussed on page 129. The odd dot plot

discussed in this section plots in horizontal data bytes (rows) and is

effective when a Standard Graphics Command is selected. Graphics

plot plots in vertical data bytes (columns) and is effective when an

Extended Graphics Command is selected.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) plot data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

plot Represents a Printronix plot command. Enter Q for

normal density odd dot plot, or enter C for high den-

sity even dot plot.

data The plot data. Enter the hex data required to pro-

duce the desired graphics pattern. (See Comments

below.)

(cc)G Following the data, enter the (SFCC) for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by any valid

command character or G, the universal sequence

terminator.

Comments

Graphics designed using this command cannot be stored in VGL

memory for future use. Once your graphic pattern prints, it is

automatically purged from VGL working memory.

In typical Printronix plotting, the binary pattern ASCII characters

supplied as data are used to address the character columns with

the Least Significant Bit (LSB) corresponding to the left-most dot

column. VGL, however, addresses the binary pattern of hex data

bytes in a "mirror image" of Printronix plotting, with the LSB

addressing the right-most dot position.

Two plot types are available and defined below: odd dot plot for

normal density and even dot plot for high density applications.

You must define each byte of each data line in plot format, which

is explained in the "Plot Data Byte Format" section on the next

page.

Odd dot plot (normal density plotting) is selected with the Odd

Dot Plot command, (cc)Q data (cc)G. Odd dot plot addresses the

Plotting Graphics (Rows)

133

odd numbered dot columns to produce a horizontal and vertical

density that varies based on the printer and mode of operation.

Even dot plot (high density plotting) is selected with the Even

Dot Plot command, (cc)C data (cc)G. Even dot plot works in

conjunction with the Odd Dot Plot command. The odd and even

numbered dot columns are addressed to double the horizontal

density.

Plot Data Format

You must define each byte for a complete line of data in plot format. Plot Data

Byte Format explains how to define each byte along a data line. Plot Data

Line Format explains how to take each defined byte and create a complete

line of data.

Plot Data Byte Format

Each data byte specifies six of the twelve dot columns that compose one

character column. Using odd dot plot, bits 1 through 6 of the data byte

address the odd numbered dot columns; using even dot plot, bits 1 through 6

of the data byte address the even numbered dot columns.

A dot is printed for each bit that is set ("1") in the data byte. When using plot

commands, bits 7 and 8 of the data byte must always be set "1". The sum of

each bit in the data byte, in hexadecimal value, becomes the plot data used in

the plot command.

For example, refer to Table 17. A hex data value of C4 prints a dot at the

column corresponding to the 04 bit. A hex data byte value of FF produces

dots in all columns; a value of C0 leaves the column blank. The bit pattern

addresses the odd columns of the character space for odd dot plot or the

even columns of the character space for even dot plot. Both odd and even

columns are used for high density plot. These hex data bytes to produce the

graphics pattern are entered in the data parameter of the plot command.

Table 17 illustrates the plotting hex data required to produce the same arrow

graphics as shown in Table 16 on page 131 for the Logo Mode.

1 2 . . . 132Byte #

Data

Dot Pattern

1000001111111111100001

134

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Table 17. Odd Dot Plot Data Example

Plot Data Line Format

Each plotted line of data may include up to 132 data bytes. The first data byte

in the line addresses the dot positions to print in the first character column; the

second data byte addresses the dot positions to print in the second character

column, etc. After the last byte of data, enter the terminator command (cc)G,

and repeat this sequence for the number of plot lines involved.

In odd dot plot, the (cc)G terminator causes the contents of the buffer to plot

and advances the paper (or moves the logical print position in thermal

printers) a single dot row based on the vertical density of the current print

mode. In even dot plot, the paper/logical print position is not advanced.

For high density plot, the Even Dot Plot and Odd Dot Plot commands are

used in conjunction with two data lines. The Even Dot command is sent with

the first data line along with the (cc)G terminator. The terminator causes the

contents of the buffer to plot in the even dot columns but does not advance

the paper/logical print position. The printer waits for the second line of data

using the Odd Dot Plot command and a terminator. Data in the buffer is

plotted in odd dot columns of the same row where even dot column data was

just plotted and the paper/logical print position is advanced one dot row at the

vertical density of the current print mode.

Dot Row

Decimal

Byte/Character Column #1

1357911

Binary

11000100

11000010

11111111

11000010

11000100

Odd Dot Columns:

Decimal Value: 32 16 08 04 02 01 Value for

the Row

196

194

255

194

196

Bit #: 654321 Hex Data

Byte for

the Row

Pattern

128 64

Bit 7 and 8 may be “0” or “1” in Plot Mode. LSB

Reset

135

Example The following sample command illustrates Printronix plotting,

plotting a line of arrows using the data shown in Table 17.

^PY^-^F^-

^QC4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4^*

^QC2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2^*

^QFF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF^*

^QC2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2^*

^QC4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4^*

^O^-^PN^-

Reset

NOTE: The Reset command is not supported on L7032 printers.

Purpose Resets VGL to the current user defined configuration.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) @ R (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

@ Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to

begin an @ command function.

R Specifies the Reset command. Enter R to reset the

printer to the current user defined configuration.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

The Reset command prints any pending page then resets VGL to

the current user defined configuration (last loaded configuration

plus any front panel changes). This may not be the same

configuration used to power-up the printer if the front panel

changes were made and not saved to flash memory. VGL then

restarts as if just powered up (no dynamic forms in form library,

character substitution sets reset, starts printing in upper left

corner, etc.).

NOTE: Any EVFU setting in the Line Printer Plus Emulation (by direct codes

or the VGL (cc)L command) is not reset (see page 89).

ot.

136

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Reverse Print

Purpose Produces white characters on either a black printed background

or any of the shaded or patterned backgrounds available with the

shading and shading mask features.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) R data (cc)R (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

R The Reverse Print command. Enter R.

data The data characters for reverse printing.

(cc)R Following the data, enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration and the Reverse Print command (R)

to turn off the reverse printing feature.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your configuration immediately

followed by - to end the command sequence.

Comments

The R command is input as part of the data in one of the

alphanumeric commands. The R command must be turned on

and off by command. Any character data entered between the

reverse print on and off commands is printed in reverse print.

However, when the alphanumerics command sequence is

terminated, reverse printing is also terminated.

Shading (page 140) or shading mask (page 142) backgrounds

are also available with the R command. Do not use Compressed

Print Fonts (discussed on page 47) with this feature.

The reverse printed character is actually created by not printing

within the black or shaded background. A dark box border is

automatically produced around the reverse printed characters

character. The black background border combined with the size

of the character increases the total area of the character field. If

the descending character printing feature is used with reverse

print, the black background border area is increased to allow for

the descending character space.

Reverse Print

137

Example The following examples illustrate reverse printing command

sequences. In the first example, notice that the alphanumerics

command sequence terminator was also used to end reverse

printing.

^PY^-

^M05,05,000IGP^RIGP^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^U05,05,000DOWN^RSIDE^RUP^-

^PN^-

reve

138

Chapter 2

Command Codes

IMPACT

Scaling

Purpose Selects a new line spacing and different horizontal by vertical (H

x V) dot density from the standard 120 x 72 base density. (See

Comments below.)

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) @ M scale 00 (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the SFCC for your configuration.

@ Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to

begin an @ command function.

M Specifies the Scaling command. Enter M to change

the horizontal and vertical scaling.

scale Represents the scaling parameter. Enter one of the

two-digit codes shown in Table 18 to select a new

scaling. For example, with an MVP printer, enter 02

to select mode 2, 120 x 72 (H x V) dpi scale.

Once the new scaling is selected, all printing

reflects the new scale in horizontal by vertical dots

per inch (dpi) until scaling is disabled or VGL

returns to the Normal Mode.

00 Toggles scaling on and off. When 00 is first

entered, the scaling value as selected in the scale

parameter is enabled if a printer is selected through

the “Prt to Emulate” option. When 00 is entered

again, scaling is disabled and VGL returns to the

default scaling configuration.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your

configuration followed by - to end the command

sequence.

NOTE: If the VGL Options “Prt to Emulate” is selected, scaling is enabled.

Comments Dot density varies by printer mode; selecting a different printer

mode selects a different horizontal and vertical dot density. This

varying density can affect graphic elements created in one

particular mode but printed in a different mode. Scaling permits

graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to retain their

physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and

vertical density other than the base density of 120 x 72 dpi.

Scaling

139

NOTE: MVP and MVP 150B printers must be in Scale Mode 02 and Printer

Mode 2 to produce readable barcodes. L150 printers must be in

Scale Mode 04 and Printer Mode 4 to produce readable barcodes,

except for UPC-A, EAN 8 and EAN 13, which require Mode 5 to

produce readable barcodes.

Table 18. Scaling Codes

Printer Type Scale

Code Printer Mode Dot Density

(H x V) dpi

MVP and MVP 150B 00

Toggles Scaling On/Off

200 x 96

120 x 72

125 x 64

100 x 48

200 x 72

L150 00

Toggles Scaling On/Off

200 x 96

120 x 72

125 x 64

145 x 72

160 x 72

P3040 00

Toggles Scaling On/Off

180 x 96

120 x 72

120 x 48

145 x 72

160 x 72

P6000 00

Toggles Scaling On/Off

120 x 144

120 x 72

120 x 48

P9000 00

Toggles Scaling On/Off

180 x 96

120 x 72

120 x 48

140

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Shading

Purpose Produces alphanumeric characters using a black-shaded

impression.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) KH data (cc)KH (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

KH The Shading command. Enter KH to turn on the

shading feature.

data The data characters to print in shaded graphics.

(cc)KH Following the data, enter the Special Function Con-

trol Code (SFCC) for your VGL configuration and

KH to turn off the shading feature.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

The KH feature must be turned on and off by command. Any

character data entered between the KH on and off commands is

shaded when printed. Shading commands are input as part of the

data in one of the alphanumeric commands. Reverse printing

(discussed on page 136) can be combined with shading.

When the shading feature is used, only certain dot positions are

printed (versus every dot position in the normal graphics) which

produces the shaded images. The shading value can be changed

using the Shading Mask command discussed on page 142.

Examples The following sample commands illustrate shading.

^PY^-

^M05,05,000AaBb^KHCcDd^KH^-

^PN^

Shading

141

^PY^-

^M05,03,000IGP SH^KHAD^KHING^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^E05,05,000IGP^KHIGP^KH^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^E05,05,000I^KHG^KHP^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^U03,03,000SHADING^KHDOWN^KHUPSIDE^-

^PN^-

shad

142

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Shading Mask

Purpose Activates the shading feature with a specific shading mask.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) KL mask data (cc)KH (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

KL The Shading Mask command. Enter KL to turn on

the shading mask feature.

mask Represents the shading mask factor. Enter a two-

digit hex value ranging from 00 through FF to spec-

ify the shading mask factor. Four default shading

mask patterns are available and shown below. See

Appendix B for print samples of all masking values.

The shading mask selected remains selected until

another mask value is selected or the Shading

Mask command is turned off.

data The data characters to print in mask shaded

graphics.

(cc)KH Following the data, enter the Special Function

Control Code (SFCC) for your VGL configuration

and KH to turn off the shading mask feature.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Mask Value

(Hex) Default Shading

Mask Produced

|||||||

///////

\\\\\

Shading Mask

143

Comments

The KL command is used as part of the data contained in one of

the alphanumeric commands.

Shading Mask commands must be turned on and off by

command. Any character data entered between the KL on and off

commands is shaded with the selected mask. Shading must be

turned off before any commands are used to change character

height, width, justification, or horizontal print position. Reverse

printing can be combined with shading.

Examples The following sample commands illustrate shading. Four default

mask shading factors are available to produce vertical stripes

(KL00), horizontal stripes (KLFF), slanted stripes upper right to

lower left (KL01), and slanted stripes upper left to lower right

(KL04).

^PY^-

^M03,03,000IGP^KL00IGP^KLFFIGP^KL01IGP^KL04IGP^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^M03,03,000IGP^KL00MASK^KL8DSHAD^KL02ING^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^V05,05,000I^KLC2G^KHP^-

^PN^-

mask.ex3

144

Chapter 2

Command Codes

^PY^-

^E05,05,000IGP^KL9BIGP^KLFFIGP^KLF1IGP^KH^-

^PN^-

^PY^-

^U03,03,000ING^KL01SHAD^KL04DOWN-^KL8CSIDE^KL02UP^KH^-

^PN^-

Special Function Control Code Change

Purpose Changes the current Special Function Control Code (SFCC).

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) N x (cc)-

(cc) Represents the current Special Function Control

Code (SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your

VGL configuration.

N Specifies the SFCC Change command. Enter N.

xRepresents the new SFCC. Enter the ASCII

character for the new SFCC. You can set the SFCC

to any character from 17 through 255.

(cc)- A Graphics Mode CR using the new SFCC. Enter

the new SFCC, immediately followed by - to end

the command sequence.

Comments

You can also change the SFCC through configuration as

described in your User's Manual.

When the SFCC is changed by the N command, the change is

effective immediately, and the old SFCC is no longer recognized.

When printer power is turned off and on, the SFCC returns to the

configuration default.

mask.

Symbols, Creating Standard User Defined

145

Example The following command changes the SFCC from the caret (^) to

the tilde (~).

^N~~-

Symbols, Creating Standard User Defined

Purpose To create specialized standard size symbols.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) z x data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

z The Create Symbol command. Enter lowercase z.

xRepresents the symbol being defined. See the

Comments below and Table 19. Enter a lowercase

character from a through g to specify where your

symbol is stored. (Make a note of the

corresponding “Print” Value; you need this number

in your Print Symbols command when you print the

symbol as discussed on page 150.)

data The data required to define the symbol. Each dot

row of a standard size symbol contains three

character cells comprised of four dot rows each,

which equals a total of 12 dots per row. Since the

standard size symbol can only be 12 dot rows by 12

dot columns, the maximum number of character

cells used to define a standard size symbol is 36

(12 dot rows X 3 character cells per row). ASCII

characters from hex 0 through F are used to

describe the dot pattern for each cell of the symbol.

Enter hex values from 0 through F from Table 20 to

describe the dot pattern.

If more than 36 character cells are input, the extra

data is ignored until a valid terminator, such as

(cc)G, (cc)-, or (cc)* is found.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command.

146

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Comments

The zx command creates a special standard sized symbol. When

you are ready to print that symbol, use the Z command as

described on page 150.

The zx command must be within a valid graphics sequence. The

symbol can measure up to 12 dot rows wide by 12 dot columns

high, based on 60 x 72 dots per inch resolution. You can create

and store up to seven standard size symbols in printer memory.

The created symbols remain in memory until they are redefined,

the printer is reset, or the printer power is turned off.

Table 19. Standard Size Symbol Values

“Create” Value “Print” Value

(Registered Trademark Symbol) 1

(Copyright Symbol) 2

a 3

b 4

c 5

d 6

e 7

f 8

g 9

Symbols, Creating Standard User Defined

147

Example The following example illustrates the creation of the standard size

Registered Trademark symbol defined for "a". The symbol is 12

dot columns wide by 12 rows high.

^PY^-^F^-

^M0101^za0C0,

330,408,5C8,

924,924,9C4,

944,528,408,

330,0C0^G

^M01,01,000^T0020^Z3^-

^O^-^PN^-

Table 20. Hex Codes and Dot Patterns

ASCII Hex Value Binary Code Dot Pattern

00000

))))

10001

)))#

20010

))#)

30011

))##

40100

)#))

50101

)#)#

60110

)##)

70111

)###

81000

#)))

91001

#))#

A1010

#)#)

B1011

#)##

C1100

##))

D1101

##)#

E1110

###)

F1111

####

stdsym.ex

148

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Symbols, Creating Expanded User Defined

Purpose To create specialized expanded symbols. An optional fill

command can define large expanded symbols.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) z x ht wd data [f n pattern] (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

z The Create Symbol command. Enter lowercase z.

xRepresents the symbol being defined. Enter an

uppercase character from A through F to specify

where your symbol is stored. (Make a note of this

character; you need it in your Print Symbols

command when you print the symbol as discussed

on page 150.)

ht Specifies the height of the symbol in dot rows from

001 through 108. If a value of 000 or greater than

108 is entered, it defaults to the maximum value of

108. You must include the leading zeros when

entering this data.

wd Specifies the width of the symbol in character cells

from 001 through 022. If a value of 000 or greater

than 022 is entered, it defaults to the maximum

value of 022. You must include the leading zeros

when entering this data.

data The data required to define the symbol. Enter a hex

value of 0 through F to define the dot pattern for

each character cell. (Each character cell is

comprised of 4 dots each.) See Table 20 to select

dot patterns. Since one character cell represents 4

dot columns, the smallest symbol you can create is

4 dot columns wide by 1 dot row high. You can

define up to 2,376 character cells (108 dot rows X

22 character cells per row).

If more than the total of 2,376 character cells are

defined, the extra data is ignored until a valid

terminator, such as (cc)G, (cc)-, or (cc)* is found.

f (Optional) Fills a specified number of character

cells with a repeated dot pattern. Enter lowercase f.

nSpecifies the number of character cells to fill. Enter

a decimal value from 0001 through 9999. A value of

0000 fills all remaining cells with a specified dot

pattern.

pattern Specifies the fill dot pattern. Enter a value from 0

through F from Table 20 to describe the dot pattern.

Symbols, Creating Expanded User Defined

149

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command.

NOTE: If a syntax error occurs, or invalid data is entered in the command, the

remaining data in the command sequence is ignored until a sequence

terminator or SFCC is found. If the printer power is turned off or the

printer is reset, all expanded symbol data is deleted.

Comments

The zx command creates an expanded-size symbol. When you

are ready to print the symbol, use the Z command as described

on page 150.

Expanded User Defined Symbols command must be within a

valid graphics sequence. They can measure up to 1-1/2 inches

wide by 1-1/2 inches high, which equals 88 dot columns wide by

108 dot rows high. You can store a maximum of six expanded

symbols in printer memory until the printer is reset or the printer

power is turned off.

Example The following sample palm tree symbol illustrates the Expanded

User Defined Symbol and the optional fill commands. The symbol

measures 96 dot rows high by 64 dot columns, or 16 character

cells wide, which equals a total of 1,536 character cells.

^PY^-

^F^-

^M01,01,020

^zA,096,016

f0112,F,f0004,F,C01,f0009,F,f0004,F,C01,f0009,F,f0003,F,8,f0003,0,1

f0004,F,03f0002,F,f0003,F,8,f0003,0,lf0004,F,03f0002,F

f0002,F,Cf0005,0,3F8,f0003,0,3F,f0002,F,Cf0005,0,3F8,f0003,0,3F

f0004,F,Cf0004,0,8,f0005,0,F,f0004,F,Cf0004,0,8,f0005,0,F

f0005,F,Cf0009,0,F,f0005,F,Cf0009,0,F,f0006,F,8f0006,0,f0003,F

f0006,F,8f0006,0,f0003,F,f0005,F,f0007,0,f0004,F,f0005,F,f0007,0,f000F

f0003,F,Cf0009,0,3f0002,F,f0003,F,Cf0009,0,3f0002,F,f0003,F,f0011,0,f0002,F

f0003,F,f0011,0,f0002,F,f0002,F,Cf0011,0,3F,f0002,F,Cf0011,0,3F

f0002,F,f0013,0,F,f0002,F,f0013,0,F,FCf0013,0,F,FCf0013,0,F

FC0,0Ff0010,0,F,FC0,0Ff0010,0,F,F03,FCf0006,0,FF01F,F03,FCf0006,0,FF01F

E3FF,f0007,0,1FF3F,E3FF,f0007,0,1FF3F,CFFC,f0008,0,3F7F,CFFC,f0008,0,3F7F

f0003,F,Cf0009,0,f0003,F,f0003,F,Cf0009,0,f0003,F,f0003,F,800,FCf0005,0,7FF

f0003,F,800,FCF0005,0,7FF,f0003,F,003FE,007C,03FF,f0003,F,003FE,007C,03FF

FFE,00,7FF,003,F80,FF,FFE,00,7FF,003,F80,FF,FFC,00,f0003,F,003,FE0FF

FFC,00,f0003,F,003,FE0FF,FF803,f0003,F,001,FF0FF,FF803,f0003,F,001,FF0FF

FF00,f0004,F,800,FFCFF,FF00,f0004,F,800,FFCFF,FF03,f0004,F800,FFDFF

FF03,f0004,F800,FFDFF,FF8,f0005,F,800,f0005,F,FF8,f0005,F,800,f0005,F

FFB,f0005,F,C00,f0005,F,FFB,f0005,F,C00,f0005,F,f0008,F,C007,f0004,F

f0008,F,8003,f0004,F,f0008,F,8003,f0004,F,f0008,F,8003,f0004,F

f0008,F,0001,f0004,F,f0008,F,0001,f0004,F,f0008,F,0001,f0004,F

f0007,F,E0000,f0004,F,f0007,F,E0000,f0004,F,f0007,F,Ef0004,0,f0004,F

f0007,F,Ef0004,0,f0004,F,f0007,F,Cf0004,0,f0004,F,f0007,F,Cf0004,0,f0004,F

f0007,F,Cf0004,0,f0004,F,f0007,F,Cf0004,0,f0004,F,f0007,F,f0005,0,f0004,F

f0007,F,f0005,0,f0004,F,f0000,F^G

^M01,01^ZA^-^*^*^*

^PN^-

150

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Symbols, Printing

Purpose Prints specialized Standard or Expanded sized symbols

previously created using the zx commands described on

pages 145 and 148, respectively.

Mode Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) Z n (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL con-

figuration.

Z The Print Symbol command. Enter uppercase Z.

nRepresents the symbol to print. See Table 19 on

page 146. Enter the number 1 to print the regis-

tered trademark symbol; enter the number 2 to print

the copyright symbol; enter the User Defined num-

ber from 3 through 9 which corresponds to the

alphabetical value (“a” through “g”) you specified

where the standard sized symbol is stored; or,

enter an upper case character from A through F to

select the corresponding Expanded User Defined

Symbol.

For example, in the program example shown on

page 147, the symbol was created and stored at “a”

(^za); when the symbol was printed, it was

specified as 3 (^Z3).

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

The standard alphanumerics command must be input prior to the

Z command. The alphanumeric height and width parameters do

not affect the symbol. Horizontal tabs and justification commands

and parameters affect symbol position.

Tab, Horizontal

151

Specialized standard and expanded symbols are printable only in

the horizontal orientation and are printed according to the size

specification when the symbol was created. However, you can

rotate the standard Registered Trademark symbol and Copyright

Symbol when the Append Rotated configuration parameter is

enabled. Refer to the VGL configuration parameters tables in

your User's Manual.

Blank spacing occurs between plotted elements if an undefined

number or character is assigned to a symbol in the Z command.

Specialized symbols created with the zx command remain in

memory until the printer is reset or the printer power is turned off.

Printing a specialized symbol after the data is lost causes VGL to

react as if the symbol was created with null data, and blank

spaces print in the place of the symbol.

Example The following sample commands illustrate the standard symbols.

Notice that the standard alphanumerics command was sent for

symbol positioning.

^PY^-

^M02,02,000^DCopyright ^Z2 1986^-

^M03,03,000ACME MOTOR ^Z1 Inc.^-

^PN^-

Tab, Horizontal

Purpose Specifies a new horizontal print position relative to the left page

margin.

Mode Graphics with a Standard or an Extended Graphics Command

selected

Format (cc) T dis [(cc)-]

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

T The Horizontal Tab command. Enter T.

^T as a Standard Graphics command sets a

"permanent" left Graphics margin for the start of all

Extended Graphics command sequences.

A ^T as an Extended Graphics command adds to

this "permanent" margin.

152

Chapter 2

Command Codes

dis Normal Resolution:

Defines the horizontal tab in tenths of an inch plus

dot columns from the left margin. Enter a three-digit

value ranging from 000 through 999 to define a tab

from 00.0 through 99.9 inches from the left margin

and a fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to

specify 0 through 9 additional dot columns. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits for tenth inches and

automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot

columns. For example, 0120 (or 012,0) specifies a

1.2-inch plus no-dot column tab; 1016 (or 101,6)

specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-dot column tab.

High Resolution:

Defines the horizontal tab in thousandth inches.

Enter a five-digit horizontal value ranging from

00000 through 99999 to define a horizontal tab of

0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL

automatically understands the decimal between the

second and third digits.

The data to print at the new print position is input

following the Horizontal Tab command.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

NOTE: The (cc)- sequence terminator is used only when ^T is a Standard

Graphics command.

Comments

The T command may be input as part of the data in one of the

alphanumeric commands and also may be used in standard

graphics mode.

A 2-inch tab specifies a position 2 inches from the left margin; a

6-inch tab specifies a position 6 inches from the left margin, etc.

Since the tab specifies a print position relative to the left print

margin, you can use tabs to specify a print position to the left or

right of the current position (unlike a typewriter, which can only

tab to the right of the current position). For example, if the current

print position is 4 inches from the left margin and a 1-inch tab is

specified, the next print position is 1 inch from the left margin.

This left/right capability is useful for positioning data within boxes

of a form or similar applications.

Tab, Horizontal

153

Examples The following sample shows an Extended Graphics command

placed before and after the ^T command. Notice that the left

margin changes:

^M1010ABC^-

^T0100^-

^M1010ABC^-

The following sample commands illustrate horizontal tabs in

normal resolution.

^PY^-

^M05,05,000Aa^T020,5Bb^T040,5Cc^-

-PN^-

^PY^-^F^-

^M05,05,000Aa^T030,0Bb

^M10,05,050^T005,0Cc^T025,0Dd^-

^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-

^V05,05,000I^V10,30,050^T010,0G^V05,05,075^T030,5P^-

^PN^-

ABC

Permanent

Left Margin

154

Chapter 2

Command Codes

^PY^-

^E05,05,000IGP^T025,5IGP^-

^PN^-

NOTE: Due to space constraints, the ^U commands below are separated into

three lines. During actual VGL input, do not separate your command

parameters.

^PY^-^F^-

^U06,05,000UP

^U03,03,070^T010,0SIDE

^U05,05,000^T022,0DOWN^-

^O^-^PN^-

Tab, Vertical

155

Tab, Vertical

NOTE: The Vertical Tab command is not supported on L7032 printers.

Purpose Performs a vertical tab (VT, hex 0B) function to advance the

paper to the next vertical tab position when used to terminate a

standard graphics command.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc)+

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

+ The graphics vertical tab mnemonic. Enter +.

Comments

The vertical tab functions as a carriage return only when it is used

to terminate a graphics sequence in an extended graphics

command when Free Format is enabled.

The vertical tab functions as a line feed:

•when the vertical tab is not used as a graphics command

or graphics function terminator; and

•when the EVFU is not loaded through the use of form

length or host commands.

If the EVFU is loaded but channel 12 is not loaded, then the

vertical tab functions as a line feed. If channel 12 of the EVFU is

loaded, the vertical tab skips to channel 12.

See “Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)” on page 73 for

more information on EVFU and channel 12.

156

Chapter 2

Command Codes

Underlined Print

Purpose Selects underlined printing.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) @ U (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

@ Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to

begin an @ command function.

U Specifies the Underlined Print command. Enter U

and all characters on the line are underlined.

Underlined print is automatically reset upon receipt

of the line terminator.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

Comments

Underlined print is a line-by-line print attribute; it is selected once

and all characters in the line are underlined. The U command

must precede any printable data in the line, and it is automatically

reset when a line terminator is received.

Example The following example illustrates underlined print.

^PY^-

Standard Characters in the Graphics Mode^*

^@U^-Underlined characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^*

^PN^-

Wait For Online

157

Wait For Online

NOTE: The Wait For Online command is not supported on L7032 printers.

Purpose Causes VGL to discontinue processing data until you put the

printer offline and then back online.

Mode Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format (cc) @ W (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

@ Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to

begin an @ command function.

W Specifies the Wait For Online command. Enter W

and the front panel displays "Waiting on User" until

you place the printer offline.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by - to end the

command sequence.

NOTE: Wait For Online must be given while VGL is in graphics mode (^PY),

but not inside of a graphics pass (^M.....^-).

158

Chapter 2

Command Codes

159

Barcodes

Overview

A barcode is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters. Barcodes

are produced by entering a barcode command to VGL in the Graphics mode

using an Extended Graphics command.

You can print the barcodes horizontally, vertically, with or without a human

readable data field, with default bar/space ratios, or with variable ratios. The

human readable data field may be printed using any of the Extended

Graphics command fonts available with the (cc)S or (cc)IFONT, commands.

Barcode symbols are configured in a series of varying width bars and spaces

representing a specific barcode character set. These characteristics are in

accordance with established industry-wide practices.

Several integrity checks are performed against the barcode data, and error

messages are printed if any illegal data is discovered.

Each type of barcode has a different set of characters that can be barcoded,

and VGL ensures that the data falls within the allowable set. Some barcodes

permit a variable number of data characters, while other barcodes require a

fixed number of data characters. VGL ensures that the data adheres to these

constraints.

NOTE: Be sure you have set the proper printer mode as described in

Chapter 2.

The single most important consideration when printing a barcode is to ensure

the barcode will be scanned properly. Incorporating a barcode quality

procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that barcodes are

being printed correctly. A properly implemented validation procedure will

increase overall barcode quality, reduce waste from misprinted barcodes, and

Printronix achieve high first-time read rates, which is an increasingly

important factor in newer, more efficient systems where manually entered

data is not acceptable as a backup function. Validation also minimizes the

costs of returned products due to poor reading or unaccountable barcodes.

For more information on barcode validation, contact your Printronix

representative, or visit our web site at www.printronix.com.

160

Chapter 3

Overview

Examples

Using different printers may affect the printed appearance of your print

samples compared to those shown in this manual due to the printer's scaling

factor and varying print mode/densities. Print position also depends on your

paper top-of-form position and the initial print position. Therefore, the location

of the barcode print samples in this chapter are for reference only and do not

reflect the actual barcode print position.

Barcode Size/Height Requirements

The length of any barcode is based on several factors:

(1) the type of barcode

(2) the number of data characters encoded

(3) the bar/space ratios

The starting position of a barcode is determined by any justifications specified

in the previous alphanumeric command.

The alphanumeric command provides the proper length (height) of the bars in

barcodes.

For horizontal barcodes, the graphics height command specifies barcode

height; for vertical barcodes, graphics width specifies barcode height.

Barcode height/width parameters are specified in the two-digit extended

graphics command. A decimal point is automatically interpreted between the

first and second character digits.

Figure 3. Barcode Size/Height Requirements

DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

(No Readable Data Field)

(No readable

data field)

Barcode

Barcode Size/Height Requirements

161

VGL allows you to add a human readable data field to the barcode. Also, you

can specify a 1 or 3 dot gap between the human readable field and the

barcode.

When you insert a human readable field, the height of the barcode

automatically shortens. For example, you print a barcode that is 1" high.

Later, you add a human readable data field. The barcode height is 1" minus

the 1 or 3 dot gap and the text, which is 1/10" or 1/5".

If the barcode height is less than the height of the human readable text, the

barcode height adjusts to the height of one dot. The gap and the human

readable text remain the same.

Horizontal barcode data is printed below the barcode; vertical barcode data is

printed to the left of the barcode. Figure 4 illustrates the readable data

adjustment feature.

Figure 4. Barcode Height Adjustment

DATA FIELD

1-3 DOT GAP

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

DATA

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA FIELD

GAP

FIELD

1-3 DOT

(Bar Code)

(Bar

Code)

162

Chapter 3

Barcode Command Format

Barcode commands are Extended Graphics commands which must occur

within the Graphics Mode and must be introduced by an SFCC and one of the

four alphanumeric commands (^M, ^V, ^E, and ^U). Data provided in the

alphanumeric command sequence identifies specific height, width, and

justification information used to define barcode length (height) and position.

Complete alphanumeric command information is explained in Chapter 2.

NOTE: Throughout this manual, the caret (^) is used to represent the Special

Function Control Code introducer and terminator for graphics and

barcode commands. Be sure to use the appropriate control character

for your VGL configuration.

VGL offers a choice between two types of barcode command formats which

are described on the following pages: Standard (^B and ^C) barcode format,

and IBARC, (a QMS Version II command). Two advantages of IBARC are a 4-

way rotation, not 2-way, and dot or printer dot resolution for variable ratio

barcodes. Neither the Standard nor IBARC format offers significantly more or

less features; both formats accomplish the same task. The format you select

is a matter of personal choice. In each barcode section throughout this

chapter, each of the command parameters is fully described and examples

provided using the standard barcode format (^B and ^C).

You can also print high resolution barcodes. With the control panel menu

option, “Var Ratio Barcd” set to “High Resolution”, barcode variable ratio data

can be specified in printer dots. You can use this option in either high or

normal resolution with the IBARC command. (This option is ignored for ^B

and ^C which always use low resolution.)

If “Var Ratio Barcd” is set to “Low Resolution” (the default), the barcode

variable ratio data is interpreted as line matrix printer dots (60x72 dpi).

NOTE: When using variable ratio barcode commands, you must ensure the

“scanability” of your barcodes, including toner spread compensation.

Make sure the variable ratio conforms to the specification.

The barcode command and associated parameters for standard barcodes are

described on page 163. IBARC, barcodes, associated parameters and

examples are described on page 164.

NOTE: Each barcode parameter is visually separated by spaces, and

optional parameters are marked by paired brackets [ ]; do not enter

these spaces or brackets in your command sequence; they are

provided throughout the manual for clarity in distinguishing

parameters. Italicized text represents a variable parameter for which

a value must be inserted. Command parameters not italicized must

be input exactly as shown.

Standard Barcode Command Format

163

Standard Barcode Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field by selecting

one of five codes representing the font and gap

size for the readable data field. The readable data

field is printed below a horizontally configured

barcode (picket fence orientation) and on the left-

hand side of a vertically configured barcode (ladder

orientation). The barcode size is automatically

adjusted to allow for the height of the data field font

and the spacing between the data and barcode.

NOTE: Vertical barcodes print only in standard 10 cpi font because OCR

fonts cannot be rotated. If an OCR-type font is selected with a vertical

barcode command, the standard 10 cpi font is substituted

automatically.

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications. Enter the number

9 to select variable ratio barcodes represented in

line matrix printer dots (60 x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

type Represents the barcode type from Table 21 on

page 167. Invalid codes are treated as errors.

ratio Represents unique ratio data for variable ratio

barcodes. The default ratios shown in Table 21 are

overridden by this feature. Four- and eight-digit

ratios are used, depending upon the barcode

selected.

data Represents the data to be barcoded.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

164

Chapter 3

Barcode Command Format

IBARC, (Version II) Barcode Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) IBARC, type, loc, data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) IBARC, type, [R [D] ratio,] loc, data (cc)G

When using the IBARC, barcode command format, the type code changes

from a single alphanumeric value to a mnemonic as shown in Table 21. Using

the appropriate alphanumeric command (^M, ^V, ^E, and ^U), IBARC,

barcodes allow you to print barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, or rotated

90, 180 or 270 degrees. In addition, a loc parameter allows you to select one

of three ways in which the printable data field appears below the barcode.

The barcode command parameters applicable to IBARC, barcodes are

defined below. At the end of this section, several IBARC, examples are

provided illustrating applications for these parameters.

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

IBARC, The Barcode command. Enter IBARC, (the comma

is required).

type, Represents the IBARC, barcode type from Table

21. Invalid codes are treated as errors.

[R [D] ratio,] Optional parameter representing the ratios for

variable ratio barcodes. The default ratios shown in

Table 21 are overridden by the variable ratio

feature. Four- and eight-digit ratios can be used,

depending upon the barcode selected. Ratio data

must be decimal values from 0 through 99. Enter R,

followed by the actual barcode ratio. A colon must

separate each element of the ratio.

Like standard barcode ratios, IBARC, ratios are

also interpreted from left to right, measuring the

size of each bar or space, in dot width, in the

following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide

bar : wide space.

If Variable Ratio Barcode is set to High Resolution

or if the D parameter is specified, the ratios are

represented in actual printer dots instead of line

matrix printer dots (60 x 72 dpi).

NOTE: VGL does not verify that ratio data creates acceptable wide/narrow

element relationships for barcode readability. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to

readable barcodes.

loc Represents the location of the printable data field.

Enter N for no printable data field, E to have the

data field embedded in the barcode, or B to print

the data field below the barcode. If this parameter

is selected, the printable data field prints in the

current font as selected by the (cc)S or (cc)IFONT

commands or the default font selected.

IBARC, (Version II) Barcode Command Format

165

data Represents the data to be barcoded. The maximum

amount of data depends on which barcode has

been selected from Table 21.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

IBARC, Examples

The following examples illustrate use of the IBARC, command format using

Code 39. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. Refer to Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

Example 1 Code 39 horizontal barcode with embedded printable data field:

^PY^-^M05,05,000^IBARC,C39,E,12345^G^-^PN^-

Example 2 Code 39 barcode rotated 90° with printable data field printed

below the barcode.

^PY^-^V05,05,000^IBARC,C39,B,12345^G^-^PN^-

Example 3 Code 39 barcode rotated 180° with printable data field printed

below the barcode.

^PY^-^U05,05,000^IBARC,C39,B,12345^G^-^PN^-

rc.

barc.

ex2

ibarc.ex

166

Chapter 3

Barcode Command Format

Example 4 Code 39 barcode rotated 270° with embedded printable data

field.

^PY^-^E05,05,000^IBARC,C39,E,12345^G^-^PN^-

Example 5 Code 39 barcode rotated 90° with no printable data field.

^PY^-^V05,05,000^IBARC,C39,N,12345^G^-^PN^-

Example 6 Code 39 horizontal barcode, embedded printable data field, and

double the default ratio:

^PY^-^M05,05,000^IBARC,C39,R2:2:6:6,E,12345^G^-^PN^-

ibarc.ex4

barc.e

IBARC, (Version II) Barcode Command Format

167

Barcodes

NOTE: When using standard barcode types (either (cc) B or (cc) C) select

the appropriate type code from the Standard Type Code column in

Table 21. When using the IBARC, barcode, select the appropriate

type code from the IBARC, Type Code column in Table 21.

Table 21. VGL Barcode Types

Barcode

Description Standard

Type Code IBARC,

Type Code # of Data Check Digits Default Bar/

Space Ratios Page

Australian

4-State

sAUSTPOST Varied None n/a 169

BC 412 +BC412 Varied Mod 35 1:1 174

Codabar DCBAR 1-40 None 1:2:3:4:1:1:1:1 178

Code 39 A

C39

LOGMAR

AIAG

EMBARC

C39A

C39M43

HIBCC

1-40

None

Mod 43

1:1:3:3

1:2:4:5

1:1:3:3

184

Code 93 iC93 1-40 Mod 47 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4 191

Code 128 ZC128 1-40 Mod 103 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4 195

EAN 8

EAN 8+2

EAN 8+5

EAN8

EAN8+2

EAN8+5

Mod 10 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4 204

EAN 13

EAN 13+2

EAN 13+5

EAN13

EAN13+2

EAN13+5

Mod 10 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4 209

German

Interleaved 2/5

POSTAGI

POSTAGL

Mod 10 4:6:14:16 214

GS1-128,

formerly

UCC/EAN-128

qUCC128 see Note

below

Mod 103/10 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4 219

GS-1

Datamatrix,

formerly

Datamatrix

MDATAMATRIX Varied n/a n/a 230

Identicon EIDENTICON 1-40 None 1:1:3 239

Intelligent Mail

4-state

jINTMAIL 20-31 Automatic n/a 242

168

Chapter 3

Barcodes

NOTE: Data requirements for UCC/EAN-128 is determined by the application

identifier preceding the barcode data. There is a wide range of

selections.

Barcode

Description Standard

Type Code IBARC,

Type Code # of Data Check Digits Default Bar/

Space Ratios Page

Interleaved 2/5 K

INT2/5

INT2/5CD

INT2/5A

INT2/5CDA

1-40

None

Mod 10

None

Mod 10

1:1:3:3

1:2:4:5

244

Maxicode %MAXICODE depends

on mode

used

None N/A 249

MSI F

MSI

MSI10

MSI1010

MSI1110

MSI11

1-13

None

Mod 10

Mod 10/10

Mod 11/10

Mod 11

1:1:2:2 254

PDF417 &PDF417 Variable None n/a 260

Planet rPLANET 11 Mod 10 n/a 264

POSTNET *POSTNET 5, 9, or 11 Mod 10 n/a 269

Royal Mail YROYALBAR Varied Mod 6 3:6 273

Telepen JTELEPEN 1-40 Mod 127 1:1:3:3 275

UPC-A

UPC-A+2

UPC-A+5

UPC-A 80%

UPC-A100%

UPCA

UPCA+2

UPCA+5

UPCA80

UPCA100

Mod 10

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

280

UPC-E

UPC-E0

UPC-E+2

UPC-E+5

UPC-E0+2

UPC-E0+5

UPCE

UPCE0

UPCE+2

UPCE+5

UPCE0+2

UPCE0+5

Mod 10 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4 285

UPCSHIP $UPCSHIP 13 Mod 10 1:1:3:3 293

UPS 11 uUPS11 10 Mod 103 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4 297

Table 21. VGL Barcode Types (continued)

Australian 4-State

169

Australian 4-State

The Australian 4-State structure is shown in Figure 5 and described on the

following pages.

Figure 5. Australian 4-State Structure

The Australian 4-State barcode supports the Australian Postal Service.

Australian 4-State barcodes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space

and width, but have four different types of bars (Full Height, Ascender,

Descender, and Tracker), whereas POSTNET only has two bar types (Tall

and Short).

The Australian 4-State symbology converts alphanumeric characters into

patterns of four bars, using combinations of Full Height, Ascender,

Descender, and Trackers. It also adds start and stop barcodes as well as

Reed-Solomon parity information.

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The quiet zones should be at least 0.25 inches wide

and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start/stop codes and

to prevent adjacent barcodes from overlapping. You are responsible for

providing sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Code

The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the barcode. The start bar

consists of an ascender bar, and is positioned at the leftmost end of the

barcode. The stop bar consists of a full height bar, and is positioned at the

rightmost end of the barcode adjacent to the check digit.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

170

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Data Field

Australian 4-State barcodes use four types of bars to encode its data: Full

Height, Ascender, Descender, and Tracker. Each Full Height bar is 0.198 inch

0.030 inch. The Ascender and Descender bars are about 62.5% of the Full

Height bar in length, while the Tracker bar is about 25% of the Full Height bar.

Each bar width is equal, and must be .020-inch ± .005-inch. Horizontal

spacing between bars (pitch) must be 22 bars ±

2 bars per inch over any

0.50-inch portion of the barcode.

The Australian 4-State barcode data field consists of four different sections:

the FCC, Sorting Number, Customer Data, and Reed-Solomon parity

information. The FCC is a two-digit code specifying the format of the barcode

(see Table 23). The Sorting Number is an 8-digit code used to sort the mail

item. Customer Data is optional and is only allowed on certain formats (as

indicated by the FCC selected). VGL emulation automatically generates the

Reed-Solomon parity information and includes it in the barcode.

Check Digit

No check digit is calculated for the Australian 4-State barcode. The Reed-

Solomon parity information is automatically included.

Australian 4-State Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions. (This

barcode will not print vertically using the IBARC, command format.)

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p s [Fn] [In] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed left-aligned above a

horizontal barcode or top-aligned to the right of a

vertical barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 22 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

Australian 4-State

171

s The Australian 4-State type code. Enter s.

FnSpecifies the FCC code, which defines the format

of the barcode and its size. If no value is specified,

the FCC defaults to a value of 11. Enter F, then one

of the values shown in Table 23.

InSpecifies the format of the customer information

field. If no value is specified, the information field

defaults to a value of 1. Enter I, then one of the

values shown in Table 23.

Table 22. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

Table 23. FCC Codes, Customer Information Fields

and Maximum Barcode Lengths

FCC (Fn)Customer

Information (In)Valid Data Maximum Length

(Sorting Number +

Customer Data)

11, 87, 45, or 92 n/a Any 8 + 0

59 1A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, # 8 + 5

59 20-9 8 + 7

59 30-3 8 + 15

44, 62 1A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, # 8 + 10

44, 62 20-9 8 + 15

44, 62 30-3 8 + 30

172

Chapter 3

Barcodes

data The barcode data. See “Data Field” on page 170

for a description of the Australian 4-State barcode

data field.

NOTE: For a In value of 3, the digits 0 through 3 represent the following bars:

0 = Full Height; 1 = Ascender; 2 = Descender; 3 = Tracker. Since this

is a proprietary encoding, the Customer Data is not included in the

optional readable data field.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

Australian 4-State Examples

The following command generates the horizontal Australian 4-State barcode

below. In the command sequence, Graphics Mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,100^KF^BYsF62I100141544adc0grell7^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width selected

was at 1.0 inches.

A 1.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter s selected Australian 4-State barcode type.

F62 selected an FCC Code value of 62.

I1 selected a customer information field value of 1.

00141544adc0grell7 is the barcode data. 00141544 is the sorting data, and

adc0grell7 is the customer data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

Australian 4-State

173

The following command generated the vertical Australian 4-State barcode

below using standard 10 cpi font, FCC Code value of 59, customer

information field value of 1, and data of 0123456789076 (01234567 is the

sorting data, and 89076 is the customer data):

^PY^-^M10,10,050^KF^CYsF59I10123456789076^G^KF^-^PN^-

174

Chapter 3

Barcodes

BC412 Barcode

The BC412 barcode was invented by IBM in 1988 to meet the needs of the

the semiconductor wafer identification application. The word BC stands for

binary code (presence or absence of a bar) and 412 means 4 bar modules in

a total of 12 module positions in every character. It is a one dimensional

barcode that meets the requirements of small space, easy scribing and robust

decoding even if the barcode symbols are under poor light contrast. It can

achieve a density of 23 characters in less than an inch with a 3.3 mil bar

width.

Data Field

Data BC412 can accommodate 35 characters, 0 - 9 and A - Z. The number 0

is used in place of the letter O. Table 24 lists the character with it’s

corresponding module sequence and character value.

Quiet/Clear Zone

The barcode structure requires a completely blank clear zone which extends

4.75 inches from the right edges of the mail piece. In addition, a minimum

clear zone of 0.040 inch above and below the barcode data must also be

provided.

Start/Stop Code

The start and stop pattern identify the orientation of the barcode. The start

code is bar,space,space” in all cases. The stop code is bar, space, bar for all

cases.

I = Bar

- = Space

Bar Code Data Field

Clear Zone

Clear Zone Clear

Zone

Clear

Zone Start

Code Stop

Code

Check Character

BC412 Barcode

175

Table 24. BC412 Character, Module Sequence, and Character Value

Character Module

Sequence Character

Value

0I-I-I-I----- 00

1I-I-I--I---- 15

2I-I-I---I--- 17

3I-I-I----I-- 29

4I-I-I-----I- 11

5I-I--I-I---- 33

6I-I--I--I--- 19

7I-I--I---I-- 21

8I-I--I----I- 08

9I-I---I-I--- 02

AI-I---I--I-- 07

BI-I---I---I- 25

CI-I----I-I-- 20

DI-I----I--I- 22

EI-I-----I-I- 09

FI--I-I-I---- 30

GI--I-I--I--- 03

HI--I-I---I-- 06

II--I-I----I- 27

JI--I--I-I--- 16

KI--I--I--I-- 24

LI--I--I---I- 04

MI--I---I-I-- 34

NI--I---I--I- 12

PI--I----I-I- 32

QI---I-I-I--- 18

RI---I-I--I-- 01

SI---I-I---I- 14

176

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Check Code

The BC412 has a mod 35 check character. The check character is placed in

the second position behind the first data character. The check code is

automatically included in the bar structure; however, it is not included in the

PDF. The check digit computation is shown below.

Let D = D1D2....Dn be a string of n data characters and C = C1C2....Cn+1 be

a string value of n+1 encoded characters.

V1 = Character value of C1. Refer to Table 24.

Fo = (Sum of Odd V1) Mod 35

Fe = (Sum of Even V1) Mod 35

F = (Fo + 2Fe) Mod 35

Since the second character is the check character, designate the second

character of C1C2.... as the check character of D.

Set C2 = 0

therefore C1C3C4.... Cn+1 = D1D2D3....Dn.

Calculate Fo, Fe, and F

C2 = the character that has the check character value 17F Mod 35.

TI---I--I-I-- 13

UI---I--I--I- 26

VI---I---I-I- 05

WI----I-I-I-- 31

XI----I-I--I- 28

YI----I--I-I- 23

ZI-----I-I-I- 10

Start I--

Stop I-I

Table 24. BC412 Character, Module Sequence, and Character Value

Character Module

Sequence Character

Value

BC412 Barcode

177

Example

Assume that the data character string is AQ1557

Form the character string C = A0Q1557

Fo = (7 + 18 + 33 + 21) Mod 35

= 79 Mod 35

= 9

Fe = (0 + 11 + 19) Mod 35

= 34 Mod 35

= 34

F = (9 + 2*34) Mod 35

= 77 Mod 35

= 7

Character value of the check character is = 17*7 Mod 35

= 119 Mod 35

= 14

As referenced in Table 24, 14 is the character value of character “S.”

Therefore, the check character is “S.”

Barcode Ratio

Default ratio is: 1:1.

Note: The BC412 barcode is not yet available for impact printers.

BC412 Standard Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir N Y data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

N Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

Y The type code for BC412. Enter +.

data The barcode data. A check digit is automatically

added by VGL.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

178

Chapter 3

Barcodes

BC412 Example

The following command generates the horizontal BC412 barcode below:

^PY^-^M05.05.100^T0100^BN+12345ABCDE^G^-^PN^-

Codabar

The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 6 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 6. Codabar Structure

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The quiet zones should be at least 0.25 inches wide

and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start/stop codes and

to prevent adjacent barcodes from overlapping. You are responsible for

providing sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

GUARD

LOWER

BAND

Codabar

179

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode. Four

start/stop code characters (A, B, C, and D) are available in any combination

as start/stop codes. The start/stop code character must be included in the

data field to be produced with the barcode.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent numeric characters and six control characters. Each character is

represented by seven elements consisting of four bars and three spaces,

either wide or narrow.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided

when the readable data field is selected.

Codabar Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p D data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] D [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 25 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

180

Chapter 3

Barcodes

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

D The Codabar type code. Enter D.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. The default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F; VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode

readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2

and 5, respectively; however, a narrow element larger than the wide

element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide/narrow ratios to conform to readable

barcodes.

Table 25. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

Codabar

181

Codabar barcodes require an eight-digit ratio. The

ratios are interpreted from left to right, measuring

the size of each bar or space in dot width. The first

four digits are interpreted as follows: narrow bar :

narrow space : wide bar : wide space. The sixth

digit specifies the number of dots for the

intercharacter spacing. The fifth, seventh and

eighth digits are not used; any data in these

positions is ignored. For example, if the Codabar

ratio data was 24681211, it would be translated as

follows:

2-dot-wide narrow bar

4-dot-wide narrow space

6-dot-wide wide bar

8-dot-wide wide space

ignore data

2-dot-wide intercharacter spacing

ignore data

data The barcode data. Codabar encodes from 1

through 40 characters from the Codabar Character

Set shown in Table 26. Characters A, B, C, and D

are strictly start/stop codes.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

*A, B, C and D are start/stop codes only.

Table 26. Codabar Character Set

Character Hex Character Hex

030 +2B

131 -2D

232 .2E

333 /2F

434 $24

535 :3A

636 A* 41

737 B* 42

838 C* 43

939 D* 44

182

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Codabar Examples

The following command generates the horizontal variable ratio Codabar

barcode below. In the command sequence, Graphics Mode data is italicized

and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYDA2468B^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width selected

was at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter D selected Codabar barcode type.

A2468B is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the horizontal Codabar barcode below

using OCR-B font, double the default ratio, and data of A2468B:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BB9D24681211A2468B^G^KF^-^PN^-

odabar.e

Codabar

183

The following commands generated the vertical Codabar barcodes below

using standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of A2468B:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYDA2468B^G^KF^-^PN^-

The following command generates the same vertical Codabar barcode

described above, except that double the default ratio is used:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CY9D24681211A2468B^G^KF^-^PN^-

codab

odaba

r.e

184

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Code 39

The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 7 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 7. Code 39 Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

barcode. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional barcode

scanning.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or

space is 1 element; each character in the data field has 9 elements. The

structure is 3 wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the 9 total elements that

compose one character.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

CHECK DIGIT

OPTIONAL

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

CHECK

OPTIONAL

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DIGIT

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

Code 39

185

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided

when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit

Code 39 Type C inserts the modulo-43 check digit into the barcode. This

feature provides a means of verifying accurate scanning.

Code 39 Command Format

NOTE: Refer to page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes in Table 27 to print the readable data field in

the corresponding font with the specified guard

band gap.

Table 27. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

186

Chapter 3

Barcodes

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

type Selects the barcode type. Code 39 types available

are shown in Table 28. Enter the Type Code

corresponding to the Code 39 type desired.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with

parameter 9 or : ) representing the ratios for

variable ratio barcodes. The default ratios are

overridden by the variable ratio feature. The ratio

data must be hexadecimal numbers from 0 through

9 or A through F. VGL automatically checks the

input for validity. If an invalid character is found in

the ratio, an error message is generated.

Code 39 barcodes use four-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space, in dot width according to the

following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide

bar : wide space. For example, enter 2266 in the

ratio parameter for:

Table 28. Code 39 Barcodes

Standard

Type Code IBARC,

Type Code # of Data

Characters Check

Digits Default Bar/

Space Ratios* Ratio

AC39 1-40 None 1:1:3:3 1:3

BC39A 1-40 None 1:2:4:5 1:3

CC39M43 1-40 Mod 43 1:1:3:3 1:3

LOGMAR 1-40 None 1:1:3:3

HIBCC 1-40 Mod 43 1:1:3:3

AIAG 1-40 None 1:1:3:3

EMBARC 1-40 None 1:1:3:3

* Ratios represent dot width of the bar/space elements as follows:

Narrow Bar : Narrow Space : Wide Bar : Wide Space.

Code 39

187

2 dot-wide narrow bar

2 dot-wide narrow space

6 dot-wide wide bar

6 dot-wide wide space.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode

readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2

and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide

element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to

readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. Code 39 encodes 1 through 40

characters from the Code 39 full ASCII Character

Set shown in Table 29.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

188

Chapter 3

Barcodes

NOTE: Character pairs /M, /N, and /P through /Y are reserved for future

control character pairs.

Table 29. Code 39 Character Set

ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

(

)

—

;

Space

—

[

]

{

}

DEL

%T %X

%Y %Z

Code 39

189

Code 39 Examples

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Code 39

barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is

italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed

description of alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYA$25NW20%^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter A selected Code 39 Type A.

$25NW20% is the barcode data, and ^G terminated the barcode command

sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print, and ^PN^-

terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the horizontal Code 39 barcode below

using OCR-A font, double the default ratio, and data of $25NW20%:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BO9A2266$25NW20%^G^KF^-^PN^-

code39.

code39.ex

190

Chapter 3

Barcodes

The following commands generated the vertical Code 39 barcodes below

using standard 10 cpi font, the standard default ratio, and data of $25:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYB$25^G^KF^-^PN^-

The following command generates the same vertical Code 39 barcode

described above, except that double the default ratio is used:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CY9B248A$25^G^KF^-^PN^-

code39.ex4

Code 93

191

Code 93

The Code 93 structure is shown in Figure 8 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 8. Code 93 Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

barcode. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional barcode

scanning.

Data Fields

The barcode symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent the full ASCII character set. Bars and spaces vary in width from 1

through 4 modules. Each character consists of 2 bars and two spaces that

total 7 modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the

right data field to permit read direction sensing.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

CHECK DIGIT

OPTIONAL

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

CHECK

OPTIONAL

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DIGIT

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

192

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided

when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit

Code 93 inserts the modulo-47 check digit into the barcode. This feature

provides a means of verifying accurate scanning.

Code 93 Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p i data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] i [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

following codes to print the readable data field in

the corresponding font with the specified guard

band gap.

Table 30. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

Code 93

193

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

i The type code for Code 93. Enter i.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with

parameter 9 or :) representing the ratios for

variable ratio barcodes. The default ratios are

overridden by the variable ratio feature. The ratio

data must be hexadecimal numbers from 0 through

9 or A through F. VGL automatically checks the

input for validity. If an invalid character is found in

the ratio, an error message is generated.

Code 93 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space in dot width, in the following

pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :

2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3

module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module

wide bar : 4 module wide space. For example,

enter 22446688 in the ratio data field for:

2 module wide bar

2 module wide space

4 module wide bar

4 module wide space

6 module wide bar

6 module wide space

8 module wide bar

8 module wide space

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode

readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/

space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. Code 93 encodes from 1

through 40 characters. They can be any ASCII

characters 0-127.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

194

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Code 93 Example

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Code 93

barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is

italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed

description of alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^F^-

^M1010100^IBARC,C93,B,1234ABCD^G^-

^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^F^- enabled Free Format.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 1.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^IBARC, introduced the barcode command.

C93, selected Code 93.

B, prints the readable data field below the barcode.

1234ABCD is the barcode data, and ^G^- terminated the barcode command

sequence.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

Code 128

195

Code 128

Code 128 includes three subsets: A, B, and C. All contain the same bar

patterns, except for the unique start character instructing the barcode reader

which subset is being used. Special characters are available for switching

between the subsets in order to generate the shortest possible barcode. The

Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 9 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 9. Code 128 Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

Code 128 contains special characters which use unique start/stop codes to

identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode. In the automatic mode,

start and stop codes are generated automatically. In the manual mode, you

must supply the start code, but the stop code is generated automatically.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

196

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Data Field

Code 128 barcodes support a full ASCII character set: Subset A provides

standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, control and special characters;

subset B includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, lowercase

alphabetical characters, and special characters; subset C provides 100 digit

pairs, from 00 through 99 inclusive, plus special characters. Table 32 lists the

full Code 128 character set.

Control characters, identified by a “greater than” (>) symbol, introduce Special

Function Control Codes so that you can manually supply control codes to shift

between subsets as described in the “Mode Selection” section, below. The

bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4 modules. Each character

consists of 3 bars and 3 spaces that total 11 modules.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol,

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided

when the readable data field is selected. The readable data field is available

only in the automatic mode.

Check Digit

For Code 128, the modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and

inserted in the barcode symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning.

The start code is included in the check digit algorithm.

Mode Selection

VGL generates Code 128 barcodes in one of two modes: automatic or

manual.

Automatic Mode

VGL creates the shortest possible barcode by automatically sending the

subset switch characters (characters preceded by >) to switch from subset B

into subset C whenever strings of four or more consecutive numeric

characters are provided. As long as the data includes ordinary keyboard

characters and no subset switch, VGL switches in and out of subsets B and C

automatically before and after numeric character strings. Start codes, stop

codes, and check digits are generated automatically.

NOTE: The code >0 is not a special character; VGL recognizes >0 as the

“greater than” character (>) on a standard ASCII chart.

Code 128

197

Manual Mode

The manual mode is selected by inputting a subset switch character

(characters preceded by >) anywhere in the barcode data. In the manual

mode, you must insert the special codes into the barcode command to switch

to another subset. Once a special code is found in the data, all automatic

switching features are suspended, the readable data field option is cancelled,

and VGL expects you to provide all special code switching commands. In this

mode, you must supply the start code; if no start code is provided, VGL

inserts a subset B start code. Stop codes and check digits are generated

automatically in the manual mode. More information about Manual Mode is

provided in the following section.

Manual Mode Operation

NOTE: In the manual mode, you are responsible for correct implementation

of Code 128 in accordance with the Code 128 Standards Manual.

The Code 128 character set is shown in Table 32. The Alternate column

identifies the special subset switch characters that switch VGL to the manual

mode. These > characters are also horizontally aligned with functions also

performed in an automatic mode. For example, >/ represents SI in subset A, o

in subset B, and value 79 in subset C. Thus, the following commands

generate the same barcode using Alternate characters, or subsets B or C:

Subset Switch Characters: ^BNZ>7>,>->.>/^G

Subset C: ^BNZ>576777879^G

Subset B: ^BNZ>6lmno^G

Non-ASCII characters are specified by using the subset switch characters

(from >1 through >8 in the Alternate column on Table 32) which corresponds

to your application. The Value column is used when manually translating

subset B and C barcodes into their briefest form.

NOTE: The subset switch start codes, >5, >6, and >7 have two functions. At

the beginning of a line, they start manual mode data in subset C, B, or

A, respectively. When these codes are used anywhere in the data

other than at the start of a line, they are interpreted as the non-ASCII

characters in Table 32.

Subset B and C Switching

In the automatic mode, VGL creates the briefest, most compact barcode by

automatically switching from subset B to subset C. For example, the data

LT436682 could be entered directly into a typed barcode command as

^BNZLT436682^G. VGL automatically selects the appropriate start code, and

switches to subset C to compact the continuous numeric data characters

(436682).

In the manual mode, however, you must specify the start code and all special

function codes to switch subsets. For example, to create the same barcode as

generated automatically in the previous paragraph (data of LT436682), the

subset B start code is entered, followed by the alpha data (LT), and the

subset switch character to switch to subset C is entered followed by the

continuous numeric characters. A typical barcode command, in the manual

mode, for the data is: ^BNZ>6LT>5Kbr^G. The pairs of continuous numeric

198

Chapter 3

Barcodes

data were manually translated to subset B, data Kbr, corresponding to the

subset C values of 436682, respectively, as shown in Table 32. If the data

(LT436682) had been entered directly into the barcode command as

^BNZ>6LT>5436682, the barcode generated would have been: Start Code B:

LT, subset C: 20 19 22 22 24 18, as determined by the value of the individual

data characters in Table 32.

NOTE: If a start code is not entered in the manual mode, VGL provides a

subset B start code.

Subset A

Subset A operates in the manual mode only. Subset A data characters

include mostly normal printable ASCII characters which require no subset

switching and can be entered directly. For example, the data ABC123 in

subset A is input in the barcode command as: ^BNZ>7ABC123^. Switching to

another subset does not generate a shorter barcode.

Non-printable control characters in subset A can be generated by either: 1)

using the subset B lowercase character equivalent from Table 32 (` through o)

or 2) using the subset switch characters (>1 through >8, or >SP through >/)

from the Alternate column of Table 32.

Code 128 Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p Z data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] Z [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 31 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

Code 128

199

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter: to select variable ratio barcodes represented

in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or 300 x 300

dpi, depending on the printer head being used).

Z The Code 128 type code. Enter Z.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F; VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

Code 128 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The

ratios are interpreted from left to right, measuring

the size of each bar or space in dot width, in the

following pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module

wide space : 2 module wide bar : 2 module wide

space : 3 module wide bar : 3 module wide space :

4 module wide bar : 4 module wide space. For

example, enter 22446688 in the ratio data field for:

2 module wide bar

2 module wide space

4 module wide bar

4 module wide space

6 module wide bar

6 module wide space

8 module wide bar

8 module wide space

Table 31. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

200

Chapter 3

Barcodes

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode

readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/

space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. In the automatic mode,

whenever a string of 4 or more contiguous numeric

digits are detected, VGL inserts a subset C

command at the start of the numeric string. When

the string of numeric digits is broken, VGL inserts a

subset B command. Code 128 encodes from 1

through 40 characters from the character set of the

subset code selected. Use the appropriate subset

code from the Code 128 Character Set in Table 32.

When data is provided in the manual mode, the

readable data field is not printed.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

Code 128

201

Table 32. Code 128 Character Set

Value B C Value A B C

Subset Alternate

(

)

;

100

101

102

103

104

105

[

]

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

FNC3

FNC2

SHIFT

CODE C

CODE B

FNC4

FNC1

START CODE A*

START CODE B*

START CODE C*

(

)

;

[

]

{

}

DEL

FNC3

FNC2

SHIFT

CODE C

FNC4

CODE A

FNC1

CODE B

CODE A

FNC1

>SP

*Used at the beginning of manual mode commands.

Subset Subset Subset Subset Subset

202

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Code 128 Examples

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Code 128

barcode below in the automatic mode. In the command sequence, graphics

mode data is italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a

detailed description of alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BNZABC123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

N deselected printing the optional readable data field.

Letter Z selected Code 128.

ABC123456 is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the Code 128 barcode below in the

automatic mode using standard 10 cpi font, double the default ratio, and data

of ABC123456. The barcode data begins in subset B and automatically

switches to subset C for the numeric data.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BY9Z22446688ABC123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

code128.ex1

Code 128

203

The command below generates the following vertical Code 128 barcode with

data of 123@25% in manual mode, subset A.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CNZ>7123@25%^G^KF^-^PN^-

The command below generates the same vertical Code 128 barcode in the

automatic mode, subset B. Because less than 4 consecutive numeric digits

were provided in the data, no subset switching occurred, and the barcode

remained in subset B.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CNZ123@25%^G^KF^-^PN^-

ode128

.ex

code128.ex

204

Chapter 3

Barcodes

EAN 8

The EAN 8 barcode is related to the Universal Product Code (UPC) group.

EAN 8 can be printed with or without a 2- or 5-digit add-on data field, which is

placed at the end of the barcode. The EAN 8 (European Article Number)

barcode structure is shown in Figure 10 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 10. EAN 8 Structure

QUIET

ZONE

START CODE CENTER CODE

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

STOP CODE

LEFT DATA

FIELD RIGHT DATA

FIELD HEIGHT

QUIET

ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE

STARTING

POSITION

DATA FIELD

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

CHECK

CODE

LEFT

CENTER

RIGHT

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

START

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

ZONE

DIGIT

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

CODE

DATA

FIELD

EAN 8

205

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones. A trailing quiet zone is provided automatically if an add-on

code has been specified in the barcode command.

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The Start/Center/Stop codes are special character codes marking those

portions of the barcode. These codes are automatically produced with each

barcode.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited numeric character set (numbers 0-9 and Special

Characters Start, Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from 1

through 4 modules. Each character consists of 2 bars and 2 spaces that total

7 modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right

data field to permit read direction sensing.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol,

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

barcode symbol. The check digit provides the means to verify accurate

scanning.

EAN 8 Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

206

Chapter 3

Barcodes

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 33 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

type Represents the barcode type. Enter U for standard

EAN 8; enter o (alpha o) for EAN 8 plus a 2-digit

add-on data field; enter p for EAN 8 plus a 5-digit

add-on data field.

Table 33. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

EAN 8

207

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. However, unique variable

ratios for EAN 8 barcodes easily generate large,

out-of-spec barcodes. Ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F; VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

EAN 8 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space, in dot width, in the following

pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :

2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3

module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module

wide bar : 4 module wide space.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode

readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/

space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. Standard EAN 8 barcodes

encode exactly 7 digits. The first four data

characters are in the left half of the data field, and

the last 3 characters are in the right half of the data

field. (A check digit is automatically computed and

printed at the end of the right data field). If the 2- or

5-digit add-on data field is used, include this data at

the end of the data field.

The characters available for the data field are 0

through 9 (hex 30 through 39, respectively).

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration followed by any valid

command character or G, the universal sequence

terminator.

208

Chapter 3

Barcodes

EAN 8 Examples

The following command generated the horizontal default ratio EAN 8 barcode

below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYU2244595^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- turned on the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter U selected the EAN 8 barcode type.

2244595 is the 7-digit barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the vertical EAN 8 barcode below using

standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of 2244595:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^CYU2244595^G^PN^-

ean8.ex1

an8.e

EAN 13

209

EAN 13

The EAN 13 barcode is related to the Universal Product Code (UPC) group.

EAN 13 can be printed with or without a 2- or 5-digit add-on data field, which

is placed at the end of the barcode. The EAN 13 (European Article Number)

barcode structure is shown in Figure 11 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 11. EAN 13 Structure

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the code to begin

and end in a blank area. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on

the form for the quiet zones. A trailing quiet zone is provided automatically if

an add-on code has been specified in the barcode command.

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The Start/Center/Stop codes are special character codes marking those

portions of the barcode. These codes are automatically produced with each

barcode.

QUIET

ZONE

START CODE CENTER CODE

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

STOP CODE

LEFT DATA

FIELD RIGHT DATA

FIELD HEIGHT

QUIET

ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE

STARTING

POSITION

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

DATA FIELD

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

CHECK

LEFT

CENTER

RIGHT

QUIET

STOP

STARTING

START

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

NUMBER N

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

HEIGHT

CODE

ZONE

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

DATA

FIELD

CODE

DATA

FIELD

POSITION

DIGIT

FIELD

210

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to apply a code to a class or

type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number system

character; it is printed in the left quiet zone.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,

Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4

modules. Each character consists of 2 bars and two spaces that total 7

modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right

data field to permit read direction sensing.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

barcode symbol. The check digit provides the means to verify accurate

scanning. The number system character is included in the check digit

algorithm.

EAN 13 Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 34 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

EAN 13

211

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

type Represents the barcode type. Enter T for standard

EAN 13; enter m for EAN 13 plus a 2-digit add-on

data field; enter n for EAN 13 plus a 5-digit add-on

data field.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. However, unique variable

ratios for EAN 13 barcodes easily generate large,

out-of-spec barcodes. Ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F; VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

EAN 13 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space, in dot width, in the following

pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :

2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3

module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module

wide bar : 4 module wide space.

Table 34. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

212

Chapter 3

Barcodes

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode

readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/

space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. EAN 13 barcodes encode

exactly 12 digits. The first character input is

interpreted as the number system character. (A

barcode character is not produced for the number

system character.) The next six characters are the

left side (the upper side on vertically oriented

symbols). The final five characters are the right side

(or the lower side on vertically oriented symbols). A

thirteenth character is an automatic check digit

which is computed and printed in the last character

position in the right data field. If the 2- or 5-digit

add-on data field is used, include this data at the

end of the data field. The characters available for

the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39).

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

EAN 13 Examples

The following command generated the horizontal default ratio EAN 13

barcode below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized,

and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYT123456123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter T selected the EAN 13 barcode type.

123456123456 is the 12-digit barcode data.

EAN 13

213

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the vertical EAN 13 barcode below using

standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of

123456123456:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYT123456123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

ean13.ex2

214

Chapter 3

Barcodes

German Interleaved 2/5

The German Interleaved 2/5 barcode structure is shown in Figure 12 and

described on the following pages.

Figure 12. German Interleaved 2/5 Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop

codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or

spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the barcode, two characters are

interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent data characters occupying

the odd-numbered positions, and spaces are used to represent data

characters occupying the even-numbered positions.

DATA FIELD

QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

CHECK

OPTIONAL

DIGIT

POSITION

CHECK DIGIT

OPTIONAL

QUIET

ZONE

German Interleaved 2/5

215

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. Bbarcodearcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode

symbol and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is

provided when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

barcode symbol. The check digit provides the means to verify accurate

scanning.

German Interleaved 2/5 Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 35 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

Table 35. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

216

Chapter 3

Barcodes

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

type Represents the barcode type. Select one of the

German Interleaved 2/5 barcode type codes shown

in Table 36.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F. VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

German Interleaved 2/5 barcodes use four-digit

ratios. The ratios are interpreted from left to right,

measuring the size of each bar or space, in dot

width, in the following pattern: narrow bar : narrow

space : wide bar : wide space. For example, enter

2266 in the ratio parameter for:

2 dot-wide narrow bar

2 dot-wide narrow space

6 dot-wide wide bar

6 dot-wide wide space

Table 36. German Interleaved 2/5 Barcodes

Standard

Type Code IBARC,

Type Code # of Data

Characters Check

Digits

Default Bar/

Space

Ratios*

VPOSTAGI** 11 Mod 10 4:6:14:16

WPOSTAGL 13 Mod 10 4:6:14:16

*Ratios represent dot width of the bar/space elements as follows:

Narrow Bar : Narrow Space : Wide Bar : Wide Space.

**The last character of this type command is the uppercase “i” character

(hex 49), not to be confused with a lowercase “L” character (hex 6C).

German Interleaved 2/5

217

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode

readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2

and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide

element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to

readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. German Interleaved 2/5

encodes either 11 or 13 characters. The characters

available for the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30

through 39).

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

German Interleaved 2/5 Examples

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio German

Interleaved 2/5 barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics

mode data is italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a

detailed description of alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BTV01853624568^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

T selected the .1-inch OCR-B font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter V selected the 11-digit German Interleaved 2/5 with the default

4:6:14:16 ratio.

01853624568 is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

218

Chapter 3

Barcodes

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the 11-digit horizontal German Interleaved

2/5 barcode below using standard font, the default ratio, and data of

10518475232:

^PY^-^M05,05,000^KF^IBARC,POSTAGI,B,10518475232^G^KF^-^PN^-

The following command generated the 13-digit vertical German Interleaved

2/5 barcode below using the .1-inch OCR-B font, the default ratio, and data of

2846586755694:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CTW2846586755694^G^KF^-^PN^-

GS1-128

219

GS1-128

NOTE: GS1-128 is formerly known as UCC/EAN-128.

The UCC/EAN-128 structure is shown in Figure 13 and described on the

following pages.

Figure 13. UCC/EAN-128 Structure

UCC/EAN-128 uses the same barcode and character set as Code 128.

However, in UCC/EAN-128, the Function 1 character FNC1 immediately

follows the start code. The FNC1 character has been reserved exclusively for

UCC/EAN-128.

The UCC/EAN-128 data structure requires an Application Identifier (AI) at the

beginning of barcode data. Each AI determines the format and length of the

data which follows. See Table 37 for more detail.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

220

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Table 37. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers

Application

Identifier (AI) Content Format

00 Serial Shipping Container Code n2+n18

02 Item Num. of Goods Within Another Unit n2+n14

10 Batch or Lot Number n2+an..20

11 (*) Production Date (YYMMDD) n2+n6

13 (*) Packaging Date (YYMMDD) n2+n6

15 (*) Sell By Date (Quality) (YYMMDD) n2+n6

17 (*) Expiration Date (Safety) (YYMMDD) n2+n6

20 Product Variant n2+n2

21 Serial Number n2+an..20

22 HIBCC = Quantity, Date, Batch and Link n2+an..29

23 (**) Lot Number (Transitional Use) n3+n..19

240 Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer n3+an..30

250 Secondary Serial Number n3+an..30

30 Quantity n2+n..8

310 (***) Net Weight, Kilograms n4+n6

311 (***) Length or 1st Dimension, Meters n4+n6

312 (***) Width, Diameter or 2nd Dimension, Meters n4+n6

313 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters n4+n6

314 (***) Area, Square Meters n4+n6

315 (***) Volume, Liters n4+n6

316 (***) Volume, Cubic Meters n4+n6

320 (***) Net Weight, Pounds n4+n6

321 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Inches n4+n6

322 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Feet n4+n6

323 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Yards n4+n6

324 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches n4+n6

325 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet n4+n6

326 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards n4+n6

327 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Inches n4+n6

328 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Feet n4+n6

329 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Yards n4+n6

330 (***) Gross Weight-Kilograms n4+n6

331 (***) Length or 1st Dimension, Logistics n4+n6

332(***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Meters, Logistics n4+n6

333 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters, Logistics n4+n6

GS1-128

221

334 (***) Area, Square Meters, Logistics n4+n6

335 (***) Gross Volume, Liters n4+n6

336 (***) Gross Volume, Cubic Meters n4+n6

337 (***) Kilograms Per Square Meter n4+n6

340 (***) Gross Weight, Pounds n4+n6

341 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Inches, Logistics n4+n6

342 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Feet, Logistics n4+n6

343 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Yards, Logistics n4+n6

344 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches, Logistics n4+n6

345 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet, Logistics n4+n6

346 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards, Logistics n4+n6

347 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Inches, Logistics n4+n6

348 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Feet, Logistics n4+n6

349 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Yards, Logistics n4+n6

350 (***) Area, Square Inches n4+n6

351 (***) Area, Square Feet n4+n6

352 (***) Area, Square Yards n4+n6

353 (***) Area, Square Inches, Logistics n4+n6

354 (***) Area, Square Feet, Logistics n4+n6

355 (***) Area, Square Yards, Logistics n4+n6

356 (***) Net Weight, Troy Ounce n4+n6

357 (***) Net Volume, Ounces n4+n6

360 (***) Volume, Quarts n4+n6

361 (***) Volume, Gallons n4+n6

362 (***) Gross Volume, Quarts n4+n6

363 (***) Gross Volume, Gallons n4+n6

364 (***) Volume, Cubic Inches n4+n6

365 (***) Volume, Cubic Feet n4+n6

366 (***) Volume, Cubic Yards n4+n6

367 (***) Gross Volume, Cubic Inches n4+n6

368 (***) Gross Volume, Cubic Inches n4+n6

369 (***) Gross Volume, Cubic Inches n4+n6

37 Quantity of Units Contained (For Use With AI 02 Only) n2+n..8

400 Customer's Purchase Order Number n3+an..30

401 Consignment Number n3+an..30

410 Ship To (Deliver To) Location Code Using EAN-13 n3+n13

Table 37. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application

Identifier (AI) Content Format

222

Chapter 3

Barcodes

(*)To indicate only year and month, DD must be filled with “00”

(**) Plus one digit for length indication

(***) Plus one digit for decimal point indication

Data Value Representation:

a - alphabetic characters n - numeric characters

an - alpha-numeric characters n3 - 3 numeric characters, fixed length

an..3 - up to 3 alpha-numeric characters n..3 - up to 3 numeric characters

411 Bill To (Invoice To) Location Code Using EAN-13 n3+n13

412 Purchase From (Location Code of Party From Whom Goods Are

Purchased)

n3+n13

413 Ship For UCC/EAN Location Code n3+n13

414 EAN Location Code For Physical Identification n3+n13

420 Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority n3+an..20

421 Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code With 3-Digit ISO Country Code Prefix n3+n3+an..9

8001 Roll Products-Width, Length, Core Diameter, Direction and Splices n4+n14

8003 UPC/EAN Number and Serial Number Or Returnable Asset n4+n14+an..16

8004 UCC/EAN Serial Identification n4+an..30

8005 Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure n4+n6

8006 Component of an Article n4+n14+n2+n2

8018 Service Relation Number n4+n18

8100 Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character and Offer n4+n1+n5

8101 Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character, Offer and End of Offer n4+n1+n5+n4

8102 Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character Preceded by Zero n4+n1+n1

90 Mutually Agreed, Between Trading Partners n2+an..30

91 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30

92 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30

93 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30

94 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30

95 Internal-Carriers n2+an..30

96 Internal-Carriers n2+an..30

97 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30

98 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30

99 Internal n2+an..30

Table 37. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application

Identifier (AI) Content Format

GS1-128

223

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start and stop codes identify the leading and trailing ends of the barcode.

UCC/EAN-128 uses unique start codes for character subsets B and C, and a

stop code common to both. An automatic mode switching feature is used to

generate the correct start code based on the first four data field characters.

Data Field

UCC/EAN-128 barcodes require a special character called “Function 1”

(FNC1) to immediately follow the start code. VGL automatically supplies this

character, so it must not be included in the data field by the user.

A character is made up of three bars and three spaces, each varying in width

from 1 through 4 modules, for a total of eleven modules. The number of

modules making up the bars is even. The stop code has four bars and is 13

modules wide.

The character set for UCC/EAN-128 is the same as the character set for Code

128. Refer to the Code 128 Character Set (Table 32). Every character is

interpreted according to the currently active character subset. UCC/EAN-128

uses subset B and subset C only. Subset B, shown in Table 32, includes all

standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, lowercase alphabetical

characters, and special characters. Subset C interprets the characters as

pairs of numbers 00 through 99, along with some special characters, as

shown in Table 32. The start code or subset switch code determines whether

a particular barcode character is decoded as one character or as a pair of

numbers.

Readable Data

The optional printed data field (PDF) provides a human-readable

interpretation of the barcode data. When the printed data field is enabled by

use of the “PDF” parameter, the overall height of the bars is reduced to make

room for a guard band and the human-readable characters. The printed data

field is formatted with spaces or parentheses denoting particular data fields

such as the application identifier. Special characters such as start, stop,

subset switch, modulo-103 check digit, and FNC1 do not appear in the

human-readable data.

Refer to Figure 13. Using Level I syntax ^B (horizontal) or ^C (vertical

clockwise rotation), the readable data appears below the barcode, reading in

the direction of start code towards stop code. Using Level II syntax (^IBARC),

the barcode may be oriented with any of the graphics commands ^M, ^V, ^U,

or ^E; and the human-readable data may be positioned above or below the

bars, still reading in the direction of start code towards stop code.

224

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Modulo-103 Check Digit

A modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

barcode symbol immediately in front of the stop code, in the same manner as

the Code 128 barcode. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start

code is included in the check digit algorithm. The modulo-103 check digit is

not displayed in the readable data field.

Modulo-10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC-18 and SCC-14

AI 00 (called the Serial Shipping Container Code, or SSCC-18) takes

eighteen additional numerical data bytes. The last data byte is a modulo-10

check digit on the preceding seventeen data bytes. Counting the two zeros of

the application identifier, the modulo-10 check digit is the twentieth byte in the

data field.

AI 01 (called the Shipping Container Code, or SCC-14) takes fourteen

additional numerical data bytes. The last data byte is a modulo-10 check digit

on the preceding thirteen data bytes. Counting the zero and the one of the

application identifier, the modulo-10 check digit is the sixteenth byte in the

data field.

The modulo-10 data field check digit for both SSCC-18 and SCC-14 is printed

in the barcode as the second half of the last number pair using subset C. It is

displayed in the human-readable data field as the twentieth byte for SSCC-18

or the sixteenth byte for SCC-14.

VGL automatically calculates the modulo-10 check digit for SSCC-18 if only

17 data digits are provided following the application identifier of 00.

UCC/EAN-128 Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p q data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] q [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 38 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

GS1-128

225

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

q The type code for UCC/EAN-128. Enter q.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F; VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

UCC/EAN-128 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The

ratios are interpreted from left to right, measuring

the size of each bar or space in dot width, in the

following pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module

wide space : 2 module wide bar : 2 module wide

space : 3 module wide bar : 3 module wide space :

4 module wide bar : 4 module wide space. For

example, enter 22446688 in the ratio data field for:

2 module wide bar

2 module wide space

4 module wide bar

4 module wide space

6 module wide bar

6 module wide space

8 module wide bar

8 module wide space

Table 38. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

226

Chapter 3

Barcodes

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode

readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/

space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. In the automatic mode,

whenever a string of 4 or more contiguous numeric

digits are detected, VGL inserts a subset C

command at the start of the numeric string. When

the string of numeric digits is broken, VGL inserts a

subset B command. Code 128 encodes from 1

through 40 characters from the character set of the

subset code selected. UCC/EAN-128 must have

exactly 19 digits. Use the appropriate subset code

from the Code 128 Character Set in Table 32.

When data is provided in the manual mode,

readable data field is not printed.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

UCC/EAN-128 Examples

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio UCC/EAN-128

barcode below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized

and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^- ^M10,10,000^BYq0034567890123456789^G^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data

placement.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected printing the optional readable data field.

Letter q selected UCC/EAN-128.

The barcode data is 0034567890123456789.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

GS1-128

227

The following command generated the UCC/EAN-128 barcode below using

variable target dot ratio and data of 0034567890123456789.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^IBARC,UCC128,RD2:4:5:7:8:10:11:13,N,

0034567890123456789^G^-^PN^-

The command below generates the following vertical UCC/EAN-128 barcode

with data of 0034567890123456789.

^PY^-^V05,05,300^IBARC,UCC128,B,0034567890123456789^G-^PN^-

The command below generates the same vertical UCC/EAN-128 barcode

using target dot variable ratios with the Version I syntax.

^PY^-^M10,10,300^CN:q24578ABD0034567890123456789^G-^PN^-

228

Chapter 3

Barcodes

The program below illustrates the use of dynamic forms to generate part of a

shipping form with three UCC/EAN-128 barcodes. An internal code (AI = 91)

is used as a store number, a ship-to-postal (AI = 420) gives the customer ZIP

Code as dynamic data, and a serial shipping container code (AI = 00) is also

given as dynamic data. In this example, since the application identifiers are

known, they are given as static data, and only the data field for each variable

AI is made dynamic. The ship-to-postal takes a five digit ZIP Code; the SSCC-

18 takes seventeen digits with VGL creating the modulo-10 data field check

digit automatically.

^PY^-^F^-

^B^-

^M0101000

^X titles using compressed print ^A

^T0010^J000^S4SHIP TO POSTAL CODE

^T0010^J170^S4STORE

^T0010^J340^S4SSCC-18

^X EAN/UCC 128 barcodes ^A

^M0808^T0030^J020^KF^BYq420^[005^G^KF

^M0808^T0030^J190^KF^BYq911528^G^KF

^M1208^T0030^J360^KF^BYq00^[017^G^KF

^,^-

92614

34567890123456789

^G^-

^,^-

^O^-^PN^-

UCC 128.ex4

GS1-128

229

230

Chapter 3

Barcodes

GS-1 Data Matrix

NOTE: GS-1 Datamatrix is formerly known as Datamatrix.

Data Matrix is a two-dimensional barcode containing small dark and light

square data modules. It has a finder pattern of two solid lines and two

alternating dark and light lines on its perimeter. This barcode is capable of

storing up to 3116 numeric digits or 2335 alphanumeric characters in a

symbol 144 modules square. It is also capable of encoding in a number of

different schemes.

Two main subsets for Data Matrix exist, which differ in terms of error

correction. The first subset uses ECC-000 through ECC-140 and uses

convolution coding for error correction. The second subset is ECC-200, which

uses Reed-Solomon error correction techniques. ECC-200 format is

recommended.

Quiet Zone

The minimum quiet zone is one module width on all four sides.

Readable Data

There is no printable data field allowed for the Data Matrix barcode.

Data Field

The data allowed within the data field depends on the error correction subset

you are using. See the data description on page 231 for details.

Data Matrix Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir N M [X[D]n] [Cn] [Rn] [En] [In], data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

NEnter N to turn off the readable data field.

M The Data Matrix type code. Enter M.

X[D]nOptional parameter which designates the x-

dimension width of a single square data module in

dots (60 x 72 dpi), or printer dots if the D parameter

is used. For n, enter a value from 1 through 255 to

represent the dot number.

CnOptional parameter that sets the number of

columns in the symbol. A value of 0 (the default)

automates this process. See Table 42 through

Table 48 for the combination of columns and rows

allowed and the maximum amount of data that can

be encoded.

GS-1 Data Matrix

231

RnOptional parameter that specifies the number of

rows in the symbol. A value of 0 (the default)

automates this process. See Table 42 through

Table 48 for the combination of columns and rows

allowed and the maximum amount of data that can

be encoded.

EnOptional parameter that specifies the error

correction level. Enter E, then one of the following

values: 0, 50, 80, 100, 140, or 200. Levels 0

through 140 use increasing levels of convolutional

error coding. Level 200 (the default) uses Reed-

Solomon block error correction and is the

recommended level of error correction.

InOptional parameter that specifies the format ID.

This field only has meaning for ECC-000 through

ECC-140 and is ignored for ECC-200. This

specifies the type of data that is encoded in the

symbol. Enter I, then a value from 1 through 6. The

default value is 3. Table 39 shows the type of data

encoded for the various format IDs.

, Enter a comma (,) to separate the data field from

the previous field. The comma is required.

data For ECC-000 through ECC-140, the data allowed

within the data field depends on the format ID

parameter. The allowed data for these ECC types

are given in Table 39. For Format ID #5 which

accepts control characters and Format ID #6 which

accepts codes greater than 127, you can enter

these values using a SO character followed by an

identifier. When encoding special characters, you

must enter a SO character followed by at least one

other identifier and its field (i.e., ASCII 254 =

^d254). This is only considered to be one

character, even though the data field holds 5

characters (^d254). If you intend to code the SO

character by itself (no special encoding), then the

SO character should be followed by another SO

character. Table 40 illustrates how to use these

special characters.

232

Chapter 3

Barcodes

For ECC-200, format ID has no meaning and is

ignored. Instead, you can enter data of any type

(ASCII 0-255) and it will be automatically optimized

into the proper encoding scheme. See the “Special

Characters Using SO” section for examples of

methods to enter special characters such as FNC1

into the data stream.

The maximum number of data depend on three

factors: (1) size of the matrix, (2) ECC level, and (3)

type of data. The size of the matrix is automatically

chosen by VGL unless the parameters of row and/

or column are supplied (see Cn and Rn

parameters). The maximum number of data can

then be found by finding the proper table based on

ECC type. For each different valid matrix

combination, the maximum number of data are

given for numeric, alphanumeric, and full 8-byte

data. You do not have to enter the maximum; a pad

character is automatically inserted into the barcode

when necessary.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration followed by any valid

command character or G, the universal sequence

terminator.

Table 39. Data Field for ECC-000 through ECC-140

Format ID # Data

1Numeric 0-9, Space

2Uppercase A-Z, Space

3Uppercase A-Z, Numeric 0-9, Space

4Uppercase A-Z, Numeric 0-9, Space, Period, Comma,

Minus, Forward Slash

5Full 128 ASCII set (0-127)

6User defined (0-255)

GS-1 Data Matrix

233

Special Characters Using SO

Table 40 and Table 41 illustrate the methods of encoding special characters,

and shows the special characters supported. These special characters are

identified by using SO. The default value for the SO character is hex 0E, but

this value can be changed using the printer's front panel (see User's Manual

for details). Examples are given with the SO character represented by “^” for

clarity.

Table 40. Special Character Encoding (All ECC Levels)

Special Characters Method Example

Control Characters 0-31 <SO> + @ ... <SO> + _NUL = ^@, BEL = ^G

Any ASCII value 0 - 255 <SO> + d + 3 digit ASCII 10 = ^d010

ASCII value SO <SO> + <SO> ^^

Table 41. Special Character Encoding (ECC-200 Only)

Special Characters Method Example

FNC1 <SO> + 1. If FNC1 is 2nd

codeword, previous data must be

A-Z, a-z, or 01-99

01^1<Data>

Structured Append <SO> + 2 + 3 digit number

representing symbol sequence

and file identifier

^2042<File ID>

Reader Programming <SO> + 3

Must be first in the data field

^3<Data>

MH10.8.3 Abbreviated

Format 05 Header

<SO> + 5

Must be first in the data field

^5<Data>

MH10.8.3 Abbreviated

Format 06 Header

<SO> + 6

Must be first in the data field

^6<Data>

Extended Channel

Interpretation

<SO> + 7 + 6 digit EC

(000000-999999)

^7112233<Data>

234

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Symbol Characteristics

The following tables illustrate the maximum data capacities for the Data

Matrix barcode as a function of symbol size (column x row) and data type.

Note that all ECC-000 through ECC-140 symbols are square and always have

an odd number of rows and columns. ECC-200 symbols have square or

rectangular sizes and have an even number of rows and columns.

Table 42. ECC-000 Characteristics

(Row x Column) Maximum

Numeric Maximum

Alphanumeric Maximum 8-Byte

Data

9 X 9 3 characters 2 characters 1 character

11 X 11 12 characters 8 characters 5 characters

13 X 13 24 characters 16 characters 10 characters

15 X 15 37 characters 25 characters 16 characters

17 X 17 53 characters 35 characters 23 characters

19 X 19 72 characters 48 characters 31 characters

21 X 21 92 characters 61 characters 40 characters

23 X 23 115 characters 76 characters 50 characters

25 X 25 140 characters 93 characters 61 characters

27 X 27 168 characters 112 characters 73 characters

29 X 29 197 characters 131 characters 86 characters

31 X 31 229 characters 153 characters 100 characters

33 X 33 264 characters 176 characters 115 characters

35 X 35 300 characters 200 characters 131 characters

37 X 37 339 characters 226 characters 148 characters

39 X 39 380 characters 253 characters 166 characters

41 X 41 424 characters 282 characters 185 characters

43 X 43 469 characters 313 characters 205 characters

45 X 45 500 characters 345 characters 226 characters

47 X 47 560 characters 378 characters 248 characters

49 X 49 596 characters 413 characters 271 characters

GS-1 Data Matrix

235

Table 43. ECC-050 Characteristics

(Row x Column) Maximum

Numeric Maximum

Alphanumeric Maximum 8-Byte

Data

11 X 11 1 character 1 character not supported

13 X 13 10 characters 6 characters 4 characters

15 X 15 20 characters 13 characters 9 characters

17 X 17 32 characters 21 characters 14 characters

19 X 19 46 characters 30 characters 20 characters

21 X 21 61 characters 41 characters 27 characters

23 X 23 78 characters 52 characters 34 characters

25 X 25 97 characters 65 characters 42 characters

27 X 27 118 characters 78 characters 51 characters

29 X 29 140 characters 93 characters 61 characters

31 X 31 164 characters 109 characters 72 characters

33 X 33 190 characters 126 characters 83 characters

35 X 35 217 characters 145 characters 95 characters

37 X 37 246 characters 164 characters 108 characters

39 X 39 277 characters 185 characters 121 characters

41 X 41 310 characters 206 characters 135 characters

43 X 43 344 characters 229 characters 150 characters

45 X 45 380 characters 253 characters 166 characters

47 X 47 418 characters 278 characters 183 characters

49 X 49 457 characters 305 characters 200 characters

Table 44. ECC-080 Characteristics

(Row x Column) Maximum

Numeric Maximum

Alphanumeric Maximum 8-Byte

Data

13 X 13 4 characters 3 characters 2 characters

15 X 15 13 characters 9 characters 6 characters

17 X 17 24 characters 16 characters 10 characters

19 X 19 36 characters 24 characters 16 characters

21 X 21 50 characters 33 characters 22 characters

23 X 23 65 characters 43 characters 28 characters

25 X 25 82 characters 54 characters 36 characters

27 X 27 100 characters 67 characters 44 characters

29 X 29 120 characters 80 characters 52 characters

31 X 31 141 characters 94 characters 62 characters

33 X 33 164 characters 109 characters 72 characters

35 X 35 188 characters 125 characters 82 characters

37 X 37 214 characters 143 characters 94 characters

39 X 39 242 characters 161 characters 106 characters

41 X 41 270 characters 180 characters 118 characters

43 X 43 301 characters 201 characters 132 characters

45 X 45 333 characters 222 characters 146 characters

47 X 47 366 characters 244 characters 160 characters

49 X 49 402 characters 268 characters 176 characters

236

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Table 45. ECC-100 Characteristics

(Row x Column) Maximum

Numeric Maximum

Alphanumeric Maximum 8-Byte

Data

13 X 13 1 character 1 character not supported

15 X 15 8 characters 5 characters 3 characters

17 X 17 16 characters 11 characters 7 characters

19 X 19 25 characters 17 characters 11 characters

21 X 21 36 characters 24 characters 15 characters

23 X 23 47 characters 31 characters 20 characters

25 X 25 60 characters 40 characters 26 characters

27 X 27 73 characters 49 characters 32 characters

29 X 29 88 characters 59 characters 38 characters

31 X 31 104 characters 69 characters 62 characters

33 X 33 121 characters 81 characters 53 characters

35 X 35 140 characters 93 characters 61 characters

37 X 37 159 characters 106 characters 69 characters

39 X 39 180 characters 120 characters 78 characters

41 X 41 201 characters 134 characters 88 characters

43 X 43 224 characters 149 characters 98 characters

45 X 45 248 characters 165 characters 108 characters

47 X 47 273 characters 182 characters 119 characters

49 X 49 300 characters 200 characters 131 characters

Table 46. ECC-140 Characteristics

(Row x Column) Maximum

Numeric Maximum

Alphanumeric Maximum 8-Byte

Data

17 X 17 2 characters 1 character 1 character

19 X 19 6 characters 4 characters 3 characters

21 X 21 12 characters 8 characters 5 characters

23 X 23 17 characters 11 characters 7 characters

25 X 25 24 characters 16 characters 10 characters

27 X 27 30 characters 20 characters 13 characters

29 X 29 38 characters 25 characters 16 characters

31 X 31 46 characters 30 characters 20 characters

33 X 33 54 characters 36 characters 24 characters

35 X 35 64 characters 42 characters 28 characters

37 X 37 73 characters 49 characters 32 characters

39 X 39 84 characters 56 characters 36 characters

41 X 41 94 characters 63 characters 41 characters

43 X 43 106 characters 70 characters 46 characters

45 X 45 118 characters 78 characters 51 characters

47 X 47 130 characters 87 characters 57 characters

49 X 49 144 characters 96 characters 63 characters

GS-1 Data Matrix

237

Table 47. ECC-200 Square Characteristics

(Row x Column) Maximum

Numeric Maximum

Alphanumeric Maximum 8-Byte

Data

10 X 10 6 characters 3 characters 1 character

12 X 12 10 characters 6 characters 3 characters

14 X 14 16 characters 10 characters 6 characters

16 X 16 24 characters 16 characters 10 characters

18 X 18 36 characters 25 characters 16 characters

20 X 20 44 characters 31 characters 20 characters

22 X 22 60 characters 43 characters 28 characters

24 X 24 72 characters 52 characters 34 characters

26 X 26 88 characters 64 characters 42 characters

32 X 32 124 characters 91 characters 60 characters

36 X 36 172 characters 127 characters 84 characters

40 X 40 228 characters 169 characters 112 characters

44 X 44 288 characters 214 characters 142 characters

48 X 48 348 characters 259 characters 172 characters

52 X 52 408 characters 304 characters 202 characters

64 X 64 560 characters 418 characters 278 characters

72 X 72 736 characters 550 characters 366 characters

80 X 80 912 characters 682 characters 454 characters

88 X 88 1152 characters 862 characters 574 characters

96 X 96 1392 characters 1042 characters 694 characters

104 X 104 1632 characters 1222 characters 814 characters

120 X 120 2100 characters 1573 characters 1048 characters

132 X 132 2608 characters 1954 characters 1302 characters

144 X 144 3116 characters 2335 characters 1556 characters

Table 48. ECC-200 Rectangular Characteristics

(Row x Column) Maximum

Numeric Maximum

Alphanumeric Maximum 8-Byte

Data

8 X 18 10 characters 6 characters 3 characters

8 X 32 20 characters 13 characters 8 characters

12 X 26 32 characters 22 characters 14 characters

12 X 36 44 characters 31 characters 20 characters

16 X 36 64 characters 46 characters 30 characters

16 X 48 98 characters 72 characters 47 characters

238

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Data Matrix Example

The following commands generated the Data Matrix barcodes shown below.

In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized, and barcode

data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of alphanumeric

commands.

^PY^-^M01,01,010^KF^BNMXD8C36R12E200I5,0123456789^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 0.1 inches and character width was

selected at 0.1 inches.

A 0.1 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

N deselected printing the readable data field.

Letter M selected the Data Matrix barcode.

XD8 designates the x-dimension width of a single square module as 8 printer

dots.

C36 sets the number of columns in the symbol at 36.

R12 sets the number of rows in the symbol at 12.

E200 sets the error correction level at ECC-200.

I5 set the format ID. This value is ignored with the ECC-200 error correction

level set.

, (comma) separates the previous information from the data field.

0123456789 is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

^PY^-^M01,01,010^KF^BNM,0123456789^G^KF^-^PN^-

^M0101010^KF^IBARC,DATAMATRIX,XD8,C36,R12,E140,I5,N,A1B2C3D4E5F

6G7H8I9J0K12^G^KF^-

Identicon

239

Identicon

The Identicon barcode structure is shown in Figure 14 and described on

following pages.

Figure 14. Identicon Structure

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The quiet zone should be at least 0.25 inch wide and

completely blank.

Start/Stop Codes

The Start/Stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode. The

Start/Stop code is automatically produced with each barcode.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars to represent the

10 numeric characters (0 - 9) and Start/Stop codes. All the information is

contained in the width of the bars, the spaces serving only to separate the

individual bars. The wide bars are conventionally three times the widths of the

narrow bars. The spaces may be any reasonable width but are typically equal

to the narrow bars. The barcode can encode up to 40 numbers. Each data

character is represented by 5 bars separated by spaces. There must be two

wide bars among the 5 bars. See Table 49 for symbol coding.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

240

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Readable Data

barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode and to the left of the

vertical barcodes. The lower guard band is provided when the readable data

filed is selected.

Identicon Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p E data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] E [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 50 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

Table 49. Identicon Symbol Coding

Character Code

000110

110001

201001

311000

400101

510100

601100

700011

810010

901010

Start 110

Stop 101

Identicon

241

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

E The type code for IDENTICON. Enter E.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F. VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode

readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2

and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide

element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to

readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. IDENTICON encodes from 1

through 40 characters. The characters available for

the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39).

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

Table 50. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

242

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Intelligent Mail 4-State Barcode

Intelligent Mail 4-state is a barcode symbology, introduced by USPS to

support the US Mail 4-state customer barcode. It is also known as the USPS

OneCode Solution or USPS 4-State Customer Barcode. This barcode is

identified by four different types of bars:

•

Full Height - fixed height

•

Tracker - a small center section

•

Ascender - extends from the top of the Full Height limit to the bottom of

the Tracker limit.

•

Descender - extends from the top of the Tracker Limit to the bottom of

the Full Height limit.

Figure 15. Intelligent Mail Barcode Bar Types

Customer Data must be in numeric format only. PDF is not allowed for

Intelligent Mail Barcode.

Additional information regarding use of this barcode can be obtained from the

USPS publication Intelligent Mail Barcode Technical Resource Guide.

Intelligent Mail Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir N j data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

Dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes. Enter C for vertical barcodes.

N Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

j The type code for Intelligent Mail. Enter j.

Ascending

Region

Tracking

Region

Descending

Region

Full Bar Ascender Tracker Descender

Intelligent Mail 4-State Barcode

243

data The barcode data. The table later in this section

shows the valid parameters for the all the fields.

The Tracking Code is 20 digits in length. The

Routing Code is optional, but if it is included, it must

be 5, 9 or 11 digits in length. The minimum total

input data is 20 and the maximum total input data is

31 numeric digits. VGL encodes any length of input

data within this range into a 4-state customer

barcode string consisting of 65 bars. A check digit

is automatically added by VGL.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

Intelligent Mail 4-State Barcode Example

The following command generates the horizontal Intelligent Mail barcode

shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BNj01234567094987654321012345678^G^KF^-

^PN^-

Table 51. Data Field Parameters

Type Field Digits

Tracking

Code

Barcode Identifier 2

Second digit must be 0 - 4.

Service Type Identifier 3

Mailer Identifier 6 or 9

Serial Number 9 when Mailer ID is 6 digits

6 when Mailer ID is 9 digits

Routing Code Delivery Point Zip Code 0, 5, 9, 11

Total 20 minimum, 31 maximum

244

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Interleaved 2/5

The Interleaved 2/5 barcode structure is shown in Figure 16 and described on

following pages.

Figure 16. Interleaved 2/5 Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop

codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or

spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the barcode, two characters are

interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent data characters occupying

the odd-numbered positions, and spaces are used to represent data

characters occupying the even-numbered positions. The interleaving process

requires an even number of characters; if an odd number of characters are

encoded, a leading zero is automatically inserted to change the number of

characters to an even number.

DATA FIELD

QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

CHECK

OPTIONAL

DIGIT

POSITION

CHECK DIGIT

OPTIONAL

QUIET

ZONE

Interleaved 2/5

245

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided

when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit

An optional check digit is inserted for type k and l barcodes. The optional

check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the barcode symbol.

The check digit provides the means to verify accurate scanning.

Interleaved 2/5 Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 52 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

Table 52. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

246

Chapter 3

Barcodes

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

type Represents the barcode type. Select one of the

I-2/5 barcode type codes shown in Table 53.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F. VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

Interleaved 2/5 barcodes use four-digit ratios. The

ratios are interpreted from left to right, measuring

the size of each bar or space, in dot width, in the

following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide

bar : wide space. For example, enter 2266 in the

ratio parameter for:

2 dot-wide narrow bar

2 dot-wide narrow space

6 dot-wide wide bar

6 dot-wide wide space

Table 53. Interleaved 2/5 Barcodes

Standard

Type Code IBARC,

Type Code # of Data

Characters Check

Digits

Default Bar/

Space

Ratios*

KINT2/5 1-40 None 1:1:3:3

kINT2/5CD 1-40 Mod 10 1:1:3:3

LINT2/5A 1-40 None 1:2:4:5

lINT2/5CDA 1-40 Mod 10 1:2:4:5

*Ratios represent dot width of the bar/space elements as follows:

Narrow Bar : Narrow Space : Wide Bar : Wide Space.

Interleaved 2/5

247

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode

readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2

and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide

element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to

readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. Interleaved 2/5 encodes from 1

through 40 characters. The characters available for

the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39). If

an odd number of characters are encoded, a

leading zero is automatically inserted in the data

field to change the number of characters to an even

number.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

Interleaved 2/5 Examples

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Interleaved 2/5

barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is

italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed

description of alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYK2244595^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print. ^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter K selected Interleaved 2/5 with the default 1:1:3:3 ratio.

2244595 is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

248

Chapter 3

Barcodes

The following command generated the Interleaved 2/5 barcode below using

OCR-B font, double the default ratio, and data of 2244595:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BB9L248A2244595^G^KF^-^PN^-

The following command generates the vertical Interleaved 2/5 barcode below

using standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of 2244595:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYK2244595^G^KF^PN^-

The following command generates the same vertical Interleaved 2/5 barcode

above, except that double the default ratio is used:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CY9K22662244595^G^KF^-^PN^-

25.

ex3

Maxicode

249

Maxicode

The Maxicode barcode is a fixed size matrix symbology made up of an offset

of rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a unique finder pattern.

Maxicode is suitable for high speed scanning applications, and is capable of

encoding all of the 256 ASCII characters.

Readable Data

The Maxicode barcode does not support a human readable form.

Data Field

The data field of a Maxicode barcode is divided into a primary message and a

secondary message. The primary message has a fixed structure, while the

secondary message has a free format. The maximum number of characters

encoded in the message depends on the error correction mechanism used.

When the Standard Error Correction (SEC) method is in use (see the mode

definition, below) a maximum of 84 symbol characters can be encoded. Each

segment in the secondary message is 21 characters long.

Maxicode Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir N % [Z] mode data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes, C for vertical barcodes.

NEnter N to turn off the readable data field.

% Represents the Maxicode barcode type. Enter %.

Z Optional parameter to print the zipper. Enter Z to

exercise this option.

mode Represents the desired Maxicode mode. The legal

modes are 2, 3, 4, and 6. If mode 0 is entered, it is

converted to mode 2 or 3 depending on the postal

code. If mode 1 is entered, it is converted to mode

4. All other modes cause an error to be reported.

Table 54 defines the modes supported.

250

Chapter 3

Barcodes

data Represents the data to be barcoded. There are two

different ways the Maxicode data field can be

formatted: Standard Data Field and UPS Shipping

Data Field.

Standard Data Field

Modes 2 and 3 have their primary message structured as shown in Table 55.

The data following the primary message is the secondary message and has a

free format.

Table 54. Maxicode Barcode Mode

Mode Definition

2Primary and secondary messages employ SEC. Primary message

is a structured carrier message with a numeric postal code.

3Primary and secondary messages employ SEC. Primary message

is a structured carrier message with an alphanumeric postal code.

4Primary and secondary messages together encode up to 93

characters.

6Primary and secondary messages together encode up to 93

characters. For reader configuration purposes only.

Table 55. Standard Data Fields

Character

Positions Title Data

0 - 2 Class of Service Numeric

3 - 5 Country Code Numeric

6 - 14 Postal Code 9 Digit Numeric for US or

6 Digit Alphanumeric for

Canada

15, 16 Separator '>A'

17 - ... Secondary Message Free Format

Maxicode

251

UPS Shipping Data Field

This syntax begins with seven encoded data characters followed by a date

(yy). The first four characters are the Message Header and the next five are

the Transportation Data Format Header. The format of the Message Header

is “[)>Rs”. The Transportation Data Format Header is “01Gsyy” where yy is

the year, and “G's” and “R's” are control characters. The structure is shown in

Table 56.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration followed by any valid

command character or G, the universal sequence

terminator.

Table 56. UPS Shipping Data Fields

Character

Positions Title Data

0 - 3 Message Header [)>Rs

4 - 8 Transportation Data Format

Header

01Gsyy

9 - 17 Postal Code 9 Digit Numeric for US or

6 Digit Alphanumeric for

Canada

18 Separator Gs

19 - 21 Country Code Numeric

22 Separator Gs

23 - 25 Class of Service Numeric

26 Separator Gs

27 - ... Secondary Message As per the UPS Guide To

Barcoding

252

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Maxicode Control Characters

The non-printable control characters can be generated by using the switch

characters defined in Table 57.

NOTE: If a “>” has to be part of the data stream, enter the character twice.

NOTE: <pp> = Shift Out Character

Table 57. Maxicode Control Characters

Control

Characters Alternate

Characters

NUL <pp>SP

SOH <pp>!

STX <pp>"

ETX <pp>#

EOT <pp>$

ENQ <pp>%

ACK <pp>&

BEL <pp>'

BS <pp>(

HT <pp>)

LF <pp>*

VT <pp>+

FF <pp>,

CR <pp>-

SO <pp>.

SI <pp>/

DLE <pp>`

DC1 <pp>a

DC2 <pp>b

DC3 <pp>c

DC4 <pp>d

NAK <pp>e

SYN <pp>f

ETB <pp>g

CAN <pp>h

EM <pp>i

SUM <pp>j

ESC <pp>k

FS <pp>l

GS <pp>m

RS <pp>n

US <pp>o

Maxicode

253

Maxicode Examples

The following command generates the Maxicode barcode shown below. In

the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and barcode data is

boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of alphanumeric

commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,050^BN%2999840068107317>AThis is a secondary

message.^G^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.5 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^B introduced the barcode command.

N selects no readable data field.

% selected Maxicode barcode.

2 selects Maxicode mode 2.

999840068107317 is the primary barcode data.

>A separates the primary barcode data from the secondary barcode data

(“This is a secondary message”).

^G^- terminated the barcode command sequence.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following example generates the MAXICODE barcode shown below:

NOTE: “|” in the barcode represents the Shift Out Character.

^PY^-^M10,10,050^IBARC,MAXICODE,N,2[)>|n01|m96841706672|m840|

m001|m1Z12345675|mUPSN|m12345E|m089|m|m1/1|m10.1|mY|m|m|mUT|n|

$^G^-^PN^-

254

Chapter 3

Barcodes

MSI

The MSI structure is shown in Figure 23 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 17. MSI Barcode Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

barcode, and permits bidirectional barcode scanning.

Data Field

The MSI barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces

to represent numeric characters. The structure is 1-module-wide narrow

elements and 2-module-wide wide elements; elements can be a bar or a

space. Each character is composed of 4 data bits, with each bit made up of a

bar and a space totalling 3 modules.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

CHECK

OPTIONAL

DIGIT

POSITION

MSI

255

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol,

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided

when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit

The check digit provides the means of verifying accurate scanning. For MSI

Types G, H, I, and X, a specific check digit, Modulo-10 or Modulo-11 (or both),

is automatically calculated and appended in the barcode symbol. MSI Type F

does not use a check digit.

MSI Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed below to print the readable data field in

the corresponding font with the specified guard

band gap.

Table 58. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

256

Chapter 3

Barcodes

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

type Represents the barcode type. As shown in Table

59, MSI Types F, G, H, I, and X are available. Enter

the type code corresponding to the MSI barcode

type desired.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F. VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

Table 59. MSI Barcodes

Standard

Type Code IBARC,

Type Code # of Data

Characters Check Digits Default Bar/

Space

Ratios*

FMSI 1-13 None 1:1:2:2

GMSI10 1-13 Mod 10 1:1:2:2

HMSI1010 1-13 Mod 10, Mod 10 1:1:2:2

IMSI1110 1-13 Mod 11, Mod 10 1:1:2:2

XMSI11 1-13 Mod 11 1:1:2:2

*Ratios represent dot width of the bar/space elements as follows:

Narrow Bar : Narrow Space : Wide Bar : Wide Space.

MSI

257

MSI barcodes use four-digit ratios. The ratios are

interpreted from left to right, measuring the size of

each bar or space, in dot width, in the following

pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide bar : wide

space. For example, enter 2244 in the ratio

parameter for:

2 dot-wide narrow bar

2 dot-wide narrow space

4 dot-wide wide bar

4 dot-wide wide space

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode

readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2

and 5, respectively; however, a narrow element larger than the wide

element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to

readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. MSI encodes from 1 through 13

characters. The available characters for the data

field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39).

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

MSI Barcode Examples

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio MSI barcode

shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYH87654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

msi.ex1

258

Chapter 3

Barcodes

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter H selected MSI barcode Type H, which automatically appends two Mod

10 check digits to the barcode data.

87654321 is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the horizontal MSI barcode below using

OCR-B font and double the default ratio:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BB9X224487654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

The following command generates the vertical MSI barcode below using

standard 10 cpi font, the standard default ratio, and data of 87654321:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYF87654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

msi.e

si.

ex3

MSI

259

The following command generates the same vertical MSI barcode above,

except that double the default ratio is used:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CY9I224487654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

msi.ex4

260

Chapter 3

Barcodes

PDF417

The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 18 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 18. PDF417 Structure

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

LOWER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD QUIET

ZONE

QUIET START

CODEZONE

STOP

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

UPPER GUARD BAND

SR, SC

POSITION

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

SR, SC

POSITION

GUARD

BAND

LOWER STOP

CODE

START

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

SR, SC

POSITION

CCW CW

Normal

INV

PDF417

261

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode.

Data Field

PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data. The first three are pre-

established (the remaining nine are user modes, which can be defined by

users or industry associations according to specific applications):

1. Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode (EXC). Comprised of four

sub-modes, this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII characters.

This is the default mode; the IGP uses shift or latch characters to enable

other modes.

2. Binary/ASCII Plus mode. This offers encodation for all ASCII characters,

printable or not, and binary values.

3. Numeric Compaction mode. This offers encodation for numeric values to

a density of almost 3 digits per code word.

4. The IGP will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest

encodation for the data.

Security Level

PDF417 can detect and correct errors. Each label has 2 code words of error

detection. You can select the error correction capacity based on application

needs. Specify a security level in the range of 0 - 8, at the time of printing.

PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words.

Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode, one to detect

the error and one to correct for it, a given security level can support half the

number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words.

PDF

Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be

encoded.

262

Chapter 3

Barcodes

PDF417 Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type [X[D]n] [Y[D]n] [(Hn)] (Wn)] [Ah:w]

[Rn] [Cn] [Sn], DATA^G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal or C for vertical barcodes.

pAn optional readable data field. Enter N so no

readable data prints in this field.

type Enter & for PDF417.

X[D]nOptional parameter to designate the width of the

narrow element in either the default 60 X 72 dots

per inch or, if the D is given, in target dots. The

default size is 1/60th of an inch.

Y[D]nOptional parameter to designate the height of the

barcode in either the default 60 X 72 dots per inch

or, if the D is given, in target dots. The default size

is 2/72nd of an inch.

HnOptional parameter to adjust the overall height of

the barcode symbol (including human readable

data). Height adjustments are made in 0.1-inch

increments; enter H and a value from 4 through 99

to select height adjustments from 0.4 through 9.9

inches. Parameters Wn, Rn, Cn or A cannot be

entered if this parameter is used.

WnOptional parameter to adjust the maximum width of

the symbol based on the narrow element width.

Enter Wn; where n is the overall width in tenths of

an inch. Parameters Hn, Rn, Cn or A cannot be

entered if this parameter is used.

Ah:w Optional parameter for specifying the symbol

height-to-width ratio where h is the height and w is

the width, both expressed as integers. The default

is 1:2. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn, or Cn cannot be

entered if this parameter is used.

RnOptional parameter that specifies the number of

rows the symbol will have. Enter R followed by the

number of rows in the range of 3 through 90 in

multiples of 3. Parameters Hn, Wn, Cn or A cannot

be entered if this parameter is used.

CnOptional parameter that specifies the number of

columns the symbol will have. Enter C followed by

the number of columns in the range of 1 through

90. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn or A cannot be entered

if this parameter is used.

PDF417

263

SnOptional parameter that specifies the security level.

Enter S followed by the security level in the range

of 0 through 8. The default is 2.

data Enter the data for the barcode. A null data field (no

characters) is not permitted. The data field can

contain any character including carriage returns

and line feeds. The length of the data field is

variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 1024 bytes to minimize potential reading

errors.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

PDF417 Example

Figure 19 illustrates a horizontal PDF417 barcode generated by the following

program:

^PY^-

^M10,10,000^KF^BN&X1Y2,ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmn

opqrstuvwxyz‘1234567890-

=\[];’,./!@#$%^&()_+|{}:”<>?^G^KF^-^PN^-

Figure 19. Sample PDF417 Barcode

264

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Planet

The Planet barcode was introduced by the U.S. Postal Service under the

product name “Confirm.” Planet is a 12-digit barcode used to track mail

electronically, both inbound and outbound. Under the “Confirm” process, the

first two digits of the Planet data field defines the service expected. The next

nine digits are customer information, and the last digit is the check digit.

The Planet barcode structure is illustrated in Figure 20 and Figure 21 and

described on the following pages. The Planet code can be a part of the

address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4-inch area across the

width of the mail piece.

The Planet barcode cannot use variable ratios and does not have a readable

data field.

Figure 20. Planet Structure

NOTE: Additional information regarding Planet barcode requirements can be

obtained from the U.S. Postal Service's Publication 25: A Guide to

Business Mail Preparation.

Return Address Area Postage Area

1/2"1/2"

BAR CODE DATA FIELD

START STOP

QUIET ZONE

CODE CODE

STARTING

POSITION

QUIET ZONE

CHECK DIGIT

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

Planet

265

Figure 21. Planet Structure (Vertical Bar)

Return Address Area Postage Area

1/2"

CODE

START

STOP

STARTING

POSITION

CHECK DIGIT

ZONE

QUIET

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

BAR

CODE

DATA

FIELD

ZONE

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale.

266

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Quiet Zone

The barcode structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends

4.75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece. In addition, a minimum quiet

zone of 0.040-inch above and below the barcode data must also be provided.

You must provide sufficient space for this zone.

Start/Stop Code

The start and stop codes are referred to as “framing bars” in Planet. The start

and stop codes are each one tall bar, one identifying the leading and trailing

end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

barcode. The start/stop code structure permits barcode scanning in a left-to

right direction only.

Data Field

The barcode data produces a single field of 60 bars for an 11-digit data field.

The bars are grouped in sets of five. Each set of five bars (comprised of three

tall bars and two short bars) represents one of the five digits of the zip code,

plus the four-digit zip code extension. If the Delivery Point Barcode is used, an

additional two-digit code is also added to make an 11-digit data field.

Exact barcode dimensions depend on the type of printer used, but fall within

the following specifications:

Each bar width is equal and is .020-inch ± .005-inch. Each bar height is either

a tall (full) or short (half) bar, representing a 1 or 0, respectively. Each tall bar

is .125-inch ± .010-inch; each short bar is .050-inch ± .010-inch. Horizontal

spacing between bars (pitch) is 22 bars ±

2 bars per inch over any 0.50-inch

portion of the barcode. Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is

0.0416-inch and .050-inch, respectively, with a clear vertical space ranging

from 0.012-inch to 0.040-inch between bars.

Check Digit

The twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character. The Mod 10

check digit is added automatically to verify accurate scanning.

Planet

267

Planet Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir N r data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

N Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

r The type code for Planet. Enter r.

data The barcode data. Planet barcodes encode exactly

11 numeric digits. A check digit is automatically

added by VGL.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

NOTE: The Planet barcode symbol height is fixed at 0.125 inches.

268

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Planet Examples

The following command generates the horizontal Planet barcode shown

below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M^KF^BNr01234567890^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

N selected no readable data field.

r selected Planet barcode.

01234567890 is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the vertical Planet barcode below with

data of 01234567890:

^PY^-^M^KF^CNr01234567890^G^KF^-^PN^-

POSTNET

269

POSTNET

The POSTNET barcode structure is illustrated in Figure 22 and Figure 23 and

described on the following pages. The POSTNET code can be a part of the

address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4-inch area across the

width of the mail piece.

The POSTNET barcode cannot use variable ratios and does not have a

readable data field.

Figure 22. POSTNET Structure

NOTE: Additional information regarding POSTNET barcode requirements

can be obtained from the U.S. Postal Service's Publication 25: A

Guide to Business Mail Preparation.

Return Address Area Postage Area

1/2"1/2"

BAR CODE DATA FIELD

START STOP

QUIET ZONE

CODE CODE

STARTING

POSITION

QUIET ZONE

CHECK DIGIT

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

270

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Figure 23. POSTNET Structure (Vertical Bar)

Return Address Area Postage Area

1/2"

CODE

START

STOP

STARTING

POSITION

CHECK DIGIT

ZONE

QUIET

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

BAR

CODE

DATA

FIELD

ZONE

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale.

POSTNET

271

Quiet Zone

The barcode structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends

4.75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece. In addition, a minimum quiet

zone of 0.040-inch above and below the barcode data must also be provided.

You must provide sufficient space for this zone.

Start/Stop Code

The start and stop codes are referred to as “framing bars” in POSTNET. The

start and stop codes are each one tall bar, one identifying the leading and

trailing end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with

each barcode. The start/stop code structure permits barcode scanning in a

left-to right direction only.

Data Field

The barcode data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5-digit field, 50 bars

for a 9-digit data field, or 60 bars for an 11-digit data field. The bars are

grouped in sets of five. Each set of five bars (comprised of two tall bars and

three short bars) represents one of the five digits of the zip code, plus the

four-digit zip code extension. If the Delivery Point Barcode is used, an

additional two-digit code is also added to make an 11-digit data field.

Exact barcode dimensions depend on the type of printer used, but fall within

the following specifications:

Each bar width is equal and is .020-inch ± .005-inch. Each bar height is either

a tall (full) or short (half) bar, representing a 1 or 0, respectively. Each tall bar

is .125-inch ± .010-inch; each short bar is .050-inch ± .010-inch. Horizontal

spacing between bars (pitch) is 22 bars ±

2 bars per inch over any 0.50-inch

portion of the barcode. Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is

0.0416-inch and .050-inch, respectively, with a clear vertical space ranging

from 0.012-inch to 0.040-inch between bars.

Check Digit

The sixth, tenth, or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character

for the 5, 9, or 11-digit data field, respectively. The Mod 10 check digit is

added automatically to verify accurate scanning.

272

Chapter 3

Barcodes

POSTNET Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir N * data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

N Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

* The type code for POSTNET. Enter *.

data The barcode data. POSTNET barcodes encode

exactly 5, 9, or 11 numeric digits. A check digit is

automatically added by VGL.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

NOTE: The POSTNET barcode symbol height is fixed at 0.125 inches.

POSTNET Example

The following command generates the horizontal POSTNET barcode shown

below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M^KF^BN*927047563^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

N selected no readable data field.

Asterisk (*) selected POSTNET barcode.

927047563 is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

Royal Mail

273

Royal Mail

The Royal Mail barcode, like POSTNET, is used for mailing applications.

However, the barcode can encode full addresses on labels. Royal Mail

barcodes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width, but have

four different types of bars (Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and Tracker),

whereas POSTNET only has two bar types (Tall and Short).

The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of

four bars, using combinations of Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and

Trackers. It also adds start and stop barcodes as well as a check digit.

Quiet Zone

The barcode structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a 2mm

border on each side of the barcode.

Start/Stop Code

The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the barcode. The start bar

consists of an ascender bar, and is positioned at the leftmost end of the

barcode. The stop bar consists of a full height bar, and is positioned at the

rightmost end of the barcode adjacent to the check digit.

Data Field

Royal Mail barcodes use four types of bars to encode its data: Full Height,

Ascender, Descender, and Tracker. Each Full Height bar is 0.198 inch ±

0.030 inch. The Ascender and Descender bars are about 62.5% of the Full

Height bar in length, while the Tracker bar is about 25% of the Full Height bar.

Each bar width is equal, and must be .020-inch ± .005-inch. Horizontal

spacing between bars (pitch) must be 22 bars ±

2 bars per inch over any

0.50-inch portion of the barcode.

Royal Mail barcodes have a variable length of data field, which consists of

valid characters “0” through “9” and “A” through “Z”. Each character is

encoded with four bars of varied types.

Check Digit

A modulo-6 check digit is added automatically to the end of the barcode to

verify accurate scanning.

274

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Royal Mail Command Format

Default Ratio: (cc) dir N Y data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes. Enter C for vertical barcodes.

N Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

Y The type code for Royal Mail. Enter Y.

data The barcode data. A check digit is automatically

added by VGL.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

Royal Mail Example

The following command generates the horizontal Royal Mail barcode shown

below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BNY050LU178XE2B^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

N selected no readable data field.

Y selected Royal Mail barcode.

050LU178XE2B is the barcode data.

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

Telepen

275

Telepen

The Telepen structure is shown in Figure 24 and described on the following

pages.

Figure 24. Telepen Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

barcode. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional barcode

scanning.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each character is represented

by a different series of bars and spaces, both wide and narrow, but is always

16 units in width (for a wide to narrow ratio of 3). Each character starts with a

bar and ends with a space.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

CHECK DIGIT

OPTIONAL

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

CHECK

OPTIONAL

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DIGIT

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

276

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided

when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit

A mandatory modulo-127 check digit is inserted into the barcode. This feature

provides a means of verifying accurate scanning.

Telepen Command Format

NOTE: Refer to page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p J data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] J [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes in Table 27 to print the readable data field in

the corresponding font with the specified guard

band gap.

Table 60. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

Telepen

277

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

J The type code for Telepen. Enter J.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with

parameter 9 or :) representing the ratios for

variable ratio barcodes. The default ratios are

overridden by the variable ratio feature. The ratio

data must be hexadecimal numbers from 0 through

9 or A through F. VGL automatically checks the

input for validity. If an invalid character is found in

the ratio, an error message is generated.

Telepen barcodes use four-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space, in dot width according to the

following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide

bar : wide space. For example, enter 2266 in the

ratio parameter for:

2 dot-wide narrow bar

2 dot-wide narrow space

6 dot-wide wide bar

6 dot-wide wide space.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode

readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2

and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide

element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to

readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. Telepen encodes 1 through 40

characters from the Telepen full ASCII Character

Set shown in Table 29.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

278

Chapter 3

Barcodes

NOTE: Character pairs /M, /N, and /P through /Y are reserved for future

control character pairs.

Table 61. Telepen Character Set

ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

(

)

—

;

Space

—

[

]

{

}

DEL

%T %X

%Y %Z

Telepen

279

Telepen Examples

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Telepen

barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is

italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed

description of alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,010^BOJ1234567^G^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.1 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^B introduced the barcode command.

O selected the 3-dot OCR-A font to print the optional readable data field.

J selected the Telepen barcode

1234567 is the barcode data, and ^G terminated the barcode command

sequence.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the horizontal Telepen barcode below

using Standard 10 cpi font, and data of ABCDEFG:

^PY^-^M10,10,010^BYJABCDEFG^G^-^PN^-

280

Chapter 3

Barcodes

UPC-A

The UPC-A barcode can be printed with or without a 2- or 5-digit add-on data

field, which is placed at the end of the barcode. The UPC-A barcode structure

is shown in Figure 25 and described on the following pages.

Figure 25. UPC-A Structure

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on

the form (minimum of 7 modules) for the right quiet zone. (A trailing quiet zone

is provided automatically if an add-on code has been specified in the barcode

command.) The number system character is printed automatically in the left

quiet zone; the check digit is printed automatically in the right quiet zone.

QUIET

ZONE

START CODE CENTER CODE

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

STOP CODE

LEFT DATA

FIELD RIGHT DATA

FIELD HEIGHT

QUIET

ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE

STARTING

POSITION

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT

CHARACTER

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

CHECK

DIGIT

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

CENTER CODE

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

STOP CODE

HEIGHT

STARTING

FIELD

START CODE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER N

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

CHARACTER

POSITION

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

2- OR 5-

DIGIT ADD-

ON CODE

UPC-A

281

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The Start/Center/Stop codes are special character codes which extend into

the printed data field area, marking the start, center, and stop portions of the

barcode. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to apply a code to a class or

type of item and is printed in the left quiet zone. The first character in the data

field is used as the number system character.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,

Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4

modules. Each character consists of 2 bars and two spaces that total 7

modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right

data field to permit read direction sensing.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

barcode symbol and printed in the right quiet zone, if specified. The check

digit provides the means to verify accurate scanning. The number system

character is included in the check digit algorithm.

282

Chapter 3

Barcodes

UPC-A Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 62 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

NOTE: For UPC 100% PDF is printed in 12 cpi Letter Gothic. For UPC 80% it

is printed in 15 cpi Letter Gothic.

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

Table 62. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

UPC-A

283

type Represents the barcode type. Enter P for standard

UPC-A; enter a for UPC-A plus a 2-digit add-on

data field; enter b for UPC-A plus a 5-digit add-on

data field; enter 0 for UPC-A 80%; enter 1 for UPC-

A 100%.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. However, unique variable

ratios for UPC-A barcodes easily generate large,

out-of-spec barcodes. Ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F; VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

UPC-A barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space, in dot width, in the following

pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :

2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3

module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module

wide bar : 4 module wide space.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode

readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/

space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. UPC-A barcodes encode exactly

11 digits. The first character is interpreted as the

number system character. The next five characters

are the left half of the vendor number data (on the

upper side of vertically oriented symbols). The final

five characters comprise the right half of the

product number data (on the lower side of vertically

oriented symbols). A twelfth character is an

automatic check digit which is computed and

printed in the last character position at the end of

the product number data. If the 2- or 5-digit add-on

data field is used, include this data at the end of the

data field. The characters available for the data

field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39).

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

284

Chapter 3

Barcodes

UPC-A Examples

The following command generated the horizontal default ratio UPC-A barcode

below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYP12345654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- turned on the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter P selected the UPC-A barcode type.

12345654321 is the 11-digit barcode data (the first character, 1, is the number

system character), and ^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the vertical UPC-A barcode below using

standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of 12345654321:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYP12345654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

upca.ex1

pca.

ex2

UPC-E

285

UPC-E

UPC-E barcodes are special zero-suppressed Universal Product Codes that

compress 10 data characters down to 6 characters under specific rules. UPC-

E barcode types include UPC-E0, UPC-E+2, UPC-E+5, UPC-E0+2, and

UPC-E0+5. UPC-E also offers optional extended data fields onto existing

UPC-E barcodes. The UPC-E barcode structure is shown in Figure 26 and

described on the following pages.

Figure 26. UPC-E Structure

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. VGL automatically produces an 11-module wide left

quiet zone; You are responsible for providing sufficient space (minimum of 7

modules) on the form for the right quiet zone. (A trailing quiet zone is provided

automatically if an add-on code has been specified in the barcode command.)

The number system character is printed automatically in the left quiet zone. If

specified, the check digit is automatically printed in the right quiet zone.

Start/Stop Codes

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

DATA

FIELD

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

HEIGHT

CHECK

DIGIT

CHARACTER

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD READABLE

DATA FIELD

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

START CODE

NUMBER

QUIET

ZONE

STARTING

QUIET

ZONE

CHECK

DIGIT

STOP CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

SYSTEM

DATA

NUMBER

CHARACTER

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

CHARACTER

SYSTEM

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

HEIGHT

FIELD

POSITION

STARTING

POSITION

286

Chapter 3

Barcodes

The Start/Stop codes are special character codes which extend into the

printed data field area, marking the start and stop portions of the barcode.

These codes are automatically produced.

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to apply a code to a class or

type of item and is printed automatically in the left quiet zone. The first

character in the data field is used as the number system character.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start

and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4 modules. Each

character consists of 2 bars and 2 spaces that total 7 modules. Six or 10 data

characters are expected, depending on the UPC-E barcode type (t) selected.

By modifying the syntax of the vendor number and product code, 10-digit data

is compressed down to 6 digits.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

barcode symbol and printed in the right quiet zone, if specified. The check

digit provides the means to verify accurate scanning. The number system

character is included in the check digit algorithm.

UPC-E

287

UPC-E Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 63 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

type Represents the barcode type. Enter the Type Code

corresponding to the UPC-E type desired from

Table 64.

Table 63. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

288

Chapter 3

Barcodes

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :)

representing the ratios for variable ratio barcodes.

Default ratios are overridden by the variable ratio

feature. However, unique variable ratios for UPC-E

barcodes easily generate large, out-of-spec

barcodes. Ratio data must be hexadecimal

numbers from 0 through 9 or A through F; VGL

automatically checks the input for validity. If an

invalid character is found in the ratio, an error

message is generated.

UPC-E barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space, in dot width, in the following

pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :

2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3

module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module

wide bar : 4 module wide space.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode

readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/

space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. Depending on the UPC-E

barcode selected from Table 64, VGL expects a

specific number of data characters to be provided.

The characters available for the data field are 0

through 9 (hex 30 through 39).

Table 64. UPC-E Barcodes

Description Standard

Type Code IBARC,

Type Code

# of Data

Characters

Expected

Number

System

Used

Default Bar/

Space Ratios*

UPC-E QUPCE 10* 01:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

UPC-E0 RUPCE0 6 0 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

UPC-E+2 cUPCE+2 12* 01:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

UPC-E+5 dUPCE+5 15* 01:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

UPC-E0+2 eUPCE0+2 8 0 1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

UPC-E0+5 fUPCE0+5 11 01:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

*Type Codes Q (UPCE), c (UPCE+2), and d (UPCE+5) compress the data characters down to

6 by applying specific rules according to the syntax of the vendor number data. Refer to the

data description.

UPC-E

289

When Type Code Q, c, or d is selected, 10 data

characters are expected; the first five characters

are vendor number data, and the next five

characters are product code data. The +2 (Type

Code c) and +5 (Type Code d) add-on data is

unaffected by the compression of the first 10 data

characters. The first 10 characters of the data field

are automatically modified and compressed down

to 6 data characters based on the syntax of the

vendor number and product code. The rules for

compressing data are described below:

• If the vendor number ends in 000, 100, or 200,

then the 6 data characters are: the first 2

vendor numbers, the last 3 product code

numbers, and the third vendor number.

• If the vendor number ends in 00, then the 6

data characters are: the first 3 vendor

numbers, the last 2 product code numbers,

and the digit “3”.

• If the vendor number ends in 0, then the 6 data

characters are: the first 4 vendor numbers, the

last product code number, and the digit “4”.

• In all other cases, the 6 data characters are:

the first 5 vendors numbers and the last

product code number.

For example, if the Type Q data field was input as

1232000001, it would be compressed down to 6

characters to read 123214: the first four vendor

numbers (1232) are followed by the last product

code number (1), and followed by the digit 4,

resulting in 123214.

When Type Codes R, e, or f are selected, VGL

assumes you have already compressed the first 10

data characters down to 6 characters. The +2

(Type Codes c and e) and +5 (Type Codes d and f)

add-on data is unaffected by the compression of

the first 10 data characters. The barcode encodes

exactly 6 digits.

Note that Type R, Type e, and Type f are UPC-E0

barcodes using encoding tables for 0 number

system characters. See Table 65 for compression

data from UPC-E to UPC-E0, and see Table 66 for

expansion data from UPC-E0 to UPC-E.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

290

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Table 65. Ten-Digit Compression

1. Manufacturer’s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

( )

first two digits of

manufacturer’s

number

( )

last three digits of

the product

number

( )

third digit of the

manufacturer’s

number, use 0

through 2 only

2. Manufacturer’s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

( )

first three digits of

manufacturer’s

number

( )

last two digits of

the product

number; use 00-

99 only

( 3 )

depends on how

many digits

appear in the

manufacturer’s

number

3. Manufacturer’s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

X X X X 0 ( )

first four digits of

manufacturer’s

number

( )

last digit of

product number,

use 0 through 9

only

( 4 )

depends on how

many digits

appear in the

manufacturer’s

number

4. Manufacturer’s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

X X X X X ( )

all five digits of

manufacturer’s

number

( )

last digit of

product number,

use 5-9 only

UPC-E

291

NOTE: Six digit UPC–EO data ends with 3. The third digit should be ranging

from 3 to 9. An error is printed when anything other than 3 through 9

is entered.

Table 66. Six-Digit Zero Expansion

if the 6 digit number ends

with: then the MFPS number is: and the Product Number is:

Example: 124560

the first 2 digits (of the zero

suppressed number) plus 000

12000

00 plus the THIRD, FOURTH

and FIFTH digit (of the zero

suppressed number)

00456

Example: 275831

the first two digits plus 100

27100

same as above

00583

Example: 412022

the first two digits plus 200

41200

same as above

00202

Example: 876543

the first three digits plus 00

87600

000 plus the FOURTH and

FIFTH digit

00054

Example: 753774

the first four digits plus 0

75370

0000 plus the FIFTH digit

00007

5, 6, 7, 8, 9

Examples:

213756

517019

the first five digits of the zero

suppressed number

21375

51701

0000 plus the SIXTH digit

00006

00009

292

Chapter 3

Barcodes

UPC-E Examples

The following command generated the horizontal default ratio UPC-E barcode

below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and

barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of

alphanumeric commands.

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYR123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- turned on the graphics command sequence.

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^KF activated Dark Print.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

Letter R selected the 6-digit, number system 0 UPC-E barcode type.

123456 is the 6-digit barcode data (the first character, 1, is the number

system character).

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.

^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the vertical UPC-E barcode below using

standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of 123456:

^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYR123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

upce.ex1

upce.ex2

UPCSHIP

293

UPCSHIP

The UPCSHIP barcode structure is shown in Figure 27 and described on the

following pages.

Figure 27. UPCSHIP Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for

the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop

codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or

spaces) and 3 narrow elements.

DATA FIELD

QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

HEIGHT

STARTING

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

CHECK

OPTIONAL

DIGIT

POSITION

CHECK DIGIT

OPTIONAL

294

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol

and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided

when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

barcode symbol. The check digit provides the means to verify accurate

scanning.

UPCSHIP Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: cc) dir p $ data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] $ [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed in Table 67 to print the readable data

field in the corresponding font with the specified

guard band gap.

Table 67. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

UPCSHIP

295

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

$ The type code for UPCSHIP. Enter $.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F. VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

UPCSHIP barcodes use four-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space, in dot width, in the following

pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide bar : wide

space. For example, enter 2266 in the ratio

parameter for:

2 dot-wide narrow bar

2 dot-wide narrow space

6 dot-wide wide bar

6 dot-wide wide space

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode

readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2

and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide

element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique

ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to

readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. The UPCSHIP barcode requires

exactly 13 characters of data. The characters

available for the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30

through 39).

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

296

Chapter 3

Barcodes

UPCSHIP Example

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio UPCSHIP

barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is

italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed

description of alphanumeric commands.

^M2020^IBARC,UPCSHIP,N,0001234567890^G^-

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 2.0 inches and character width was

selected at 2.0 inches.

^IBARC, introduced the barcode command.

UPCSHIP, selected the UPCSHIP barcode type.

N, selects no readable data field.

0001234567890 is the 13-character barcode data field.

^G^- terminated the barcode command sequence.

i25.ex1

UPS 11

297

UPS 11

The UPS 11 barcode structure is shown in Figure 28 and described on the

following pages.

Figure 28. UPS 11 Structure

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from

overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode. Each

of the UPS 11 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code,

both automatically provided by VGL.

Data Field

UPS 11 is a special case of Code 128 (page 195). This barcode is restricted

to 10 data characters. The first character must be 0 through 9 or A through Z.

The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9.

DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP

LOWER GUARD BAND

CODE CODEZONE ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

CHECK DIGIT

OPTIONAL

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

CHECK

OPTIONAL

HEIGHT

STARTING

POSITION

DIGIT

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

298

Chapter 3

Barcodes

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

barcode data. It can be printed above or below the barcode symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

barcode symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code is

included in the check digit algorithm.

UPS 11 Command Format

NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.

Default Ratio: (cc) dir p u data (cc)G

Variable Ratio: (cc) dir p [9] [:] u [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

dir Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for

horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

pPrints the optional readable data field. The

readable data field is printed below a horizontal

barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical

barcode.

Replace p in the barcode command with one of the

codes listed below to print the readable data field in

the corresponding font with the specified guard

band gap.

Table 68. Printable Data Field Fonts

Font Gap p code

Standard 10 cpi 3 dots Y

OCR-A 3 dots O

OCR-A .1-inch S

OCR-B 3 dots B

OCR-B .1-inch T

None N

UPS 11

299

9 or : Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,

which permits unique bar and space width ratios

adjusted for specific applications.

Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio

barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60

x 72 dpi).

Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes

represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or

300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being

used).

u The type code for UPS 11. Enter u.

ratio Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :

above) representing the ratios for variable ratio

barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be

hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A

through F; VGL automatically checks the input for

validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,

an error message is generated.

UPS 11 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios

are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size

of each bar or space in dot width, in the following

pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :

2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3

module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module

wide bar : 4 module wide space. For example,

enter 22446688 in the ratio data field for:

2 module wide bar

2 module wide space

4 module wide bar

4 module wide space

6 module wide bar

6 module wide space

8 module wide bar

8 module wide space

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the

allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data

creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode

readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/

space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.

data The barcode data. UPS 11 barcodes are restricted

to 11 data characters. The first character must be 0

through 9 or A through Z. The remaining ten digits

must be 0 through 9.

(cc)G Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC

for your VGL configuration immediately followed by

any valid command character or G, the universal

sequence terminator.

300

Chapter 3

Barcodes

UPS 11 Examples

The following command generates the horizontal default ratio UPS 11

barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is

italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed

description of alphanumeric commands.

^M1010010^BYu12345678902^G^-

^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.

The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was

selected at 1.0 inches.

A 0.1 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data

placement.

^B introduced the barcode command.

Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.

u selected the UPS 11 barcode type.

12345678902 is the barcode data field.

^G^- terminated the barcode command sequence.

The following command generated the vertical UPS 11 barcode below using

standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of 12345678902:

^M1010040^CYu12345678902^G^-

301

Exercises And Examples

Practice Using VGL

The following examples and exercises are designed to provide experience in

using VGL. The VGL command standards used in the exercises are

described in Chapter 2. Be sure to specifically follow the format for VGL

commands to ensure proper VGL operation.

Most of the format parameters are standard to all the commands unless

otherwise noted. Where applicable, some of the practice examples could be

modified to use the comparable Version II commands as described in Chapter

The practice exercise is presented for both normal and high resolution modes.

The practice exercise for normal resolution begins on page 302. The practice

exercise for high resolution begins on page 306.

NOTE: Using a different type of printer or a different configuration could

affect the appearance of your printed samples compared to those

shown in this manual. Additionally, depending on the paper top-of-

form setting and initial print position, the positioning of your printed

samples on the page may vary compared to the examples shown

here; these samples have been positioned on the page to correspond

with the related text.

Use the standard commands on your system to open a file to contain the

data, and to print the file when you're ready to print.

An explanation precedes each step in the practice exercises. Each command

sequence shows the general command format (Format) as detailed in

Chapter 2. Data following Enter represents the input data. The parameters of

each command have a specific order for data entry and a specific amount and

type of data that can be entered; input the data exactly as shown with the

possible exception of the SFCC. Always use the actual SFCC required by

your system wherever the ^ is shown.

302

Chapter 4

Practice Using VGL

Practice Graphic Exercise - Normal Resolution

NOTE: It is not necessary to enter the Dark Print (KF) commands where

instructed in the practice exercise steps. Dark Print is a feature of line

matrix printers only.

Creating Alphanumeric Text

1. Enable VGL for the Graphics Mode using the Graphics Mode Enable

command (PY). This is the first input to change VGL from the Normal

Mode to the Graphics Mode before any graphics data or commands can

be processed.

Format: (cc)PY(cc)-

Enter: ^PY^-

2. To avoid accidentally terminating the graphics command sequences by a

host-generated terminator, enable the Free Format command (F). This

allows VGL to accept the data as one continuous stream even though the

data may contain host-generated paper motion commands. When Free

Format is enabled, VGL only recognizes the Free Format command

terminators: carriage return (^-), form feed (^,), line feed (^*), vertical tab

(^+), and EVFU commands.

Format: (cc)F(cc)-

Enter: ^F^-

3. Create some alphanumeric text. Use the Standard Alphanumeric

command (M) to print "IGP" in characters 1.0 inches high (ht) and 1.0

inches wide (wd). Add a pass terminator (carriage return).

Format: (cc)M ht wd jus data

(cc)-

Enter: ^M10,10,000IGP

4. To see the results, enter a sequence terminator. For example, enable the

Free Format Form Feed command (,) and print the file. The result should

look like the example shown in Figure 29.

Format: (cc),

Enter: ^,

Figure 29. Practice Alphanumeric Commands in Normal Resolution

Practice Graphic Exercise - Normal Resolution

303

Boxing the Alphanumeric Text

5. In order to put a box around "IGP," a certain amount of data positioning

must occur. Modify the standard alphanumeric command (M) previously

entered to include other commands before "IGP." Add a Justification

command (J) for a 1.2 inch justification (jus) to move "IGP" down. Add a

Horizontal Tab (T) command before "IGP" to move it 1.1 inches (dis) from

the left margin.

Format: (cc)M ht wd jus

(cc)J jus (cc)T dis data

Enter: ^M10,10,000

^J120^T0110IGP

6. Use the Box command (LB) to add the box around "IGP." The Box

command is part of the extended graphics command set; in this example,

it must be input as part of the alphanumeric command sequence (input

prior to the sequence terminator). Use a Horizontal Tab command (T) to

position the starting point of the box 0.9 inches (dis) from the left margin.

Use a Justification command (J) with a zero justification to begin the box

at the top of the form. Enter the Box command (LB) to create a box 4.2

inches wide (horz) and 2.5 inches tall (vert) with horizontal (h) and vertical

(v) borders 3 dot rows thick.

Format: (cc)T dis

(cc)LB horz vert h v

Enter: ^T0090^J000

^LB0420,0250,3,3

The input file now contains the following commands. Printing the file

creates a box around the name as shown in Figure 30.

^PY^-

^F^-

^M10,10,000

^J120^T0110IGP

^T0090^J000

^LB0420,0250,3,3

^-^,

Figure 30. Practice Alphanumeric Commands and Box

in Normal Resolution

304

Chapter 4

Practice Using VGL

Creating Horizontal Lines

7. To put a horizontal line under “IGP,” use another Justification (J) and

Horizontal Tab (T) sequence to position the line 2.3 inches (jus) down

which is 0.3 inches under the name. Tab the line to 1.0 inches (dis) from

the left margin which begins the line just inside the left edge of the box.

Use a Solid Line (LS) command to create a line 3.0 inches long

horizontally (horz) and 2 dots wide vertically (vert). Add this data to the file

before the sequence terminator. The printed result is shown in Figure 31.

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis

(cc)LS horz vert h v

Enter: ^J230^T0100

^LS0300,0002

Figure 31. Practice Alphanumeric Commands, Box, and Line

in Normal Resolution

Creating More Alphanumeric Text

8. Use the Character Height command (H) to specify a new height (ht) of 0.2

inch. Use the Character Width command (W) to specify a new width (wd)

of 0.3 inches. Use a Justification command (J) to position the word

"INTELLIGENT" (data) at 0.1 inches (jus) from the starting position and a

Horizontal Tab command (T) to position "INTELLIGENT" 1.1 inches (dis)

from the left margin. Similarly, using the Justification and Tab sequence,

the word "GRAPHICS" can be positioned 0.4 inches down, 1.6 inches

from the left margin, and the word "PRINTING" 0.7 inches down, 2.1

inches from the left margin. Notice how it is possible to tab and justify to

any position. Tabs are related to the left margin and can be specified in

any print position left or right of the current print position. Justification is

relative to the starting point of the command sequence and can move

down and back up relative to that point.

Practice Graphic Exercise - Normal Resolution

305

Format: (cc)H ht (cc)W wd

(cc)J jus (cc)T dis data

Enter: ^H02^W03

^J010^T0110INTELLIGENT

^J040^T0160GRAPHICS

^J070^T0210PRINTING

9. Disable the Free Format command (O) and use the Graphics Mode

Disable command (PN).

Format: (cc)O(cc)-(cc)PN(cc)-

Enter: ^O^-^PN^-

The file now contains the following commands. The printout is shown in

Figure 32.

^PY^-

^F^-

^M10,10,000

^J120^T0110IGP

^T0090^J000

^LB0420,0250,3,3

^J230^T0100

^LS0300,0002

^H02^W03

^J010^T0110INTELLIGENT

^J040^T0160GRAPHICS

^J070^T0210PRINTING

^-^,

^O^-^PN^-

Figure 32. Completed Practice Example in Normal Resolution

306

Chapter 4

Practice Using VGL

Practice Graphic Exercise - High Resolution

The high resolution practice exercise is very similar to the normal resolution

exercise; the difference is that some parameters have been expanded to

allow sizing and positioning at greater levels of specificity (higher resolution).

Again, remember to properly terminate each command line and be sure that

the printer power is on and that the printer is ready and on line.

Enable VGL Graphics

1. Enable VGL for the Graphics Mode using the Graphics Mode Enable

command (PY). This is the first input to change VGL from the Normal

Mode to the Graphics Mode.

Format: (cc)PY(cc)-

Enter: ^PY^-

2. To avoid accidentally terminating the graphics command sequence by a

host-generated terminator, enable the Free Format command (F). This

allows VGL to accept the data as one continuous stream even though the

data may contain host-generated paper motion commands. When Free

Format is enabled, VGL only recognizes the Free Format command

terminators: Carriage Return (^-), Form Feed (^,), Line Feed (^*), Vertical

Tab (^+), and EVFU commands.

Format: (cc)F(cc)-

Enter: ^F^-

3. Once in Graphics Mode, type the following command to enable Extended

Graphics/High Resolution Mode:

Format: ^IPARAM,(mode)^G^-

Enter: ^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^-

4. Create some alphanumeric text. Use the Standard Alphanumeric

command (M) to print "IGP" in characters 1.25 inches high (ht) and 1.25

inches wide (wd). Add a pass terminator (carriage return).

Format: (cc)M ht wd jus data

(cc)-

Enter: ^M125,125,00000IGP

5. To see the results, enter a sequence terminator. For example, enable the

Free Format Form Feed command (,) and print the file. The result should

look like the example shown in Figure 33.

Format: (cc),

Enter: ^,

Practice Graphic Exercise - High Resolution

307

Figure 33. Practice Alphanumeric Commands in High Resolution

Boxing the Alphanumeric Text

6. In order to put a box around "IGP," a certain amount of data positioning

must occur. Modify the standard alphanumeric command (M) previously

entered to include other commands before "IGP." Add a Justification

command (J) for a .525 inch justification (jus) to move "IGP" down. Add a

Horizontal Tab (T) command before "IGP" to move it 1.125 inches (dis)

from the left margin.

Format: (cc)M ht wd jus

(cc)J jus (cc)T dis data

Enter: ^M125,125,00000

^J00525^T01125IGP

7. Use the Box command (LB) to add the box around "IGP." The Box

command is part of the extended graphics command set; in this example,

it must be input as part of the alphanumeric command sequence (input

prior to the sequence terminator). Use a Horizontal Tab command (T) to

position the starting point of the box .925 inches (dis) from the left margin.

Use a Justification command (J) with a zero justification to begin the box

at the top of the form. Enter the Box command (LB) to create a box 4.225

inches wide (horz) and 2.525 inches tall (vert) with horizontal (h) and

vertical (v) borders 1 dot row thick.

Format: (cc)T dis

(cc)LB horz vert h v

Enter: ^T00925^J00000

^LB04225,02525,1,1

The input file now contains the following commands. Printing the file

creates a box around the name as shown in Figure 34.

^PY^-

^F^-

^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^

^M125,125,00000

^J00525^T01125IGP

^T00925^J00000

^LB04225,025525,1,1

^-^

308

Chapter 4

Practice Using VGL

Figure 34. Practice Alphanumeric Commands With a Box in High

Resolution

Creating Horizontal Lines

8. Use another Justification (J) and Horizontal Tab (T) sequence to place a

horizontal line under “IGP.” Position the line 2.025 inches (jus) down,

which is 1.5. inches under the name. Tab the line to 1.525 inches (dis)

from the left margin which begins the line just inside the left edge of the

box. Use a Solid Line (LS) command to create a line 2.925 inches long

horizontally (horz) and 0.005 inches wide vertically (vert). Add this data to

the file before the sequence terminator. The printed result is shown in

Figure 35.

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis

(cc)LS horz vert h v

Enter: ^J02025^T01525

^LS02925,00005

ope

Practice Graphic Exercise - High Resolution

309

Figure 35. Practice Alphanumeric Commands, Box, and Line in High

Resolution

Creating More Alphanumeric Text

9. Use the Character Height command (H) to specify a new height (ht) of

.012 inch. Use the Character Width command (W) to specify a new width

(wd) of .012 inches. Use a Justification command (J) to position the word

"INTELLIGENT" (data) at .135 inches (jus) from the starting position and

a Horizontal Tab command (T) to position it 1.125 inches (dis) from the

left margin. Similarly, using the Justification and Tab sequence, the word

"GRAPHICS" can be positioned .245 inches down, 2.550 inches from the

left margin, and the word "PRINTING" .355 inches down, 3.775 inches

from the left margin.

Notice how it is possible to tab and justify to any position. Tabs are related

to the left margin and can be specified in any print position left or right of

the current print position. Justification is relative to the starting point of the

command sequence and can move down and back up relative to that

point.

Format: (cc)H ht (cc)W wd

(cc)J jus (cc)T dis data

Enter: ^H012^W012

^J00135^T01125INTELLIGENT

^J00245^T02550GRAPHICS

^J00355^T03775PRINTING

10. Disable the Free Format command (O) and use the Graphics Mode

Disable command (PN) to disable the Graphics Mode (and thus the

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode) to complete this exercise.

310

Chapter 4

Practice Using VGL

Format: (cc)O(cc)-(cc)PN(cc)-

Enter: ^O^-^PN^-

The file now contains the following commands. The printout is shown in

Figure 36.

^PY^-

^F^-

^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^-

^M125,125,00000

^J01525^T01125IGP

^T00925^J00000

^LB04225,02525,1,1

^J02025^T01525

^LS02925,00005

^H012^W012

^J00135^T01125INTELLIGENT

^J00245^T02550GRAPHICS

^J00355^T03775PRINTING

^-^,

^O^-^PN^-

Figure 36. Completed Practice Example in High Resolution

Page Layout Considerations

311

Once familiar with the expanded command parameters used in high

resolution mode, you can perform the remaining exercises in high resolution

mode also. To do so, simply enable Extended Graphics/High Resolution

Mode as you did in this exercise and then modify the appropriate steps in the

exercises to include broader parameter definitions.

Form Example

The following exercise produces a complete form by sketching it out on a grid.

(Use the Standard Grid and Logo grid provided in Appendix C.) The starting

and ending values are the data for VGL command parameters. The form

includes a box, a logo, a barcode, vertical and horizontal lines and

alphanumeric data.

Page Layout Considerations

At 6 lines per inch (lpi) and 10 characters per inch (cpi) printing, a standard 8-

1/2 x 11-inch sheet of paper has a print area of 66 lines (rows) and 85

characters (columns). (The printable area varies if you are not printing at 6 lpi

and 10 cpi.) Thus, the grid used to design an 8-1/2 x 11-inch form should

accommodate this 66 x 85 area.

Planning the Form Layout

In this example, assume you work for the HandCraft Boat Company. Your

slogan is "Quality boats crafted by hand," and the owner, Mr. Handcraft, has

asked you to design a simple form that his salesman can use for special

orders. On the form, he wants a logo, the slogan, the customer's name,

spaces for other particulars of the order, and a barcode to distinguish the

sales region and boat division from other HandCraft enterprises. Begin your

task as described below.

All data and commands for the form are entered into a file on the host

computer. Again, use the standard commands on your system to open a file

to contain the data and to print the file.

Similar to the previous examples, the information you are to input is listed

under the word Enter. Input the data exactly as it is shown with the possible

exception of the SFCC. Always use the actual SFCC required by your system

wherever the ^ is shown. For each command sequence, the general

command format is listed under the word Format. In the general format, the

SFCC is shown as (cc).

Remember to properly terminate each command line. Make sure the printer

power is on and that the printer is ready and on line.

312

Chapter 4

Form Example

Figure 37. Sample Form Design

Planning the Form Layout

313

Design the Form

1. Design the form on a grid as shown in Figure 37. (A standard grid

program and example is provided in Appendix C.) Designing the form on

the grid allows you to decide where each form element is placed.

Compensate for expanded alphanumerics and plan for the logo.

Enable VGL Graphics

2. Use the Graphics Mode Enable command (PY) to enable VGL for the

Graphics Mode.

Format: (cc)PY(cc)-

Enter: ^PY^-

3. To avoid accidentally terminating the graphics command sequence by a

host-generated terminator, enable the Free Format command (F). This

allows VGL to accept the data as one continuous stream even though the

data may contain host-generated paper motion commands. When Free

Format is enabled, VGL only recognizes the Free Format command

terminators: Carriage Return (^-), Form Feed (^,), Line Feed (^*), Vertical

Tab (^+), and EVFU commands.

Format: (cc)F(cc)-

Enter: ^F^-

4. Send a Free Format Form Feed command (,), to begin form processing at

a top-of-form position.

Format: (cc),

Enter: ^,

VGL is now ready to accept the commands and data for the form. Most of

the form and form elements are designed using the extended graphics

command set. Consequently, one of the Alphanumeric commands or the

Interrupt command must be used to introduce, or enable, the extended

graphics commands.

5. Enter the Standard Alphanumeric command (M). No other Alphanumeric

command parameters are needed at this time.

Format: (cc)M

Enter: ^M

Position Form Elements

6. Each of the various form elements must be properly positioned within the

form. Use a Justification command (J) to adjust the vertical position and a

Horizontal Tab command (T) to adjust the horizontal position for the first

form element. Position the first element 1.1 inches (jus) down from the

current print position and 1.0 inches (dis) in from the left margin.

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis

Enter: ^J110^T0100

314

Chapter 4

Form Example

Create the Box Around the Form

7. Use the Box command (LB) to create the outer box of the form. The box

will be 6.0 inches wide (horz), 7.4 inches tall (vert), with a 3-dot horizontal

(h) and vertical (v) line thickness.

Format: (cc)LB horz vert h v

Enter: ^LB0600,0740,3,3

Design the Logo

8. Define the logo, and return to the form to add the logo data. The

HandCraft logo is a hand with a sailboat as plotted in Figure 38. (Use the

Logo Grid in Appendix C to plot the dot positions for your logo the same

way.) Drawing the logo out on a grid permits the dot positions for each

vertical data byte in the logo to be computed and input as data in the

Plotting Graphics (Q) command. Notice that where dot positions are not

computed, the boat image in the hand emerges. The complete program

for the HandCraft logo starts on page 317.

Translate Logo Design into Data

Each hexadecimal data byte specifies a seven-bit dot row portion of the

logo, measuring 0.1 inch. The Most Significant Bit (MSB) of the data byte

corresponds to row 1 (the top bit row), and the bit rows continue through

the other bits to the Least Significant Bit (LSB) of the data byte, which

corresponds to row 1 (the bottom row). If the bit is set, a dot is printed in

the corresponding location. A hex data byte value of 7F prints dots in all

seven rows (64 + 32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1); a hex value of 40 (decimal 64)

prints a dot only in bit row 7. See page 129 in Chapter 2 for more

information on the Graphics Plotting (Columns) command.

For example, the values in Table 69 have been assigned to bits 1 through

7 for the first 0.1-inch row of data bytes (1 through 42) shown in Figure

38. Each byte was first calculated in decimal and then converted to the

equivalent hexadecimal value (using the ASCII chart in Appendix A). The

hexadecimal values are the data for the program shown on page 317.

Following this scheme, all hex data bytes for an entire 0.1 inch row (seven

vertical dot rows) of the logo can be calculated. Subsequent rows are

calculated similarly. To print each 0.1-inch row of the logo, the print

position is shifted down 0.1 inch using the Justification command, and

then the same vertical data byte columns are used. (See the second

example in Figure 38.)

Use the extended command for Graphics Plotting in columns (Q). The

Standard Alphanumeric command (M) introduces the Q command. The

Standard Alphanumeric command is also required with the Justification

(J) command to begin printing the logo 1.2 inches (jus) down from the

original print position and subsequently adjusted 0.1 inches with each

row. The Horizontal Tab (T) command is used to begin logo printing 1.7

inches and 5 dot rows (dis) from the left margin.

Planning the Form Layout

315

NOTE: Data Bytes containing no value (00), such as bytes 1 through 27

above, must be listed when actual data follows. However, any

remaining 00 data bytes following the end of data for that line, such

as bytes 42 through 80, need not be listed. (The universal terminator,

(cc)G, signals the end of data for that line.)

Following this scheme, all hex data bytes for an entire 0.1 inch row (seven

vertical dot rows) of the logo can be calculated. Subsequent rows are

calculated similarly. To print each 0.1-inch row of the logo, the print position is

shifted down 0.1 inch using the Justification command, and then same vertical

data byte columns are used. (See the second example in Figure 38 on

page 316.)

Use the extended command for Graphics Plotting in columns (Q). The

Standard Alphanumeric command (M) introduces the Q command. The

Standard Alphanumeric command is also required with the Justification (J)

command to begin printing the logo 1.2 inches (jus) down from the original

print position and subsequently adjusted 0.1 inches with each row. The

Horizontal Tab (T) command is used to begin logo printing 1.7 inches and 5

dot rows (dis) from the left margin.

Table 69. Translating Logo Design Into Data

Data

Byte # Decimal Value Converted to

Hexadecimal Value

1 through 27 00 00

28 01 01

29 03 03

30 03 03

31 07 (4+2+1) 07

32 15 (8+4+2+1) 0F

33 31 (16+8+4+2+1) 1F

34 31 1F

35 63 (32+16+8+4+2+1) 3F

36 63 3F

37 126 (64+32+16+8+4+2) 7E

38 124 (64+32+16+8+4) 7C

39 124 7C

40 120 (64+32+16+8) 78

41 112 (64+32+16) 70

316

Chapter 4

Form Example

Figure 38. Logo Design

10 20 30 40 50 60 70

7 =

6 =

5 =

4 =

3 =

2 =

1 =

Byte 1 Byte 23 Byte 34

Bit # Weights

Decimal

Data Data Data

Row 1, Byte 34

Row 5, Byte 34

(decimal)

119

(decimal)

Example: Example:

NOTE: Actual size of this logo is approximately .8-inch tall by 1-inch wide.

Row 1

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Row 5

Row 6

Row 7

Row 8

064

* Each 7-bit vertical data byte equals .1-inch or 1 row."

NOTE: Actual size of this logo is approximately .8-inch tall by 1-inch wide.

*Each 7-bit vertical data byte equals .1-inch or 1 “row”.

Planning the Form Layout

317

Input the Logo Data

9. Input the command sequence for the Standard Alphanumeric command,

Justification command, Horizontal Tab command, and Graphics Plot

command for each 0.1-inch row of hex data in the logo. Each group of

data below represents, from top to bottom, the eight 0.1-inch rows

required to produce the logo. (The spaces separating each group are for

readability; do not include these spaces in your program.)

Format:

(cc)M(cc)J jus (cc)T dis (cc)Q data (cc)G

Enter:

^M^J120^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,

00,00,00,01,03,03,07,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,7E,7C,7C,78,70^G

Enter:

^M^J130^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,01,01,03,03,07,07,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,

3F,7F,7F,7F,7E,7C,78,70,60,40,40,00,00,00,00,01,01,03,03,03,07,07,07,0F,

0F,0F,1F,1F,1E,1E,1C^G

Enter:

^M^J140^T0175^Q

01,01,03,03,07,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,7F,7F,7F,7F,3F,3F,00,00,00,40,60,70,78,

7C,7E,7F,7F,0F,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,3F,7E,7C,7C,7C,78,78,70,70,70,60,60,

60,40,40^G

Enter:

^M^J150^T0175^Q

7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,00,00,00,01,01,01,01

,01,01,01,41,61,71,79,7D,7F,7F,7F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,

1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,0E^G

Enter:

^M^J160^T0175^Q

7F,7F,7F,7F,5F,4F,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,07,07,07,47,47,47,47,

47,47,47,47,47,67,67,67,67,77,7F,3F,1F,1F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,

0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,07^G

Enter:

^M^J170^T0175^Q

40,40,60,60,70,70,78,78,7C,7C,7E,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,77,63,63

,41,41,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,

40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40^G

Enter:

^M^J180^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,40,40,60,60,70,70,78,78,7C,7C,7E,

7E,7F,7F,3F,3F,1F,0F,0F,07,03,01^G

318

Chapter 4

Form Example

Enter:

^M^J190^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,0

0,00,00,40,60,60,70,70,78,78,78,78,38^G

Enter the Company Heading

10. Next to the logo, print the company name, HandCraft Boats, in characters

0.3 inches high (ht) and 0.2 inches wide (wd) using the Standard

Alphanumeric command (M). Position the name 1.2 inches and 9 dot

rows (jus) down from the current print position, using the Justification

parameter of the Alphanumeric command and 3.1 inches (dis) from the

left margin using the Horizontal Tab (T) command. An Interrupt command

(I) is a most efficient way to input this type of data into various locations

on the form and it is used frequently in the remainder of the form

processing. Using the Interrupt command (followed by a Graphics Mode

carriage return), we can print what we have programmed so far, then

move the print position to 2.2 inches (dis) below the current start position.

Format: (cc)M ht wd jus (cc)T dis data (cc)G

(cc)I dis (cc)-

Enter: ^M03,02,129^T0310HandCraft Boats^G

^I220^-

The file on the host system for this form to this point contains all the

information listed below. Use your system standard command format to

print the file. The form should look like the one shown in Figure 39. If

errors occur, review your input and see Chapter 6.

^PY^-

^F^-

^J110^T0100

^LB0600,0740,3,3

^M^J120^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,

00,00,00,01,03,03,07,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,7E,7C,7C,78,70^G

^M^J130^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,01,01,03,03,07,07,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,

3F,7F,7F,7F,7E,7C,78,70,60,40,40,00,00,00,00,01,01,03,03,03,07,07,07,0F,

0F,0F,1F,1F,1E,1E,1C^G

^M^J140^T0175^Q

01,01,03,03,07,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,7F,7F,7F,7F,3F,3F,00,00,00,40,60,70,78,

7C,7E,7F,7F,0F,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,3F,7E,7C,7C,7C,78,78,70,70,70,60,60,

60,40,40^G

^M^J150^T0175^Q

7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,00,00,00,01,01,01,01

,01,01,01,41,61,71,79,7D,7F,7F,7F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,

1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,0E^G

^M^J160^T0175^Q

7F,7F,7F,7F,5F,4F,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,07,07,07,47,47,47,47,

47,47,47,47,47,67,67,67,67,77,7F,3F,1F,1F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,

0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,07^G

Planning the Form Layout

319

^M^J170^T0175^Q

40,40,60,60,70,70,78,78,7C,7C,7E,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,77,63,63

,41,41,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,

40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40^G

^M^J180^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,40,40,60,60,70,70,78,78,7C,7C,7E,

7E,7F,7F,3F,3F,1F,0F,0F,07,03,01^G

^M^J190^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,

00,00,00,40,60,60,70,70,78,78,78,78,38^G

^M03,02,129^T0310HandCraft Boats^G

^I220^-

Figure 39. Box, Logo, and Alphanumeric Commands

Enter Alphanumeric Text Throughout the Form

11. Create the customer related information on the top portion of the form.

Send the Standard Alphanumeric command (M) to specify 0.1 inch high

(ht) and 0.1 inch wide (wd) characters. With the Horizontal Tab command

(T), position the CUSTOMER: data 1.5 inches (dis) from the left margin

and position the PHONE: data 5.1 inches (dis) from the left margin.

Format: (cc)M ht wd jus data

(cc)T dis data

Enter: ^M01,01,000

^T0150CUSTOMER:^T0510PHONE:

12. Other pieces of the customer type data can be added to the top part of the

form from within the same alphanumeric command sequence initiated in

the previous step. Using a Justification command (J), the print position

can be lowered 0.4 inches (jus). Using Horizontal Tab commands (T), the

HULL NO: data can be positioned 1.5 inches (dis) from the left margin

3.1” (dis) from left margin

to starting column for

“HandCraft Boats”

1.2” + 9 dot rows (jus) down from

top of form to starting row for

“HandCraft Boats”

320

Chapter 4

Form Example

and the RIGGING: data can be positioned 4.9 inches (dis) from the left

margin.

Format: (cc)J jus

(cc)T dis data

Enter: ^J040

^T0150HULL NO:^T0490RIGGING:

13. The next set of customer data can be input in a similar fashion. Use the

Justification command (J) to move the print position down 0.8 inches

(jus), use the Horizontal Tab command (T) to position the COLOR: data

1.5 inches (dis) from the left margin and the DELIVERY DATE: data 4.4

inches (dis) from the left margin.

Format: (cc)J jus

(cc)T dis data

Enter: ^J080

^T0150COLOR:^T0440DELIVERY DATE:

14. The remaining text on the top portion of the form can now be entered,

again using a combination of Justification (J) and Horizontal Tab (T)

commands. Begin by justifying the print position 1.4 inches (jus) down

and tabbing 3.2 inches (dis) from the left margin for the SPECIAL ORDER

ITEMS heading.

Justify the print position 1.8 inches (jus) and tab 1.7 inches (dis) for the

ITEM heading, 3.5 inches (dis) for the DESCRIPTION heading, and 6.0

inches (dis) for the PRICE heading. Notice that the Justification command

always moves the print position relative to the last printed row position of

the alphanumeric command sequence. For this reason, the SPECIAL

ORDER ITEMS heading justified at 1.4 inches is 0.4 inches above the

ITEM, DESCRIPTION, and PRICE headings justified at 1.8 inches.

Similarly, the Horizontal Tab command moves the print position relative to

the left margin. Unlike a conventional typewriter, this allows you to move

the print position to the left or the right of the current position by specifying

a different tab position relative to the left margin.

Use the Interrupt command (I) followed by a Graphics Mode carriage

return (-) to position this part of the form 2.0 inches (dis) from the

previously active graphics command sequence (the sequence that

constructed the customer data).

Format: (cc)J jus

(cc)T dis data

(cc)I dis (cc)-

Enter: ^J140

^T0320SPECIAL ORDER ITEMS

^J180

^T0170ITEM^T0350DESCRIPTION^T0600PRICE

^I200^-

Planning the Form Layout

321

Enter the Interior Box with Horizontal and Vertical Lines

15. Add the interior form (the box with vertical lines) for the item, description,

and price data. VGL Form command constructs a box complete with

vertical lines at specified positions.

A Standard Alphanumeric command (M) sequence must be entered to

introduce the extended graphics commands that are used. Use a

Horizontal Tab command (T) to move the print position 1.5 inches (dis)

from the left margin. In the same sequence, use the Form command (LF)

to specify a 5.2-inch horizontal width (horz) and 2.9-inch vertical height

(vert) of the box, both horizontal (h) and vertical (v) edges 2 dot line

thickness.

In the same Form command, specify one vertical line 0.8 inches (Line1)

from the edge of the form with a 1 dot line thickness (t) and another

vertical line 3.6 inches (Line2) from the previous line also with a 1-dot line

thickness (t).

Format: (cc)M (cc) T dis

(cc)LF horz vert h v line1 t line2 t

Enter: ^M^T0150

^LF0520,0290,2,2,0080,1,0360,1

16. Add the horizontal lines to the interior box. Again, an Interrupt (I)

command is used to process and print the data 0.4 inches (dis) lower than

the top border of the interior box. The Standard Alphanumeric command

(M) is used to introduce the other commands in the sequence. Use the

Horizontal Tab command (T) to tab 1.5 inches from the left margin for the

horizontal print position. The solid horizontal lines are generated using the

Solid Line (LS) command. Specify a 5.2 inch horizontal (horz) length and

a 0.0 and 1 dot vertical length (vert), used as the line thickness in this

case.

Format: (cc)I dis (cc)-

(cc)M (cc)T dis (cc)LS horz vert

Enter: ^I040^-

^M^T0150^LS0520,0001

17. Print five more horizontal lines identical to the one created in the previous

step and evenly spaced 0.4 inches apart. Use the same command as in

the previous step and repeat it five times. Use an Interrupt command (I)

followed by a Graphics Mode carriage return to move the print position

0.8 inches (dis) lower.

Enter: ^I040^-

^M^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040^-

^M^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040^-

^M^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040^-

^M^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040^-

^M^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I080^-

322

Chapter 4

Form Example

You have completed the text in the upper portion of the form and the lined

box for the item, description and price data. Our sample HandCraft Boats

form now looks like the one shown in Figure 40.

Figure 40. Practice Form Example

Planning the Form Layout

323

Enter the Corners

18. A series of lines can be drawn to create the corners around the slogan at

the bottom of the form. A Standard Alphanumeric command (M) is used to

introduce the command sequence. A Horizontal Tab command (T) is

used to move the print position of the upper left horizontal line of the

corner 2.5 inches (dis) from the left margin. A Solid Line command (LS) is

used to specify the upper left line of the corner as 0.5 inches plus 5 dots

horizontal length (horz) and 2 dots vertical length (vert).

Format: (cc)M (cc)T dis (cc)LS horz vert

Enter: ^M^T0250^LS0055,0002

19. Use another Horizontal Tab command (T), within the same alphanumeric

command sequence, to move the print position 5.1 inches (dis) from the

left margin for the upper right line of the corner. Use another Solid Line

command (LS) to specify the upper right line of the corner as 0.5 inches

plus 5 dots horizontal length (horz) and 2 dot vertical length (vert).

Format: (cc)M (cc)T dis (cc)LS horz vert

Enter: ^T0510^LS0055,0002

20. The two vertical lines of the corner set are drawn in a similar fashion

within the same command sequence. For the left vertical line, the

Horizontal Tab (T) command specifies a tab position 2.5 inches (dis) from

the left margin and the Solid Line (LS) command creates a line 2 dots in

horizontal length (horz) and 0.8 inches vertical length (vert). The right

vertical line is positioned by a tab 5.6 inches and 5 dots (dis) from the left

margin and the line is created 2 dots horizontal length (horz) and 0.8

inches vertical length (vert).

Format: (cc)T dis (cc)LS horz vert

Enter: ^T0250^LS0002,0080

^T0565^LS0002,0080

21. The left and right horizontal bottom lines of the corner set are justified 0.8

inches (jus) down using a Justification (J) command. Following the

justification, a Horizontal Tab (T) moves the print position 2.5 inches (dis)

from the left margin for the left line created by a Solid Line command (LS)

as 0.5 inches plus 5 dots horizontal length (horz) and 2 dots vertical

length (vert). The right bottom line is created 0.5 inches plus 5 dots

horizontal length (horz) and 2 dots vertical length (vert) at a position 5.1

inches from the left margin (dis).

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis (cc)LS horz vert

(cc)T dis (cc)LS horz vert

Enter: ^J080^T0250^LS0055,0002

^T0510^LS0055,0002

324

Chapter 4

Form Example

22. To generate the HandCraft Boats company address and phone number

data on the lower left of the form, justify the text 2 dots (jus) down using

the Justification (J) command, tab in 1.5 inches (dis) from the left margin

with the Horizontal Tab (T) command, select the 17.65 cpi font with the

Compressed Print (S) command, and supply the HANDCRAFT BOATS

company name as the data.

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis (cc)S f data

Enter: ^J002^T0150^S5HANDCRAFT BOATS

23. The street address line is justified 0.2 inches lower (jus) using a

Justification command (J), positioned 1.5 inches (dis) from the left margin

with a Horizontal Tab command (T), a 17.65 cpi compressed print

command (S5) is sent for each new line of data, and the data is supplied

as 123 BOAT WAY.

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis (cc)S f data

Enter: ^J020^T0150^S5123 BOAT WAY

24. Using the same type of Justification command (J) and Horizontal Tab (T)

command set, the BOAT TOWN, CA city data is justified 0.3 plus 6 dots

(jus) down and tabbed 1.5 inches (dis); the 333444 zip code data is

justified 0.5 plus 5 dots (jus) and tabbed 1.9 inches plus 5 dots (dis); the

(714) 555-0011 phone number data is justified 0.7 plus 3 dots and tabbed

1.5 inches (dis). A new 17.65 cpi compressed print command (S5) is

required immediately preceding each line of data.

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis (cc)S f data

Enter: ^J036^T0150^S5BOAT TOWN, CA

^J055^T0195^S5333444

^J073^T0150^S5(714)555-0011

Enter the Slogan

25. Add the slogan between the corners previously drawn. A Standard

Alphanumeric command (M) is used to specify a character 0.1 inch high

(ht), 0.1 inch wide (wd), and justified 0.4 inches (jus). The slogan is

tabbed 2.7 inches (dis) from the left margin, lowercase descending

characters are enabled by the Descending Characters (D) command, the

slogan Quality Boats Crafted By Hand is supplied as data.

Format: (cc)M ht wd jus

(cc)T dis (cc)D data

Enter: ^M01,01,040

^T0270^DQuality Boats Crafted By Hand

Planning the Form Layout

325

Enter the Barcode

26. Within the same alphanumeric command, the barcode can be generated.

Using the Character Height command (H), the character height is

changed to 0.3 inches (ht) and using the Justification command (J), the

position is moved down 0.5 inches (jus). The barcode is positioned 5.9

inches (dis) from the left margin by a Horizontal Tab (T) command. The

barcode itself is begun by the Horizontal Bar Code command (B), using

the standard 10 cpi readable data field (p), and barcode Code 39 Type A

(type) with the default ratio specified. The barcoded data is WC to

distinguish the HandCraft Boats company West Coast sales region and

the command sequence is terminated.

Format: (cc)H ht (cc)J jus (cc)T dis

(cc)B p type data (cc)G

Enter: ^H03^J050^T0590

^BYAWC^G

Disable VGL Graphics

27. To complete the form, enter an Interrupt command (I) moving the print

position back to the original position followed by a Graphics Mode

carriage return. Disable the Free Format command (O) and disable the

Graphics Mode of Operation (PN) also followed by a Graphics Mode

carriage return.

Format: (cc)I dis (cc)-

(cc)O(cc)-(cc)PN(cc)-

Enter: ^I000^-

^O^-^PN^-

The complete data for the form (the contents of the file for the form on the

host computer) appears below. The completed form is shown in Figure 41

on page 327.

^PY^-

^F^-

^M^KF

^J110^T0100

^LB0600,0740,3,3

^M^J120^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,

01,03,03,07,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,7E,7C,78,70^G^M^J130^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,01,01,03,03,07,07,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,7F,7F,

7F,7E,7C,78,70,60,40,40,00,00,00,00,01,01,03,03,03,07,07,07,0F,0F,0F,1F,1F,1E,

1E,1C^G

^M^J140^T0175^Q

01,01,03,03,07,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,7F,7F,7F,7F,3F,3F,00,00,00.40,60,70,78,7C,7E,

7F,7F,0F,0F,0F,1F,1F,3F,3F,3F,7E,7C,7C,7C,78,78,70,70,70,60,60,60,40,40^G

^M^J150^T0175^Q

7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,00,00,00,01,01,01,01,01,01,

01,41,61,71,79,7D,7F,7F,7F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,

1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,1F,0E^G

^M^J160^T0175^Q

7F,7F,7F,7F,5F,4F,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,07,07,07,07,47,47,47,47,47,47,47,

47,47,67,67,67,67,77,7F,3F,1F,1F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,0F,

326

Chapter 4

Form Example

0F,0F,0F,0F,07-G

^M^J170^T0175^Q

40,40,60,60,70,70,78,78,7C,7C,7E,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,7F,77,63,63,41,41,

40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,40,

40,40,40,40^G

^M^J180^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,40,40,60,60,70,70,78,78,7C,7C,7E,7E,7F,7F

,3F,3F,1F,0F,0F,07,03,01^G

^M^J190^T0175^Q

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,

40,60,60,70,70,78,78,78,78,38^G

^M03,02,129^T0310HandCraft Boats^G

^I220^-

^M01,01,000^KF

^T0150CUSTOMER:^T0150PHONE:

^J040

^T0150HULL NO:^T0490RIGGING:

^J080

^T0150COLOR:^T0440DELIVERY DATE:

^J140

^T0320SPECIAL ORDER ITEMS

^J180

^T0170ITEM^T0350DESCRIPTION^T0600PRICE

^I200

^M^T0150^KF

^LF0520,0290,2,2,0080,1,0360,1

^I040

^M^KF^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040

^M^KF^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040

^M^KF^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040

^M^KF^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040

^M^KF^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I040

^M^KF^T0150^LS0520,0001

^I080

^M^KF^T0250^LS0055,0002

^T0510^LS0055,0002

^T0250^LS0002,0080

^T0565^LS0002,0080

^J080^T0250^LS0055,0002

^T0510^LS0055,0002

^M^J002^T0150^S5HANDCRAFT BOATS

^J020^T0150^S5123 BOAT WAY

^J036^T0150^S5BOAT TOWN, CA

^J055^T0195^S5333444

^J073^T0150^S5 (714) 555-0011

^M01,01,040

^T0270^DQuality Boats Crafted by Hand

^H03^J050^T0590

^BYAWC^G

^I000^-

^O^-^PN^-

Planning the Form Layout

327

Figure 41. Completed Practice Form Example

formlogo.ex3

328

Chapter 4

Label Example

This practice exercise is designed to provide experience in creating and

processing a sample label. The label includes:

• horizontal duplication

• alphanumeric data

• horizontal and vertical lines

• dynamic data fields

• boxes

• barcodes

As in the form example, all data for the labels is entered into a file on the host

computer. Use your standard system commands to open the file and print the

file as needed. Also, the same Enter/Format explanations are provided in this

example. You enter the data listed under Enter; the general command format

is listed under Format. Always use the actual SFCC required by your system

wherever the ^ is shown in the examples or where the (cc) is shown in the

general format. Do not forget to properly terminate each command line. Make

sure the printer power is on and that the printer is ready and on line.

NOTE: Similar to the previous example exercise, your printed output may

vary in appearance or location based on your type of printer and

printer configuration; these samples have been positioned on the

page to correspond with the related text.

The labels for this exercise are shown in Figure 42, complete with all label

elements and data. One label is actually created by VGL commands and then

duplicated horizontally on the page. When the first set of dynamic data is

supplied, it is inserted in the label and in the duplicate. The second set of

dynamic data is inserted in a second label and duplicate. This process could

be continued to produce any number of labels.

Planning the Form Layout

329

Figure 42. Sample Labels

330

Chapter 4

Label Example

Enable VGL Graphics

1. Use the Graphics Mode Enable command (PY), to enable VGL for the

Graphics Mode.

Format: (cc)PY(cc)-

Enter: ^PY^-

2. To avoid accidentally terminating the graphics command sequence by a

host-generated terminator, enable the Free Format command (F). This

allows VGL to accept the data as one continuous stream even though the

data may contain host-generated paper motion commands. When Free

Format is enabled, VGL only recognizes the Free Format command

terminators: Carriage Return (^-), Form Feed (^,), Line Feed (^*), Vertical

Tab (^+), and EVFU commands.

Format: (cc)F(cc)-

Enter: ^F^-

Enable Dynamic Form Processing

Dynamic form processing allows specific data fields within the form/label

to be identified. After all form or label components have been created,

different sets of data can be supplied to the fields as copies of the label

are produced.

3. To enable dynamic form processing, the Dynamic Form command (B) is

used followed by a Graphics Mode carriage return. It is part of the

standard graphics command set, and must be sent to VGL without being

introduced by an alphanumeric command. Once dynamic form

processing is enabled, VGL continues in the Dynamic Form Mode until

properly completed.

Format: (cc)B(cc)-

Enter: ^B^-

Enable Horizontal Duplication

One label is created and duplicated on the page horizontally. This

produces a duplicate copy of the label when the dynamic data is supplied.

All commands required to create the label must fall between Horizontal

Duplication on and off commands.

4. Begin with the Horizontal Duplication (S) command to turn horizontal

duplication on. Specify 2 copies (#) spaced 4.0 inches apart (gap). Send a

Graphics Mode carriage return after the Horizontal Duplication command.

Format: (cc)S # gap (cc)-

Enter: ^S0240^-

Planning the Form Layout

331

Create the Label Box

5. Use the extended graphics command set to create the label components.

The Standard Alphanumeric command (M) is used to introduce the

extended graphics command set. Use the Box command (LB) to create

the box for the outer border of the label. The box is 2.6 inches plus 4 dots

horizontally (horz) and 4.7 inches vertically (vert). Both the horizontal (h)

and vertical (v) borders of the box have a line thickness of 2 dots.

Format: (cc)M(cc)LB horz vert h v

Enter: ^M^LB0264,0470,2,2

Create the Corners

Two sets of corners are used in the label, one corner set around the

"From" data and the other set around the "To" data.

6. To create these corners, one vertical and horizontal line are justified and

tabbed into proper position for each corner piece, eight lines total (four

corner pieces) per corner set. All the commands required for the corner

sets are part of the alphanumeric command sequence initiated in the

previous step. A Justification command (J), Horizontal Tab command (T),

and a Solid Line command (LS) are used for each line.

Format: cc)J jus (cc)T dis (cc)LS horz vert

Enter: ^J010^T0020^LS0020,0002

^J010^T0220^LS0020,0002

^J010^T0020^LS0002,0020

^J010^T0240^LS0002,0020

^J080^T0020^LS0002,0020

^J080^T0240^LS0002,0020

^J100^T0020^LS0020,0002

^J100^T0220^LS0020,0002

^J110^T0020^LS0020,0002

^J110^T0220^LS0020,0002

^J110^T0020^LS0002,0020

^J110^T0240^LS0002,0020

^J160^T0020^LS0002,0020

^J160^T0240^LS0002,0020

^J180^T0020^LS0020,0002

^J180^T0220^LS0020,0002

332

Chapter 4

Label Example

Add TO/FROM Alphanumeric Data

7. To add the "From" data, use a series of Standard Alphanumeric

commands (M) to specify 0.1 inch high (ht) by 0.1 inch wide (wd)

characters justified 0.2 inches (jus) down for the FROM heading.

Use a Horizontal Tab (T) to position the heading 0.4 inches (dis) from the

margin. In a similar command sequence, specify 0.2 inch high and 0.2

inch wide characters justified 0.4 inches down for the Printronix heading,

also tabbed 0.4 inches from the margin.

Justify the street address data 0.6 inches plus 5 dots (jus) down using a

Justification command (J) and tab the address data 0.8 inches (dis) from

the margin using a Horizontal Tab command (T). In a similar Justification

and Horizontal Tab sequence, justify the city and state data 0.8 inches

down and tabbed 0.9 inches from the margin.

For the address data, select the 17.65 cpi compressed print font (f) using

the Compressed Print command (S) in a new Standard Alphanumeric

command (M) sequence. (A compressed print command must

immediately precede the compressed print data for each line where it is

used.)

Format: cc)M ht wd jus (cc)T dis data

(cc)M(cc)J jus (cc)T dis (cc)S f data

Enter: ^M01,01,020^T0040FROM

^M02,02,040^T0040ACME MOTOR

^M^J065^T0080^S512345 CUL DE SAC RD.

^J080^T0090^SUSCITY, CA 99999

8. The "To" data includes dynamic data fields for the name, street address,

and city data lines of the different companies.

Begin with a Standard Alphanumeric command (M) to specify the TO

heading as 0.1 inch high (ht) by 0.1 inch wide (wd) characters, justified

0.2 inches down (jus) and tabbed 0.4 inches (dis) from the left margin

using the Horizontal Tab command (T). Using a Justification (J) and

Horizontal Tab (T) command sequence, position the company name data

line 1.3 inches plus 4 dots (jus) down and 0.4 inches (dis) from the left

margin.

Use a Dynamic Form Field Length command ([) to specify the maximum

length (length) of the dynamic data field as 24 characters. Similarly, justify

the street address line 1.5 inches down, tabbed 0.4 inches from the left

margin, and 24 characters maximum length.

Justify the city and state data line 1.6 inches plus 5 dots down, tabbed 0.4

inches from the left margin, and 24 characters maximum length.

Format: cc)M ht wd jus (cc) T dis data

(cc)J jus (cc) T dis (cc) [ length (cc)G

Enter: ^M01,01,120^T0040TO

^J134^T0040^[024^G

^J150^T0040^[024^G

^J165^T0040^[024^G

Planning the Form Layout

333

Add Horizontal Lines

9. The three horizontal lines to separate the three barcode fields can be

added to the form using Justification (J), Horizontal Tab (T) and Solid Line

(LS) commands. All three lines are 2.6 inches plus 4 dots horizontally

(horz) and 1 dot vertically (vert), used as the line thickness, and all three

lines are tabbed 0.0 inches (dis) from the left margin (touching the left

edge of the label). Justify the first line 1.9 inches down (jus), the second

line 2.8 inches down, and the third line 3.7 inches down.

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis (cc)LS horz vert

Enter: ^J190^T0000^LS0264,0001

^J280^T0000^LS0264,0001

^J370^T0000^LS0264,0001

Add Headings

10. The Sales Order (S.O.), Serial Number (S/N), and the Part Number (P/N)

headings can be added using a series of Justification (J) and Horizontal

Tab (T) commands. Each of the headings are tabbed 0.4 inches (dis)

from the left margin. Justify the S.O. heading 2.0 inches (jus) down, the

S/N heading 2.9 inches down, and the P/N heading 3.8 inches down.

Format: (cc)J jus (cc)T dis data

Enter: ^J200^T0040S.O.

^J290^T0040S/N

^J380^T0040P/N

Add Barcodes and Dynamic Bar Code Data

11. The three barcodes and dynamic barcode data fields can now be input. A

Standard Alphanumeric command (M) is used to specify each barcode

height at 0.6 inches (ht) and width (wd) at 0.1 inch. (The actual width of

the barcode is determined by the type of barcode, the data, and the ratio.)

The S.O. barcode is justified 2.1 inches plus 3 dots (jus) down, the S/N

barcode 3.0 inches plus 3 dots down, and the P/N barcode 3.9 inches

plus 3 dots down. Each barcode is tabbed 0.4 inches (dis) from the left

margin using a Horizontal Tab command (T). The horizontal Bar Code

command (B) with fixed ratio is used, the printable data field is selected

(p) to produce human readable data using OCR-B characters with the

barcode, and barcode type (type) Code 39 is selected for use.

The Dynamic Form Field Length command ([) specifies a maximum of 6

data characters for each barcode.

Format: (cc)M ht wd jus T dis data

(cc)B p type (cc)[ length (cc)G

Enter: ^M06,01,213^T0040

^BOA^[006^G

^M06,01,303^T0040

^BOA^[006^G

^M06,01,393^T0040

^BOA^[006^G

334

Chapter 4

Label Example

12. To complete processing, send an Interrupt command (I) moving the print

position to 5.5 inches (dis) lower followed by a Graphics Mode carriage

return (-), end the Horizontal Duplication command (S), and end the

Dynamic Form command (]).

Format: (cc) I (cc)-

(cc) S (cc)-

(cc) ]

Enter: ^I550^-

^S^-

Add Dynamic Data

13. The lines of dynamic data can now be sent.

The first line of data sent is inserted in the first dynamic field previously

identified by the Dynamic Form Field Length command. In this case, the

first dynamic field identified was the company name data line (page 332).

Subsequent dynamic fields identified were the company street address,

city, S.O., S/N, and P/N data; the corresponding data should be sent line

by line in the proper order to fill the fields.

Sending a second set of the data generates a second form (with

duplication) inserting the data in the fields in the order provided. If any

particular data field contains less than the amount specified in the

Dynamic Form Field Length command, a Graphics Mode carriage return

(-) must also be sent as the last character in the data line. Any data

exceeding the maximum amount specified begins to fill subsequent fields.

Following the end of all data, a universal terminator (G) must be sent. The

two sets of data for the labels are entered as follows.

Enter: B AND D CO.^-

P.O. BOX 212^-

LOS ANGELES CA 90051^-

SO5995

011233

190204

PC CITY^-

125 BRADY^-

NEW YORK, NY 00222^-

SO5996

000535

104523^G

Planning the Form Layout

335

Disable Graphics Mode

14. Complete processing by sending a Graphics Mode form feed (,), disabling

the Free Format command (O), and disabling the Graphics Mode (PN).

Enter: ^,^O^-^PN^-

The complete program to generate the labels shown in Figure 42 on page

329 is listed below. Use your system standard commands to print the file

containing the program. If errors occur, check your input and refer to

Chapter 6.

^PY^-

^F^-

^B^-

^S0240^-

^M^LB0264,0470,2,2

^J010^T0020^LS0020,0002

^J010^T0220^LS0020,0002

^J010^T0020^LS0002,0020

^J010^T0240^LS0002,0020

^J080^T0020^LS0002,0020

^J080^T0240^LS0002,0020

^J100^T0020^LS0020,0002

^J100^T0220^LS0020,0002

^J110^T0020^LS0020,0002

^J110^T0220^LS0020,0002

^J110^T0020^LS0002,0020

^J110^T0240^LS0002,0020

^J160^T0020^LS0002,0020

^J160^T0240^LS0002,0020

^J180^T0020^LS0020,0002

^J180^T0220^LS0020,0002

^M01,01,020^T0040FROM

^M02,02,040^T0040ACME MOTOR

^M^J065^T0080^S512345 CUL DE SAC RD.

^J080^T0090^S5USCITY, CA 99999

^M01,01,120^T0040TO

^J134^T0040^[024^G

^J150^T0040^[024^G

^J165^T0040^[024^G

^J190^T0000^LS0264,0001

^J280^T0000^LS0264,0001

^J370^T0000^LS0264,0001

^J200^T0040S.O.

^J290^T0040S/N

^J380^T0040P/N

^M06,01,213^T0040

^BOA^[006^G

^M06,01,303^T0040

^BOA^[006^G

^M06,01,393^T0040

^BOA^[006^G

^I550^-

^S^-

336

Chapter 4

Solving Program Errors

B AND D CO.^-

P.O. BOX 212^-

LOS ANGELES CA 90051^-

SO5995

011233

190204

PC CITY^-

125 BRADY^-

NEW YORK, NY 00222^-

SO5996

000535

104523^G

^,^O^-^PN^-

Solving Program Errors

If you make an error in your form program, a coded error message and the

program line containing the error prints when you print the form. As soon as

VGL discovers and identifies the error, the form is printed up to the point of

error, further text processing stops, and all remaining data up to the next

command sequence terminator is ignored.

From the description of the error message and the line identified by the error

message, you can easily locate and correct program errors. Coded error

messages are defined in detail in Chapter 6.

337

Multinational And

International Character

Sets

Multinational Character Sets

The Multinational Character Set accesses one of 32 international character

sets. Each character set is 96 characters long and can be accessed by

configuration selection or VGL command. Individual characters in the font can

be accessed with the use of data bit 8.

The Multinational Character Set provides VGL with space for 32 character

sets, 96 characters each. The character sets and their corresponding set

values are listed in Table 70.

Sets 0 through 11 are resident character sets. Sets 12 through 23 are

reserved spaces in font memory for future resident character sets. If a value

from 12 through 23 is called when attempting to choose a character set, the

character font defaults to ASCII. The last eight addressable character set

values, 24 through 31, are reserved for user-defined sets. You can create

custom character sets from existing characters in font memory. If you select a

set value from 24 through 31 when no new character set has been created or

assigned that value, the character font defaults to ASCII.

Table 70. Multinational Character Sets and Set Values

Character Set Value Character Set Value

U. S. ASCII 0Spanish 9

German 1Italian 10

Swedish 2Turkish 11

Danish 3CP 437 12

Norwegian 4CP 850 13

Finnish 5Reserved 14-15

English 6Dwn Overlay 16-23

Dutch 7User-Defined-Sets 24-31

French 8

338

Chapter 5

Multinational Character Sets

See page 349 for printouts of the primary and extended character sets and

their corresponding values.

To select one of the Multinational Character Sets, use the character set

selection command described on page 345.

Character Addresses

Both the ASCII and multinational character sets have hex values for each

character and symbol. The primary character set (ASCII characters) resides

at hex addresses ranging from 00 through 7F. The extended character set,

which contains the multinational characters, resides at hex addresses ranging

from 80 through FF. Table 72 shows each multinational character substitution

hex value and the applicable ASCII hex values. To access the extended

character set, VGL must be configured with the data bit 8 option enabled.

Making Character Substitutions

Multinational character sets are created by substituting the multinational

character values for the standard ASCII values. Each of the 12 multinational

character sets allows up to 16 character substitutions (located at hex 21, 22,

23, 24, 25, 26, 40, 5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 60, 7B, 7C, 7D, and 7E). The most

common character substitutions specific to a particular country are provided

in each set and shown in Table 72.

For example, when the Danish character set (page 350) is selected, calling

character address cell 5B substitutes the Danish character residing at C6 (Æ)

from the Multinational Character Set (page 349); when the Spanish character

set (page 351) is selected, calling character address cell 7C substitutes the

Spanish character residing at F1 (ñ) from the Multinational Character

Set.These substitutions are automatically performed when a particular

Multinational Character Set is selected.

Making Character Substitutions

339

Table 71. Multinational Character Sets and Set Values, Line Matrix Printers

0XX

Standard 1XX

Arabic 2XX

Cyrillic 3XX

European 4XX

Greek 5XX

Hebrew 6XX

Turkish 7XX

Misc.

00 US ASCII ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2

8859-2

DEC 256

Greek

Hebrew

Old

Data Gen.

Turk

Block-Set

10cpi

01 German ASMO

449+

Cyrillic CP

437

Latin 2 852 ELOT 928

Greek

Hebrew

New

DEC

Turkish

Italics Set

02 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew

DEC

IBM

Turkish

Scanblock

10cpi

03 Danish ASMO

708+

Cyrillic

8859-5

Kamenicky ABY

Greek

Latin-1

Hebrew

Siemens

Turkish

PGL Thai

Sets

04 Norwegian MS DOS

CP710

ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG

Greek

Win. CP

1255

PTT

Turkish

05 Finnish MS DOS

CP720

Code

Page 855

PC-437

Slavic

ELOT 927

Greek

IBC

Turkish

06 English Sakr

CP714

7-bit

Cyrillic

Slavic

1250

Greek 851 Bull

Turkish

07 Dutch Aptec

CP715

Ukrainian Code Page

865

Greek 437 AS400

Turkish

08 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page

860

Greek

8859-7

Unisys

Turkish

09 Spanish Arabic

CP 864

Win. CP

1251

Latin 1

8859-1

Win. CP

1253

NCR

Turkish

10 Italian Arabic

CP 1046

Latin 5

8859-9

Greek 813

Euro

PST

Turkish

11 Turkish Arabic

Lam 1

Latin 9

8859-15

Greek 869

Euro

Unis-1

Turkish

12 CP 437 Arabic

Lam 2

Polish

POL1

Code

Page 853

13 CP 850 Win. CP

1256

Win. CP

1250

Info

Turkish

14 Farsi 1 Win. CP

1252

Win. CP

1254

15 Farsi 2 Win. CP

1257

Code

Page 857

16 1098 Farsi

1285

CP 858

Euro

17 Lith. CP

773

340

Chapter 5

Multinational Character Sets

18 Serbo

Croatic 1

19 Serbo

Croatic 2

20 CP 774

21 CP 775

22 ISO 8859-4

23 Reserved

24-31 User

Defined

Sets

Table 71. Multinational Character Sets and Set Values, Line Matrix Printers (continued)

0XX

Standard 1XX

Arabic 2XX

Cyrillic 3XX

European 4XX

Greek 5XX

Hebrew 6XX

Turkish 7XX

Misc.

Table 72. Substitution Set Hex Values

Character

Set Substitution Hex Value

U.S. ASCII 21 22 23 24 25 26 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

Danish C6 D8 C5 B0 E6 F8 E5

Dutch A3 80 81

English A3

Finnish A4 C4 D6 C5 E4 F6 E5 FC

French E0 FB E7 A7 F4 EA E9 F9 E8 EE

German A7 C4 D6 DC E4 F6 FC DF

Italian A7 B0 E9 83 F9 E0 F2 E8 EC

Norwegian A4 C9 C6 D8 C5 DC E9 E6 F8 E5 FC

Spanish 82 C3 D1 D5 A1 E3 F1 F5 BF

Swedish A4 C9 C4 D6 C5 DC E9 E4 F6 E5 FC

Turkish 84 C7 E7 85 86 D6 DC 87 88 89 F6 FC 8A

Data Bit 8

341

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

Data Bit 8

You can access individual characters using data bit 8 addressing. The

primary character set is ASCII. These character values reside at hex

addresses 20 through 7F. The Multinational or extended character sets reside

at hex addresses 80 through FF and are accessible without reconfiguration.

NOTE: Data bit 8 must be set high so that Multinational or extended

character sets are accessible without reconfiguration.

Power-Up Character Set Selection

You can select any one of the twelve resident multinational character sets

shown in Table 70 (0 through 11) or any of the International Sets shown in

Table 75 as the default character set at printer power-up. VGL configuration

settings determine which character set is the default character set at power-

up. Refer to your user's manual to configure VGL for a specific character set.

(See Select Font in the configuration menu.)

OCR and user-definable character sets cannot be configured as the default

character set at printer power-up.

NOTE: Each Multinational Character Set, including the power-up default,

must be accessed through the Graphics Mode.

Building a Character Translation Table

The character set for resident fonts on the Graphics Controller contains

special characters in hex values. These characters are not directly accessible

from the keyboard. As an example, the tilde (~) may not have a corresponding

key on the keyboard. There are three choices available if characters such as

this are required on a regular basis.

•

Select an ISO character set that contains the character as one of the

substitutions. See “Selecting an ISO Character Set” on page 348.

•

Use the ^IHEX command to transmit the character hex value to the

printer.

•

Build a character translation table.

A character translation table reassigns keys to the hex value of special

characters you want to print. Use the ^ITRANS command to build a character

translation table.

Mode Standard Graphics or Graphics with an Extended Graphics

Command selected

Format (cc) ITRANS,D,xxvv,xxvv,xxvv,xxvv, ... ,xxvv (cc) G (cc) -

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Character

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

342

Chapter 5

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

ITRANS,D The Build Character Translation Table command;

enter ITRANS,D (the comma is required).

xx The input hex value from the host.

vv The hex value that will replace the input hex value

before the data is sent to the printer.

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command to end the input of vertical line and

form data.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your IGP configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

Resetting the Character Set

Purpose Reset the character set. This will also clear the translation table

Mode Graphics

Format (cc) ITRANS,R,nn (cc) G (cc) -

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Character

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

ITRANS,D The Character Set Reset command; enter

ITRANS,R (the comma is required).

nn The identification of the new character set

(cc)G Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL

configuration immediately followed by G, the

universal terminator, or another valid Graphics

Mode command to end the input of vertical line and

form data.

(cc)- Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.

Enter the SFCC for your IGP configuration

immediately followed by - to end the command

sequence.

If the character set identified by nn is not the current character set, the

translation table is reset and the selected nn character set becomes the

current character set.

nn Character Set

00 USA

01 UK

02 Sweden/Finland

03 Norway/Denmark

04 Japan

05 Germany

06 France

07 Italy

User-Defined Set Command

343

08 Spain

09 PC Subset

10 VGL Version 1

User-Defined Set Command

Purpose Creates custom character sets (except OCR fonts) from existing

characters stored on the flash memory.

Mode Graphics

Format (cc) u n ca fa (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code

(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL

configuration.

u The User Set command; enter u.

nSelects the User Character Set number; enter a

value ranging from 1 through 8. Values outside this

range produce an error message and the entire

command sequence is ignored.

ca Represents the ASCII character address cell which

has its contents replaced with the character located

in the font address (fa). The ca value must be one

of the 16 hex values specified in Table 72. If the ca

value is not one of these ASCII characters, an error

message is displayed, the command sequence is

ignored, and only previous valid substitutions are

made.

fa Represents the hexadecimal value for the font

address of a specified character in the multinational

character set which replaces the current contents

of ca. The fa value is the character substitution for

the cell address (ca). The value of fa may range

from hex 20 through FF. If the fa value is outside

this range, an error message is displayed and no

substitutions occur.

(cc)- The command terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by -

(Graphics Mode CR) or other valid terminator. The

terminator must be entered to stop this function.

Comment The User Set command is a stand-alone command that must

appear in the first column of a line. You can define up to 16

character substitutions for each of the eight custom character

sets, but they need not be addressed all at one time with one

User Set command. Therefore, the maximum number of times

ca,fa can be called within each User Set command is 16.

344

Chapter 5

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

The character sets in the User Set command are numbered 1

through 8. The character set values in the Character Set

Selection command are numbered 24 through 31 and correspond

to the User Sets 1 through 8. The Character Set Selection

command, discussed on page 345, accesses a character set and

activates it for printing.

The User Set command (cc)un and the Character Set Selection

command (cc)in are related as shown below. Therefore, i24

selects the substitution set defined as u1, i29 selects u6, etc.

Example The following example defines User Set 1 to contain the

Multinational font addresses B1, A1, and BF at the hex character

addresses 23, 24, and 25, respectively.

For example, suppose ca = 23 and fa = B1; therefore, each time

character address 23 is called, it is substituted with the character

located at font address B1. Further, when ca = 24 and fa = A1,

each time character address 24 is called, it is substituted with the

character located at font address A1. And, when ca = 25 and fa =

BF, each time character address 25 is called, it is substituted with

the character located at font address BF.

NOTE: The command sequence contains no spaces.

^u1,23B1,24A1,25BF^-

User Set 1 now contains the plus or minus sign (hex B1) in place

of the number sign (hex 23), the upside down exclamation point

(hex A1) in place of the dollar sign (hex 24), and the upside down

question mark (hex BF) in place of the percent sign (hex 25).

User Set (un)corresponds

to Character Set (in)

n = 1 n = 24

n = 2 n = 25

n = 3 n = 26

n = 4 n = 27

n = 5 n = 28

n = 6 n = 29

n = 7 n = 30

n = 8 n = 31

Character Set Selection Command

345

Character Set Selection Command

Purpose Accesses one of the multinational (Table 70) or international

(Table 75) character sets. Use this command to access a

different character set from the configured power-up default

character set.

Mode Graphics

Format As a stand-alone command: (cc) i n (cc)-

Within a graphics command: (cc) i n M ht wd jus data (cc)-

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code.

i The Character Set Selection command; enter i.

nThe character substitution set number; enter a

value from the multinational (Table 70) or

international (Table 75) character set tables.

Character sets 0 through 23 represent resident

character sets. Values from 24 through 31

correspond to the customized user-defined

character sets 1 through 8, respectively. Character

sets 32 and above represent the International

Character sets listed in Table 75.

M ht wd jus data

See Chapter 2 for a description of these

alphanumeric command parameters.

(cc)- The command terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by -

(Graphics Mode CR) or other valid terminator. The

terminator must be entered to stop this function.

Comment The stand-alone command must appear in the first column of a

line.

Example The following example shows the Character Set Selection

command as a stand-alone command which activates the

German character set: ^i1^-

Issue the Character Set Selection command as many times as

required for a form. The character set selected remains active

until a new set is selected.

The (cc) i n (cc)- command is inactive in the Normal Mode.

However, plotted text data prints (in a compressed print mode) in

the character set selected.

346

Chapter 5

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

Table 73. Alternate Character Sets

Character Set Name IF

(Intelligent) TT

(TrueType)

Windows Symbol AS

ATMType1 AT

ITC Zapf Dingbats/100 D1

ITC Zapf Dingbats/200 D2

ITC Zapf Dingbats/300 D3

ISO 60: Danish/Norweigan DN DN

PS ITC Zapf Dingbats DS

DeskTop DT DT

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 (EC94) E1 E1

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 E2 E2

ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 E5 E5

ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 E6 E6

ISO 69: French FR FR

ISO 21: German GR GR

ISO 15: Italian IT IT

Wingdings L$ WD

Legal LG LG

Math–8 M8 M8

Macintosh MC MC

PS Math MS MS

Microsoft Publishing PB PB

PC–8, Code Page 437 PC PC

PC–8 D/N, Code Page 437N PD PD

PC–852 Latin 2 PE PE

Pi Font PI PI

PC–850 Multilingual PM PM

PC–8 TK, Code Page 437T PT PT

PC–775 Baltic PV PV

Character Set Selection Command

347

Non-UGL, Generic Pi Font PY

Roman–8 R8 R8

ISO 17: Spanish SP SP

ISO 11: Swedish SW SW

Symbol SY

PS Text TS TS

ISO 4: United Kingdom UK UK

ISO 6: ASCII US US

Ventura International VI VI

Ventura Math VM VM

Ventura US VU VU

Ventura 3.1 Latin 1 W1 W1

AgfaTidbits WD

Windows 3.1 Latin 2 WE WE

Windows 3.0 Latin 1 WO WO

Windows 3.1 Latin 5 WT WT

Table 73. Alternate Character Sets

Character Set Name IF

(Intelligent) TT

(TrueType)

348

Chapter 5

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

Selecting an ISO Character Set

Purpose Accesses one of nine ISO character sets.

Mode Standard Graphics or Graphics with an Extended Graphics

Command selected

Format (cc) IISO, n (cc)G

(cc) Represents the Special Function Control Code.

IISO, The ISO Character Set Selection command; enter

IISO, (the comma is required).

nThe character substitution set number; enter a

value ranging from 0 through 8 according to the

desired character set shown in Table 74. If n is not

a value from 0 through 8, an error message is

displayed and the command is ignored.

Table 74. IISO, Character Sets

(cc)G The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your

VGL configuration immediately followed by G to

terminate the IISO, command.

Comments

When the IISO, command is used in a Standard Graphics

command, the printer font set is changed to the new ISO

character set. When the IISO, command is used with an

Extended Graphics command selected, only the Extended

character set is changed to the new ISO character set.

n ISO Character Set

Hex Value:

23 24 40 5B 5C 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

USA

Swedish/Finnish

Norwegian/Danish

Japanese

German

French

Italian

Spanish

[

]

{

}

Multinational Character Set Charts

349

Multinational Character Set Charts

IGP/VGL MULTINATIONAL Set

ASCII Set GERMAN Set

VGL MULTINATIONAL Set

350

Chapter 5

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

SWEDISH Set DANISH Set

NORWEGIAN Set FINNISH Set

Multinational Character Set Charts

351

ENGLISH Set DUTCH Set

FRENCH Set SPANISH Set

352

Chapter 5

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

ITALIAN Set TURKISH Set

OCR-A Set OCR-B Set

Multinational Character Set Charts

353

International Character Sets

The International Character Sets supported are listed in Table 75. Select

these sets from the configuration menu “Select Font” option, or through the

character set selection command described on page 345.

See Table 70 for a list of the Multinational Character Sets and their

corresponding set values.

Table 75. International Character Sets and Symbol Set Selection Values

Character Set Set Value Character Set Set Value

Arabic 32

Greek 33

Hebrew 34

Portuguese 35

Spanish 36

Latin 1 37

Slavic 852 (Latin 2) 38

Farsi 39

Turkish 40

OCR-A 41

OCR-B 42

Greek Sets

DEC 256 Greek 400

ELOT 928 Greek 401

Greek 3 402

ABY Greek 403

ABG Greek 404

ELOT 927 Greek 405

Greek 851 406

Greek 437 407

Greek 8859-7 408

Win CP 1253 409

Arabic Sets

ASMO 449 100

ASMO 449+ 101

ASMO 708 102

ASMO 708 103

MS DOS CP 710 104

MS DOS CP 720 105

Sakr CP 714 106

Aptec CP 715 107

CP 786 108

Arabic CP 864 109

Arabic CP 1046 110

Arabic Lam 1 111

Arabic Lam 2 112

Win CP 1256 113

Turkish Sets

Data General Turkish 600

DEC Turkish 601

IBM Turkish 602

Siemens Turkish 603

PTT Turkish 604

IBC Turkish 605

Bull Turkish 606

AS400 Turkish 607

Unisys Turkish 608

NCR Turkish 609

PST Turkish 610

Unis-1 Turkish 611

Code Page 853 612

INFO Turkish 613

Win CP 1254 614

Code Page 857 615

354

Chapter 5

International Character Sets

Character Set Set Value Character Set Set Value

Cyrillic Sets

Code Page 866 200

Cyrillic CP 437 201

Cyrillic 113 202

Cyrillic 8859-5 203

ISO 915 204

Code Page 855 205

7-bit Cyrillic 206

Ukranian 207

Bulgarian 208

Win CP 1251 209

Hebrew Sets

Hebrew Old 500

Hebrew New 501

Hebrew DEC 502

Latin-1 Hebrew 503

Win CP 1255 504

European Sets

Latin 2 8859-2 300

Latin 2 852 301

Mazovia 302

Kamenicky 303

Roman 8 304

PC-437 Slavic 305

Slavic 1250 306

Code Page 865 307

Code Page 860 308

Latin 1 8859-1 309

Latin 5 8859-9 310

Latin 9 8859-15 311

Polish Pol 1 312

Win CP 1250 313

Win CP 1252 314

Win CP 1257 315

Table 75. International Character Sets and Symbol Set Selection Values

355

Error Codes

The Purpose of Error Codes

VGL provides coded error messages to help debug programs. When VGL

detects an error, it stops text processing and prints out an error message. The

error message includes the appropriate error code, a brief description of the

error, and the erroneous data. All data up to the next command sequence

terminator is ignored, and the form (if any) is printed up to the point of the

error.

By VGL configuration, you can disable the printing of all error messages, you

can disable printing of off-page errors, or you can enable printing of error

location markers. Refer to your User's Manual for more information.

Starting below, each error code is listed in numerical order and described in

more detail.

Error Codes

01 Alpha Command Error

One of the alphanumeric commands has a non-numeric height or

width parameter.

02 Alpha Length Error

Alpha data has exceeded the length of the internal alpha text

buffer. The terminator of the data was not found.

03 Not defined.

04 Box Command Error

A Box command (LB) has non-numeric parameter(s).

05 Buffer Overflow Error

The internal sequence buffer has overflowed. No sequence

terminator found.

06 Compressed Print Error

A Compressed Print command (#x) has a non-numeric value for

the selected compressed print font, or the line terminator is

missing.

07 Special Font Error

A High Density Look-Up Font (S) command has an invalid value

for the font selected. Valid values for f are 1 through 9, inclusive.

08 Not defined.

356

Chapter 6

Error Codes

09 Form Memory Error

The form is too big and ran out of form memory during alpha or

vector buffer storage.

10 Character Height Command Error

A Character Height command (H) has a non-numeric character

for the height parameter.

11 Hex Data Error

An invalid character was found while expecting a hexadecimal

value. Only numeric characters or A, B, C, D, E, or F are allowed.

12 Vertical Justification Change Error

A Vertical Justification (J) command has a non-numeric character

for the justification parameter.

13 Form Command Error

A forms construction command (LF) has a non-numeric

parameter.

14 Undefined Line Command Error

The Line command (L) was not followed by B, D, F, or S.

15 Logo Command Error

A user-defined logo using the Z command contains an invalid

parameter value; valid values are 1 through 9 or A through F.

16 Plot Command Error

A Plot command (Q or C) contains invalid hexadecimal data

characters. Only numeric characters or A, B, C, D, E, or F are

allowed.

17 Not defined.

18 Vertical Duplication (Repeated Form) Terminator Missing

Error

A Vertical Duplication commands (R) does not have a line

terminator.

19 Horizontal Duplication Command Error

A Horizontal Duplication command (S) contains a non-numeric

character or gap space parameter or is not followed by a line

terminator.

20 Horizontal Tab Command Error

A Horizontal Tab command (T) contains a non-numeric distance

parameter.

21 Special Function Control Code Change Command Error

A Special Function Control Code (SFCC) change command (N)

contains an illegal value for x or is not followed by a line

terminator. x can be any character from hex 11 through hex FF

(decimal 17 through 255).

357

22 Undefined Command Error

An SFCC is not followed by a known command character.

In Non-Graphics Mode, the following characters are allowed: #,

B,C, D, E, H, I, K, L, M, N, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, or @.

Within a repeated form, the following characters are allowed: #,

D, E, H, I, K, L, M, N, Q, R, S, T, U, W, Z, or -.

In Graphics Mode, the following characters are allowed: B, C, D,

E, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, Z, or -.

23 Character Width Command Error

A Character Width command (W) contains a non-numeric width

parameter.

24 Serial Overflow Error

The serial input buffer is full. The host probably did not honor

VGL flow control to stop sending characters.

25 Line Parameter Error

A Line command (LS or LD) contains a non-numeric horizontal or

vertical length parameter.

26 Undefined Shading, Mask, or Dark Command Error

A shading (K) command (shading, shading mask, or dark print) is

followed by an unknown character. It must be followed by an H

for standard shading, an L for shading mask, or an F for dark

printing.

27 Shading Mask Factor Error

A Shading Mask command (KL) does not include a valid

hexadecimal mask parameter. Only numeric characters or A, B,

C, D, E, or F are allowed.

28 Vertical Duplication (Repeated Form) Parameter Error

A Vertical Duplication command (R) contains a non-numeric

repeat parameter or is not followed by a line terminator.

29 Inner Vertical Duplication (Repeated Form) Error

An inner (nested) Vertical Duplication command (R) contains a

non-numeric repeat parameter, is not followed by a line

terminator, or an inner loop already exists. Only one inner repeat

loop is allowed within a repeated form.

30 Plot Length Error

A Plot command (Q or C) exceeded the internal plot buffer size.

No terminator was found.

31 Auto Increment/Decrement Command Error

An Auto Increment/Decrement command (Y) has one of the

following faults:

• An invalid value was provided for the +/- parameter. Only + or

- is allowed.

• The increment/decrement amount is zero.

• The command is not followed by (cc)G.

• The increment/decrement has more characters than the

operand.

358

Chapter 6

Error Codes

32 Dot Slew Command Error

A Dot Slew command (D) contains a non-numeric dots

parameter.

33 Line Slew Command Error

A Line Slew command (K or W) contains a non-numeric lines

parameter.

34 Forms Length PI Error

A Forms Length command (L) must use the PI line, but VGL is

configured with PI disabled. Use the H Forms Length command.

35 Forms Length No PI Error

A Form Length command (H) cannot use the PI line, but VGL is

configured with PI enabled. Use the L Forms Length command.

36 Dynamic Form Copy Command Error

A Dynamic Form Copy command (C) contains a non-numeric

parameter.

37 Dynamic Form Field Length Command Error

A Dynamic Form Field Length command ([ length or { length)

contains a non-numeric length parameter.

38 Dynamic Form Nested Copy Error

A Dynamic Form Copy command (C) was encountered while

already within a copy loop. Copy commands cannot be nested.

39 Dynamic Data Repeat Count Error

A repeated dynamic form data element does not have a valid

repeat count. The repeat count must be four numeric characters.

40 Incomplete BarCode Error

An unexpected end of a barcode command was detected. No

barcode type was found, or not enough variable ratio characters

were given.

41 Undefined BarCode Type Error

An undefined barcode type was given.

43 BarCode Data Length Error

The length of the barcode data is too long or too short for the

barcode type selected.

44 Illegal BarCode Data Error

The barcode data contains a character which is not allowed by

this barcode type.

45 BarCode Off Page Error

The barcode does not fit on the page at the starting column.

47 LPI Parameter Error

The new lpi parameter in the Line Spacing command (@L)

contains a non-numeric or 0 value.

48 Element Off Page Error

The form element cannot fit on the page at the starting position.

49 Not defined.

359

50 User-Defined Logo Input Error

The input parameter is not within the specified range. You must

provide either a number ranging from 0 through 9, or a character

from A through F.

51 Not defined.

52 Character Set Command Error

The character set value specified at the Character Set Selection

command (i) was not within the range of 00 through 31.

53 User-Defined Character Set Command Error

The User-Defined Character Set command (u) contains a

parameter error. This is possibly caused by an incorrect value for

n, which must be a number from 1 through 8, or the values for ca

or fa were not within the specified ranges. The value for ca must

be one of the following 16 hex values: 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 40,

5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 60, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7E; the value for fa must be from

hex 20 through FF.

54-55 Not defined.

56 Logo Generation Command Error

The parameters for the ILOGO command are incorrect. Logo

values of 41-49, 4A, 4B, 4C, 61 and 62 are allowed.

57 Pixel Expansion Command Error

The parameters for the IPEXP Pixel Expansion Command are

incorrect. Expansion values of 1 through 255 are allowed.

Horizontal and vertical expansion values must be separated by a

comma.

58 Default Font Command Error

The syntax or parameter(s) for the IFONT,S, command is

incorrect.

59 Vertical Dup Cmd Error

The syntax or parameter(s) for the IREPV is incorrect.

60 Horizontal Dup Cmd Error

The syntax or parameter(s) for the IREPH is incorrect.

61 Not defined.

62 PAGE Cmd Error

The syntax or parameter(s) for the IPAGE is incorrect.

63 TIFF Logo Cmd Error

The syntax or parameter(s) for the ITIFF command is incorrect.

64 Not defined.

65 Bit Image Plot Cmd Error

The syntax or parameter(s) for the IPLOT command is incorrect.

66 Load Font Command Error

The syntax or parameter(s) for the ILOAD command is incorrect.

67 Unsupported Cmd Error

The command is not supported.

360

Chapter 6

Error Codes

361

Standard ASCII Character

Set

KEY

ASCII CHARACTER

ESC

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

B7 00 0011 1 1

B6 0

B5 0 01101100011011

COLUMN

01234567

BITS

ROW

B4 B2B3 B1

0000

00 10

00 1 0

00 1 1

01 0 0

01 0 1

01 1 0

01 1 1

1000

10 0 1

10 1 0

10 1 1

11 0 0

11 0 1

11 1 0

11 1 1

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

(XON)

(XOFF)

(

)

;

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

[

]

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

140

141

142

143

144

100

145

101

146

102

147

103

150

104

151

105

152

106

153

107

154

108

155

109

156

110

157

111

{

}

DEL

160

112

161

113

162

114

163

115

164

116

165

117

166

118

167

119

170

120

171

121

172

122

173

123

174

124

175

125

176

126

177

127

10 1 1

B4 B2B3 B1

B7 B6 B5

001

BITS

362

Appendix A

Standard ASCII Character Set

363

Shading Masks

Selecting Masks

The Shading Mask command (KL), described on page 142 of Chapter 2,

includes 132 different shading masks. Print samples of these masks are

illustrated below. Each mask is reverse printed with the appropriate

hexadecimal mask value. Replace the mask parameter in the KL command

with one of the following hexadecimal mask values.

364

Appendix B

Shading Masks

NOTE: Both 18H and 19H produce a white shading mask when printed.

HEX 17

Selecting Masks

365

366

Appendix B

Shading Masks

Selecting Masks

367

368

Appendix B

Shading Masks

Selecting Masks

369

370

Appendix B

Shading Masks

Selecting Masks

371

372

Appendix B

Shading Masks

Selecting Masks

373

374

Appendix B

Shading Masks

375

Grid Samples

The Standard Grid, shown on page 376, is used to design your form layout.

At 6 lines per inch (lpi) and 10 characters per inch (cpi) printing, a standard

8-1/2 x 11-inch sheet of paper has a print area of 66 lines (rows) and 85

characters (columns). (The printable area will vary if you are not printing at 6

lpi and 10 cpi.) Thus, the grid used to design an 8-1/2 x 11-inch form should

accommodate this 66 x 85 area.

The Logo Grid, shown on page 377, is used to design custom logos.

Remember, with the logo grid, you must define the dot positions for each 7-bit

vertical data byte, and each vertical data byte equals 1/10-inch, or one “row.”

Each vertical data byte represents data used in the Plotting Graphics

(Columns) command (Q) described on page 129 of Chapter 2. See Chapter 4

for more information on designing a logo.

378

Appendix C

Grid Samples

379

Page Boundaries

Paper Selection and Maximum Values

Although VGL commands do not require you to identify specific starting and

ending points within a command sequence, the limitations imposed by page

boundaries should be considered for optimum VGL performance. This

appendix addresses the page boundaries affecting VGL products for both cut-

sheet page printers and continuous form printers.

Certain print area boundaries exist according to the paper size selected.

These boundaries are identified in Table 76. The maximum dot values shown

in Table 76 are necessary to determine the maximum printable area on a form

when modifying top/bottom margin settings or offsetting for left margin print

positions. The following pages explain how to determine your Top/Bottom

Margin and Left Margin requirements.

Table 76. Paper Sizes and Maximum Print Area

Paper Size Dimensions Maximum Dot Value*

Page Width Page Length

Letter 8.5 x 11 510 792

Legal 8.5 x 14 510 1008

A4 8.268 x 11.693 496 841

B5 6.929 x 9.842 415 708

Computer 13.2 x 11 792 792

*Maximum Dot Values are calculated as follows:

1. Page Length x 72 dpi minus Top and Bottom Margin Values = maximum

height value;

2. Page Width x 60 dpi minus Left Margin Value = maximum width value.

Values exceeding maximum values produce an error message.

380

Appendix D

Paper Selection and Maximum Values

Setting Top/Bottom Margins

Using dot values to identify maximum vertical print positions, the page

boundary parameters of an 11-inch form are 792 dot rows at n/72-inch

vertically (72 dpi X 11 inches). (See Figure 43.)

With no Top/Bottom Margin configuration setting on an 11-inch form, the first

print position is Starting Row 1, Starting Column 1 (A, Figure 43). However, if

a Top/Bottom Margin value is set at 10, then the Starting Row 1 is adjusted

down by 10 dot rows (B, Figure 43), and the Ending Row is adjusted up 10 dot

rows (C, Figure 43), thereby reducing the maximum vertical printable area to

772 dots (792 - [10 + 10]). The greater the top/bottom margin setting, the

smaller the printable area on the form.

Figure 43. Top/Bottom Margin Example

Maximum Character Column

Maximum Vertical Dot 792

Maximum Horizontal Dot 510

Maximum Vertical

Print Area (772 dots)

Maximum Character Row 66

Setting Left Margins

381

Setting Left Margins

Using dot values to identify maximum horizontal print positions, the page

boundary parameters of an 8-1/2-inch wide form are 510 columns at n/60-inch

horizontally (60 dpi X 8.5 inches). (See Figure 43.) Setting a Left Margin value

repositions the Starting Column 1 position by the degree of offset required.

This offset must be a 0 or a positive value. The following examples explain

how setting the Left Margin affects printed output:

No Left Margin Setting - When the Left Margin configuration setting is 0 on an

8-1/2-inch form, the Starting Column is 1, and the Ending Column is 510

(Figure 44, A and B, respectively).

Positive Left Margin Setting - When the Left Margin setting is 20 on an

8.5-inch form, the left margin is offset by 20 dots, and that 20th dot position

becomes Starting Column 1 in VGL memory (A, Figure 45). This 20 dots also

offsets the Ending Column by 20 dots, thus narrowing the maximum print

width on the form from 510 to 490 dots (B, Figure 45).

Figure 44. Left Margin Example - No Setting

Maximum Character Column

Maximum Horizontal Dot 510

Maximum Horizontal

Print Area (510 dots)

382

Appendix D

Paper Selection and Maximum Values

Figure 45. Left Margin Setting +20 Example

Maximum Horizontal Dot Column

Dot Column 20

Becomes Column 1 (510) becomes 490, due to

Maximum Horizontal

Print Area (490 dots)

+20 offset

383

PTX_SETUP Option

Overview

NOTE: PTX_SETUP commands are not supported on L7032 printers.

The PTX_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allow the

printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or

sent to the printer by the host. Commands range from re-routing debug

statements to downloading complete printer configurations.

The PTX_SETUP Commands

Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows:

1. PTX_SETUP commands are not emulation specific. In a system with an

IGP, the IGP level emulation will process the PTX_SETUP commands. In

a system without an IGP, the PTX_SETUP commands will be processed

by the base emulation. The CTHI emulation will not process PTX_SETUP

commands.

2. Since there is no disk on a flash-based printer, DISK_IO commands are

now called FILE_IO. However, for backwards compatibility DISK_IO and

FILE_IO are synonymous.

3. The PTX_SETUP command set is case sensitive; all PTX_SETUP

commands are in upper case characters only.

4. The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces

and tabs. This allows a PTX_SETUP file to be formatted for easier

readability.

5. Any unknown command will terminate the PTX_SETUP processing. The

offending command will be the first line of printed text.

6. Although the original implementation of PTX_SETUP allowed for only a

single parameter, separated from the sub-command by a single

semicolon (;) character, the new PTX_SETUP command set allows for

multiple parameters separated by commas, semicolons, spaces or tabs.

384

Appendix E

The PTX_SETUP Commands

Commands

Each emulation has modes in which the PTX_SETUP commands could get

missed. For this reason, it is highly recommended that all PTX_SETUP

commands be placed between print jobs, rather than attempting to imbed

them within jobs.

PTX_SETUP commands have the following format:

(SFCC)PTX_SETUP

Command–Sub Command;Value

PTR_END

For example, if the SFCC assigned to the emulation you are using is the caret

(^, hex 5E), and you wanted to load configuration number 4 and capture all

incoming data to a file named “BIN”, you would use the following command:

^PTX_SETUP

CONFIG–LOAD;4 FILE_IO–CAPTURE;BIN

PTR_END

Table 77 lists all the command, sub-command, and parameter combinations

and gives a brief description of the command.

NOTE: When a file system error occurs, a message will be displayed on the

front panel indicating the error, and the action needed to take to

correct the error.

Commands

385

Table 77. PTX_SETUP Commands

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

CONFIG LOAD Cfg Cfg can be 0-8. The PTX_SETUP

will load configuration Cfg. If

configuration Cfg was not previously

saved, the operator panel will

display an error message and the

current configuration will be kept.

SAVE Cfg Cfg must be 1-8. This command will

save the current configuration as

configuration Cfg. If Cfg is not in the

range of 1-8, the command is

ignored.

POWERUP Cfg Sets the power-up configuration to

Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg.

Cfg can be any value from 0-8,

where 0 is the factory default.

PRINT Cfg Print Configuration Cfg. Cfg can be

a number 1-8, or one of four pre-

defined configurations. The four

non-numeric configurations are

requested using the first character

for the CURRENT, FACTORY,

POWERUP, or ALL configuration(s).

CONFIG DELETE Cfg Deletes Configuration number Cfg.

Cfg must be in the range of 1-8.

UPLOAD Port;Cfg This command uploads the

configuration stored in location Cfg

to the port specified by Port. Port

must either be 1284 or SERIAL. Cfg

may be 1-8 or ALL.

DOWNLOAD Cfg This command saves the

configuration data that follows as

configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8

or END.

RESET Reboots the printer.

LP MODE n/a Protocol Protocol must be 0-4. This

command resets the software

protocol, and is selected as follows:

0 - P-Series

1 - P-Series XQ

2 - Serial Matrix

3 - Proprinter III XL

4 - Epson FX-1050

386

Appendix E

The PTX_SETUP Commands

FILE_IO

(DISK_IO)

CAPTURE Filename Captures all incoming data into a file

named Filename. Receipt of a

FILE_IO–CAPTURE command

without the Filename parameter will

force the file data to be written to

flash, and will end the file capture.

DRIVE Letter This command is parsed for

backwards compatibility. However,

since the flash file system is a single

device, the drive letter will be

ignored.

DEL Filename The DEL command will mark a file

as deleted. The space the file

occupied will be freed the next time

the printer is powered up.

FILE_IO

(DISK_IO)

RUNFILE File;Prop The RUNFILE command will open

the file named File for printing. After

the PTR_END command is

processed, the contents of File will

get printed before any more data is

read from the host. If the Prop field

is present, RUNFILE will verify that

Prop matches the saved file

properties. Any mismatch will cause

the command to be ignored.

MAXSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility.

MINSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility.

FONT FontName Downloads an HP** LaserJet** font

and saves it as FontName.

IFONT FontName Downloads a scaleable AGFA type

font and saves it as FontName.

Table 77. PTX_SETUP Commands (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

Commands

387

ENGINE ALM_WIDE wide width Set the Auto Label Mapping wide

width (in units of 1/1000”; e.g., a

wide width value of 1000 = 1”),

which represents the width of the

image in the file sent from the host

which is to be auto label mapped

into several labels, each of which

will have a width of narrow width.

# of labels=wide width/narrow width

(rounded down)

ALM_NARROW narrow width Set the Auto Label Mapping narrow

width, which represents the width of

one auto mapped label (in units of

1/1000”; e.g., a narrow width value

of 1000 = 1”). This width should be

set prior to the wide width. In

addition, it can never exceed the

physical width of the printer. If it

does, the narrow width will be

automatically reduced to the Page

Width value set in the configuration

menu.

ALM_ENABLE N/W/* Set Auto Label Mapping to Narrow,

Wide, or Off. Enter N for Narrow, W

for Wide, or any other letter to

disable ALM. By default, only the

Narrow option is implemented.

Table 77. PTX_SETUP Commands (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

388

Appendix E

The PTX_SETUP Commands

ENGINE IMAGE_SHFT_H Value Shifts the image Value horizontally

in 1/1000” units. If Value is out of the

specified range (-1” to +1”), the

command will be ignored.

IMAGE_SHFT_V Value Shifts the image Value vertically in

1/1000” units. If Value is out of the

specified range (-1” to +6”), the

command will be ignored.

LENGTH Value Sets the Page Length (in 1/1000”

units).

MEDIA_HANDLING Value Sets the type of media handling:

0 - Continuous

1 - Tear-Off Strip

2 - Tear-Off

3 - Peel-Off

4 - Cut

MODE XSets the print mode to Thermal

Transfer.

DSets the print mode to Direct

Thermal.

WIDTH Value Sets the Page Width (in 1/1000”

units).

PTR_END (none) (none) Exits the PTX_SETUP.

Table 77. PTX_SETUP Commands (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

Commands

389

Summary of the CONFIG Command

The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and

downloading complete printer configurations. If a customer needs to configure

50 printers identically, the customer needs only configure one printer and

UPLOAD the configurations. The UPLOADed configurations may then be

DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to

configure each printer manually.

The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the

uploaded data. This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by

the configuration number. The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command.

The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD

commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect

the printer's active configuration. This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD

commands to operate without affecting the printer's current configuration. If

the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations, the

operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation. This can be

accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your

setup file. This is necessary because the printer caches the active

configuration. Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is

correctly read from Non-Volatile RAM.

NOTE: While an upload or download is in progress, the Front Panel will be

unavailable.

The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be

blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature. This is intended to

prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer. The PTX_SETUP

commands, however, will override the protect configurations feature. All

PTX_SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the

Protect Configurations feature.

Operation of the FILE_IO Command

When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO–CAPTURE;filename

command, the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for

data. If the file already exists on the Flash File System and the Overwrite

Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable, a warning will

be displayed on the front panel. After clearing the warning, the file data will be

printed. To overwrite the existing file, set the Overwrite Files option to enable.

Due to the nature of writing to flash, any data intended to be stored

permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM. As a result, the ability to

manipulate files in the Flash File System is dependent upon the printer having

sufficient RAM. None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until

the entire file is loaded. The PTX_SETUP parser will interpret the command

“FILE_IO–CAPTURE<lf>” as an end of file marker. Receipt of the command

will cause all file data to be written to flash. The file system allocates RAM for

temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks. If at any time during the file

download the printer runs out of RAM, a warning will be displayed on the front

panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash. To download

larger files you may need to add additional RAM to the printer.

390

Appendix E

The PTX_SETUP Commands

Three things can limit the ability to save a file: insufficient RAM, insufficient

Flash, and lack of empty file system entries. Flash can only be written once

before it needs to be “optimized”. As a result, the maximum file size is limited

to the largest unwritten block of Flash. If any of these problems occur, the

printer will display an error message and will attempt to provide the operator

with a description of what steps to take to correct the error. Normally, the

solution will involve optimizing the Flash File System. This can be

accomplished by selecting the Optimize & Reboot function in the Flash File

System menu under MAINT/MISC.

NOTE: After selecting the Optimize & Reboot function, do not shut off the

printer's power until after the printer returns to the power-on state.

Loss of power during the optimize process may corrupt the printer's

program. If this occurs, first attempt to repeat the downloading

process. If that fails, contact an authorized service representative.

391

VGL Command Support on

L7032 Printers

The following table lists partially supported and non-supported commands on

the L7032 printer. For more information on each command, refer to the

corresponding page number.

Table 78. L7032 Printers - Partially Supported and Non-Supported Commands

VGL

Command Support Level Description Page

IPAGE Partial Page, Controlling Paper Options (Version II) 122

!Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x01) 53

“Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x02) 53

#Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x03) 53

$Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x04) 53

%Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x05) 53

&Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x06) 53

‘Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x07) 53

(Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x08) 53

.Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x0E) 53

/Not Supported Send control characters to LP+ (0x0F) 53

>Not Supported Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), Start Load 73

?Not Supported Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), End Load 73

0 - 9 Not Supported Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU),

Channel 1 through 10

:Not Supported Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), Channel 11 73

;Not Supported Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), Channel 12 73

<Not Supported Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), Channel 13 73

392

Appendix F

=Not Supported Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), Channel 14 73

IEMUL Not Supported Emulation Switch 77

@R Not Supported Reset 135

+Not Supported Tab, Vertical 155

QNot Supported Plotting Graphics 132

CNot Supported Plotting Graphics 157

Table 78. L7032 Printers - Partially Supported and Non-Supported Commands

VGL

Command Support Level Description Page

393

Glossary

Active column The horizontal location on the paper where the next

character prints. After printing a character, the printer

advances the active column.

Active line The vertical location on the paper where the next

character prints. After printing a line, the printer

advances the active line.

Active position The position on the paper where the next character

prints. The active position is defined by the horizontal

position (active column) and the vertical position (active

line).

ASCII Abbreviation of American Standard Code for

Information Interchange.

Baud A unit of speed that measures the rate at which

information is transferred. Baud rate is the reciprocal of

the length in seconds of the shortest pulse used to

carry data. For example, a system in which the shortest

pulse is 1/1200 second operates at 1200 baud. On RS-

232 serial lines, the baud rate equals the data flow rate

in bits per second (bps). To communicate properly, a

printer must be configured to operate at the same baud

rate as its host computer.

Bold A typeface with a heavy line thickness produced by a

double strike print method. See also character weight.

Compare with shadow printing.

Buffer A reserved area in printer memory that data is written to

and read from during data transfers.

394

Appendix G

Glossary

Character A graphical representation of data.

Character cell The invisible rectangular space occupied by a

character, including the white space around the

character. Used as a unit of spacing. The height of a

cell is equal to the current line spacing, and the width of

a cell remains constant even with changes in the

current character spacing.

Character Library The collection of all the glyphs for all fonts.

Character Location The location of a character in a font. The location of a

character is the same in all fonts.

Character set A protocol instructing the printer how to construct a set

of printable characters, including symbols, punctuation,

numbers, diacritical markings, and alphabet characters.

Each character is assigned a unique address in

memory.

Character weight The degree of lightness and thickness of printed text.

For example: Bold refers to a heavy or thick character

weight. Medium, normal, or book weight refer to the

character weight used in this sentence.

Code Point A value between 0 and 256 that defines the location of

a character within a character set.

Command sequence Two or more bytes that instruct the printer to perform a

special function. The first character in the sequence is a

Special Function Control Character (SFCC), which

alerts the printer that the string is a command

sequence. (See also SFCC.)

Compressed A font attribute referring to a typeface with a smaller

than normal character width, but no change to

character height.

cpi characters per inch: a measurement of monospaced

fonts indicating the horizontal character density. For

example, 10 cpi is 10 characters produced in a one-

inch (horizontal) space.

CSI Control Sequence Introducer: Two or more bytes that

describe a specific printer control function. In a control

sequence, the first byte is always the CSI character.

395

Decipoint One tenth of a point. A unit of measurement equal to 1/

720 inch. See also point.

Default A value, parameter, attribute, or option assigned by a

program or system when another is not specified by the

user.

Diagnostic Pertains to the detection and isolation of printer

malfunctions or mistakes.

Disable To deactivate or set to OFF.

Em A font width term equal to the maximum character width

obtainable in a given font. (Derived from the width of an

uppercase M, usually the widest character in a set.)

Emulation Refers to the ability of a printer to execute the

commands of another printer language or protocol.

En A font width term equal to one half em.

Enable To activate or set to ON.

Escape sequence Two or more bytes that describe a specific printer

control function. In an escape sequence, the first byte is

always the ASCII ESC character. (See also command

sequence, SFCC.)

Expanded A font enhancement referring to larger-than-normal

character width with no change in character height.

False Off or zero. Compare with true.

Family (or type) A set of all variations and sizes of a type style.

Fixed-pitch fonts See font, monospaced.

396

Appendix G

Glossary

Font The complete set of a given size of type, including

characters, symbols, figures, punctuation marks,

ligatures, signs, and accents. To fully describe a font,

you must specify seven characteristics: 1) type family,

2) spacing (proportional or monospaced), 3) type size

(12 point, 14 point, etc.), 4) scale factor (character

height/width ratio), 5) type style, 6) character weight,

and 7) character proportion (normal, condensed,

expanded).

Font Directory The header file that contains the tables describing

allowed the mode and pitch combinations. The file also

contains the tables used to set up the character sets

and the international languages within the character

sets.

Font name See typeface.

Font pattern A font pattern is the matrix of pels which represents a

character, symbol, or image.

Font, landscape A font printed parallel to the long edge of a page, or a

font capable of being produced on a landscape page

orientation.

Font, monospaced Also called fixed-pitch fonts. Every character,

regardless of actual horizontal size, occupies the same

amount of font pattern space. All monospaced fonts

use specific pitch size settings. Monospaced fonts are

sometimes used when strict character alignment is

desired (tables, charts, spreadsheets, etc.).

Font, portrait A font printed parallel to the short edge of a page.

Font, proportional A font in which the width of the character cell varies with

the width of the character. For example, “i” takes less

space to print than “m”. Using proportional fonts

generally increases the readability of printed

documents, giving text a typeset appearance. This

manual is printed in proportional fonts.

Font weight See character weight.

Font width The measurement of the width of a character cell in

dots.

397

Glyph The shape of a character in a print mode and pitch.

HGS Horizontal Grid Size.

Host computer The host computer stores, processes, and sends data

to be printed, and which communicates directly with the

printer. The term host indicates the controlling

computer, since modern printers are themselves

microprocessor-controlled computer systems.

ipm inches per minute: The speed at which graphics are

plotted.

Interface The hardware components used to link two devices by

common physical interconnection, signal, and

functional characteristics.

International

Language Character set in which characters have been

rearranged according to a substitution table for use in a

different country.

Invoke To put into effect or operation.

Italic A type style in which characters are slanted. This

sentence is set in italics.

lpi lines per inch: a measurement indicating the vertical

spacing between successive lines of text. For example,

8 lpi is 8 printed lines per vertical inch.

lpm lines per minute: A measurement indicating the number

of lines printed per minute. (lpm usually defines the

speed at which text prints.)

Logical link The parameters that specify data transfer, control, or

communication operations.

398

Appendix G

Glossary

Memory See RAM.

Nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be

preserved when the printer is turned off, such as

configuration parameters and printer usage statistics.

Nonvolatile memory is preserved because RAM is

housed on the controller board, which contains an

independent, battery-operated power supply. When

printer power is turned off, the battery supplies the

power needed to keep stored data active. Nonvolatile

memory also includes storage on disk.

NOVRAM Acronym of NonVolatile Random-Access Memory. See

also nonvolatile memory.

OCR Optical Character Recognition is the process by which

a machine reads characters printed in a special

standardized font. Data are read by a photoelectric

optical scanner and recorded on magnetic tape or disk.

OCR-A and OCR-B are two widely used fonts.

Page Window A rectangular area on the physical page outside of

which the emulation does not print.

Parity (check) Parity checking is the addition of non-data bits to data,

resulting in the number of 1 bits being either always

even or always odd. Parity is used to detect

transmission errors. Parity represents the value in the

check digit of the received or transmitted data.

399

Parsing Parsing is the process of separating a programming

statement into basic units that can be translated into

machine instructions. A printer can recover from an

erroneous code sequence by performing as much of

the function as possible or, parsing the valid parameter

from the invalid.

Pel See pixel.

PI Paper instruction: A signal from the host with the same

timing and polarity as the data lines.

Pica A name indicating a monospaced font with a pitch of 10

cpi and usually a 12 point height. Pica is also used in

typography as a unit of measurement: 1 pica = 1/6

inch.

Pin configuration Establishes the physical attachment and protocol

conversion connections for the host interface.

Pitch The number of text characters printed per horizontal

inch. Specified in characters per inch or cpi.

Pixel Acronym of picture element or picture cell. The smallest

displayable picture element on a video monitor or

printable unit in a printer.

Point A unit of measure in printing and typography, used to

specify type sizes, heights of font characters, etc. There

are 72 points in a vertical inch; thus, one point equals 1/

72 inch, or approximately 0.0138 inch. Examples:

This is 6

point type.

This is 10 point type.

This is 16 point

type.

Port A channel used for receiving data from or transmitting

data to one or more external devices.

Print Mode The horizontal and vertical dot density at which the

characters are printed.

Print Pitch Defines the number of characters that can be printed in

one inch. It can be translated into the width of the

character.

Printer Configuration The operating properties that define how the printer

responds to signals and commands received from the

host computer. These properties are set to match the

operating characteristics of the host computer system.

Printer Interface The point where the data line from the host computer

plugs into the printer.

400

Appendix G

Glossary

Protocol A set of rules or conventions governing the exchange of

information between computer systems. For computer

printers, a protocol is the coding convention used to

convey and print data. A printer protocol includes

character codes, printer function codes, and machine-

to-machine communication codes.

RAM Random-Access Memory. Also called “main memory”

or “working memory,” this is the active memory of a

printer, into which programs are loaded. RAM is said to

be volatile because data in RAM are lost when power is

turned off or interrupted. Compare with ROM.

Read To retrieve data from memory or mass storage (hard

disk, floppy diskette, RAM, etc.).

Reset To turn off, deactivate, disable, or return to a previous

state.

Resolution A measure expressing the number of component units

in a given range used to create an image; in printing,

expressed as the number of dots per inch (dpi)

horizontally and vertically.

ROM Read-Only Memory. Programs, instructions, and

routines permanently stored in the printer. ROM is not

lost when power is turned off and cannot be written to-

hence the name “read only.” ROM-resident fonts are

permanently stored in a printer and available at any

time via software commands. Compare with RAM.

Roman A type style in which characters are upright. This

sentence is printed in roman type.

401

Serial

communications The sequential transmission of data, in which each

element is transferred in succession.

Set To turn on, activate, invoke, or enable.

SFCC Special Function Control Character. The first character

in a printer command sequence. In P-Series emulation

mode, you can select one of five characters as the

SFCC. In the Serial Matrix or Proprinter protocols, the

SFCC must always be the ASCII ESC character. See

also command sequence.

Shadow printing A typeface with a heavy line thickness produced when

the characters doublestrike just offset of the original

characters. See also character weight. Compare with

bold print.

Sixel A six pixel vertical column.

Slewing Rapid vertical paper movement.

SSCC Super-Set Control Code. The SSCC is used to activate

the super-set commands. It consists of the SFCC plus

the sequence | } ;

Start bit The signal that indicates the start of a character or

element.

Stop bits The signal that indicates the end of a character or

element.

String Two or more bytes of data or code treated as a unit.

Substitution Table A table that contains the code points within a character

set that need to be changed for an international

language.

Symbol set See character set.

402

Appendix G

Glossary

True On or 1. “High true” refers to a positive relative voltage

representing the ON state; “low true” refers to a

negative relative voltage representing the ON state.

Type style Refers to either the upright (roman) or italic character

style within a specific font family.

Typeface A descriptive name or brand name that identifies a

particular design of type.

Typographic font See font, proportional.

Weight See character weight.

Write To store data to memory or mass storage (hard disk,

floppy diskette, RAM, etc.).

403

Contact Information

Printronix Customer Support Center

IMPORTANT

Please have the following information available prior to calling the

Printronix Customer Support Center:

•

Model number

•

Serial number (located on the back of the printer)

•

Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)

•

Configuration printout:

Thermal Printer

See “Printing A Configuration” in the Quick Setup Guide.

Line Matrix Printer

Press PRT CONFIG on the control panel, then press Enter.

L7032 Printer

a. Press the Menu button.

b. Press the Left or Right arrow button until Test Print displays.

c. Press the Down arrow button to select the menu.

d. If necessary, press the Left or Right arrow button until Configuration

displays.

e. Press Shift + Down arrow to select the menu option and print the

current configuration.

•

Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?

•

Description of the problem (be specific)

•

Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing

of these samples may be required)

Americas (714) 368-2686

Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 410

Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4114

China (86) 800-999-6836

http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx

404

Appendix H

Printronix Supplies Department

Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.

Americas (800) 733-1900

Europe, Middle East, and Africa 33 (0) 1 46 25 19 07

Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4116

or (65) 6548 4182

China (86) 400-886-5598

India (800) 102-7869

http://www.printronix.com/supplies-parts.aspx

Corporate Offices

Printronix, Inc.

15345 Barranca Parkway

Irvine, CA 92618

U.S.A.

Phone: (714) 368-2300

Fax: (714) 368-2600

Printronix Inc.

c/o Printronix Nederland BV

Bijsterhuizen 11-38

6546 AS Nijmegen

The Netherlands

Phone: (31) 24 6489489

Fax: (31) 24 6489499

Printronix Schweiz GmbH

42 Changi South Street 1

Changi South Industrial Estate

Singapore 486763

Phone: (65) 6542 0110

Fax: (65) 6546 1588

Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd

22F, Eton Building East

No.555, Pudong Av.

Shanghai City, 200120, P R China

Phone: (86) 400 886 5598

Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564

Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com

405

Index

Accessing characters and character sets, 341

data bit 8, 341

Power-up character set selection, 341

Addresses, character, 338

AIAG form, 95

Alphanumeric text, creating, 302

Alphanumerics, 32

example, 35

inverted, 37

reverse string, 38

rotated clockwise, 35

rotated counterclockwise, 36

standard, 35

ASCII, standard character set, 361

Australian 4-State, 169

example, 172

standard command format, 170

structure, 169

Auto increment/decrement vertical duplication, 59

Automatic increment/decrement capability, 15

Automatic mode, Code 128, 196

Barcode

Australian 4-State, 169

BC412 Barcode, 174

Codabar, 178

Code 128, 195

Code 39, 184

Code 93, 191

command format, 162, 163

EAN 13, 209

EAN 8, 204

German Interleaved 2/5, 214

GS-1 Data Matrix, 230

GS1-128, 219

IBARC format, 164

Identicon, 239

Intelligent Mail 4-State, 242

Interleaved 2/5, 244

Maxicode, 249

MSI, 254

PDF-417, 260

Planet, 264

POSTNET, 269

ratio, 163, 164

resolution, 162

Royal Mail, 273

Telepen, 275

type, 163, 164

UPC-A, 282

UPC-E, 285

UPCSHIP, 293

UPS 11, 297

variable ratio size (D), 164

Barcode ratio, BC412 Barcode, 177

Barcodes, 167

BC412 Barcode, 174

barcode ratio, 177

data field, 174

example, 178

quiet/clear zone, 174

standard command format, 177

start/stop code, 174

BC412 Barcode, check code, 176

Bitmap images, plotting, 127

bottom margins, page boundaries, 380

406

Boxes command code, 39

Boxing alphanumeric text, 303

high resolution graphic exercise, 307

Brackets, 21

Building a Character Translation Table, 341

Carriage return command code, 41

Character addresses, 338

Character height, 23, 42

Character Set

resetting, 342

Character set selection command, 345

Character Sets

translation table, 341

Character sets

international, 353

Character sets, accessing, 341

Character sets, multinational, 337

Character set, Codabar, 181

Character Set, Code 39, 188

Character set, Standard ASCII, 361

Character substitutions, 338

Character Translation Table, 341

Character type, 46

Character width, 23, 44

Characters, accessing, 341

Charts, multinational character sets, 349

Check code

BC412 Barcode, 176

Check digit

Code 128, 196

Code 39, 185

Code 93, 192

EAN 13, 210

EAN 8, 205

German Interleaved 2/5, 215

Interleaved 2/5, 245

MSI, 255

Planet, 266

Royal Mail, 273

Telepen, 276

UPC-E, 286

UPCSHIP, 294

UPS 11, 298

Codabar, 178

character set, 181

command format, 179

data field, 179

examples, 182

quiet zone, 178

readable data, 179

start/stop codes, 179

Code 128, 195

automatic mode, 196

check digit, 196

commnd format, 198

data field, 196

example, 202

manual mode, 197

manual mode operation, 197

quiet zone, 195

readable data, 196

start/stop codes, 195

Code 39, 184

character set, 188

check digit, 185

command format, 185

data field, 184

examples, 189

quiet zone, 184

readable data, 185

start/stop codes, 184

Code 93, 191

check digit, 192

command format, 192

data fields, 191

example, 194

quiet zone, 191

readable data, 192

start/stop codes, 191

Comma, 22

Command

CONFIG, 389

FILE_IO, 389

407

Command codes, 26

alphanumerics, 32

boxes, 39

carriage return, 41

character height, 42

character type, 46

character width, 44

compressed print, 47

dark print, 49

descending characters, 51

direct printer commands, 53

dot slew, 54

duplication, horizontal, 54

duplication, horizontal (Version II), 56

duplication, vertical, 57

duplication, vertical (Version II), 63

dynamic form commands, 65

electronic vertical format unit (EVFU), 73

emphasized print, 76

emulation switch, 77

extended graphics, 29

extended graphics/high resolution, 31

font load, 77

fonts, compressed print density, 85

fonts, rotatable, 82

font, selecting default (Version II), 78

form feed, 88

form length, 89

forms construction, 90

forms, creating dynamic (Version II), 93

forms, deleting dynamic (Version II), 94

forms, executing dynamic (Version II), 94

forms, listing dynamic (Version II), 95

forms, resetting dynamic (Version II), 99

free format, 99

free format disable, non-graphics, 102

free format enable, non-graphics, 101

graphics mode disable, 104

graphics mode enable, 103

graphics mode enable commands, 26

Hex dump, 104

horizontal duplication, 54

horizontal duplication (Version II), 56

ignore data, 105

interrupt, 106

justification, vertical, 108

line feed, 110

line slew, 111

line spacing, 111

lines, dashed, 113

lines, solid, 116

logo, PCX, 120

logo, TIFF, 121

page, controlling paper options (Version II), 122

passing hex values, 124

pixel expansion (Version II), 125

plotting bitmap images, 127

plotting graphics (columns), 129

plotting graphics (Rows), 132

reset, 135

reverse print, 136

shading, 140

shading mask, 142

special function control code change, 144

standard graphics commands, 27

symbols, creating expanded user defined, 148

symbols, creating standard user defined, 145

symbols, printing, 150

tab, horizontal, 151

tab, vertical, 155

underlined print, 156

vertical duplication, 57

vertical duplication (Version II), 63

wait for online, 157

Command format

Barcodes, 163

Codabar, 179

Code 128, 198

Code 39, 185

Code 93, 192

Data Matrix, 230

EAN 13, 210

EAN 8, 205

German Interleaved 2/5, 215

408

Identicon, 240

Interleaved 2/5, 245

Maxicode, 249

MSI, 255

PDF417, 262

Planet, 267

POSTNET, 272

Royal Mail, 274

Telepen, 276

UCC/EAN-128, 224

UPC-E, 287

UPCSHIP, 294

UPS 11, 298

Command parameters, 21

Command sequence, 21

Command standards

brackets, 21

character height, width, and intercharacter

spacing, 23

comma, 22

command parameters, 21

command sequence, 21

spaces, 22

special function control code (SFCC), 21

terminator, 22

VGL, 20

Command Support, L7032 printers, 391

Commands

PTX_SETUP, 383

Scaling, 138

Compressed print, 47

Configure VGL, control panel, 17

Contact information, 403

Control characters, Maxicode, 252

Control panel, configure VGL, 17

Creating expanded user defined symbols, 148

Creating standard user defined symbols, 145

Customer Support Center, 403

Dark print, 49

Dashed lines, 113

Data bit 8

accessing characters and character sets, 341

Data field

BC412 Barcode, 174

Codabar, 179

Code 128, 196

Code 39, 184

Code 93, 191

Data Matrix, 230

EAN 13, 210

EAN 8, 205

German Interleaved 2/5, 214

Identicon, 239

Interleaved 2/5, 244

Maxicode, 249

MSI, 254

Planet, 266

Royal Mail, 273

Telepen, 275

UCC/EAN-128, 223

UPC-E, 286

UPCSHIP, 293

UPS 11, 297

Data Field, PDF-417, 261

Data Matrix

command format, 230

data field, 230

example, 238

quiet zone, 230

readable data, 230

special characters using SO, 233

symbol characteristics, 234

Data positioning, 24

explicit positioning commands, 25

implied relative positioning, 24

vertical dot density, 25

Default font (Version II), 78

Descending characters, 51

Direct printer commands, 53

409

Dot slew, 54

Duplication, horizontal, 54

Duplication, horizontal (Version II), 56

Duplication, vertical, 57

Duplication, vertical (Version II), 63

Dynamic form

copy fields, 69

field length, 67

repeat, 71

special command definitions, 66

Dynamic form commands, 65

dynamic form special command definitions, 66

dynamic form, copy fields, 69

dynamic form, field length, 67

dynamic form, repeat, 71

EAN 13, 209

check digit, 210

command format, 210

data field, 210

example, 212

number system character, 210

quiet zone, 209

readable data, 210

start/center/stop codes, 209

EAN 8, 204

check digit, 205

command format, 205

data field, 205

example, 208

quiet zone, 205

readable data, 205

start/center/stop codes, 205

Electronic vertical format unit (EVFU), 73

Emphasized print, 76

Emulation switch, 77

Enable VGL graphics, high resolution graphic

exercise, 306

Error codes, 355

purpose, 355

Errors, solving problems, 336

Example

alphanumerics, 35

BC412 Barcode, 178

Codabar, 182

Code 128, 202

Code 39, 189

Code 93, 194

Data Matrix, 238

EAN 13, 212

EAN 8, 208

Fonts, compressed print density, 87

form, 311

German Interleaved 2/5, 217

Interleaved 2/5, 247

label, 328

Maxicode, 253

MSI, 257

passing hex values, 124

Planet, 268

POSTNET, 272

Royal Mail, 274

Telpen, 279

UCC/EAN-128, 226

UPC-A, 284

UPC-E, 292

UPCSHIP, 296

UPS 11, 300

VGL, 301

Examples

dark print, 50

forms construction, 96, 98

Exercise

graphic, high resolution, 306

graphic, normal resolution, 302

VGL, 301

Explicit positioning commands, 25

Extended graphics

commands, 29

high resolution commands, 31

high resolution mode, 17

mode, 16

410

Features

automatic increment/decrement capability, 15

compressed print, 14

different, VGL, 15

expanded print, 14

international character sets, 15

label generation, 14

logos, 15

multinational character sets, 15

new, VGL, 15

on-line form, 14

reversed print, 15

rotated alphanumerics, 14

shaded print, 15

variable barcodes, 14

FILE_IO Command, Operation of, 389

Font load, 77

Fonts, compressed print density, 85

examples, 87

Fonts, rotatable, 82

Font, selecting default (Version II), 78

Form example, 311

create the box around the form, 314

design the form, 313

design the logo, 314

disable VGL graphics, 325

enable VGL graphics, 313

enter alphanumeric text throughout the form,

319

enter the barcode, 325

enter the company heading, 318

enter the corners, 323

enter the interior box with horizontal and

vertical lines, 321

enter the slogan, 324

input the logo data, 317

page layout considerations, 311

planning the form layout, 311

position form elements, 313

translate logo design into data, 314

Form feed, 88

Form length, 89

Forms

construction

examples, 96, 98

creating dynamic (Version II), 93

deleting dynamic (Version II), 94

executing dynamic (Version II), 94

listing dynamic (Version II), 95

predefined, 95

resetting dynamic (Version II), 99

Forms construction, 90

Free format, 99

disable, non-graphics, 102

enable, non-graphics, 101

German Interleaved 2/5, 214

check digit, 215

command format, 215

data field, 214

example, 217

quiet zone, 214

readable data, 215

start/stop codes, 214

Graphics

plotting (columns), 129

plotting (Rows), 132

Graphics mode, 16, 24

data positioning, 24

disable, 104

enable, 103

enable commands, 26

Grid

logo, 375

standard, 375

GS-1 Data Matrix, 230

GS1-128, 219

411

Hex dump, 104

High resolution graphic exercise

boxing alphanumeric text, 307

create more alphanumeric text, 309

enable VGL graphics, 306

horizontal lines, 308

Horizontal duplication, 54

Horizontal duplication (Version II), 56

Horizontal lines

graphic exercise, 304

high resolution graphic exercise, 308

Horizontal tab, 151

IBARC command format, 164

Identicon, 239

command format, 240

data field, 239

quiet zone, 239

readable data, 240

start/stop codes, 239

Ignore data, 105

Implied relative positioning, 24

Intelligent Mail 4-State, 242

Intercharacter spacing, 23

Interleaved 2/5, 244

check digit, 245

command format, 245

data field, 244

example, 247

quiet zone, 244

readable data, 245

start/stop codes, 244

International character sets, 15, 353

Interrupt, 106

Inverted alphanumerics, 37

ISO character set, ISO, 348

Justification, vertical, 108

Label example, 328

add barcodes and dynamic barcode data, 333

add dynamic data, 334

add headings, 333

add horizontal lines, 333

add TO/FROM alphanumeric data, 332

create the corners, 331

create the label box, 331

disable graphics mode, 335

enable dynamic form processing, 330

enable horizontal duplication, 330

enable VGL graphics, 330

Label generation, 14

Left margins, page boundaries, 381

Line feed, 110

Line slew, 111

Line Spacing, 138

Line spacing, 111

Lines

dashed, 113

solid, 116

Logo

grid, 375

PCX, 120

TIFF, 121

Logos, 15

L7032 Printers, command support, 391

Manual mode operation

Code 128, 197

subset A, 198

subset B and C switching, 197

Manual mode, Code 128, 197

Manual, overview, 13

Masks, selecting, 363

Maxicode, 249

command format, 249

control characters, 252

data field, 249

example, 253

412

readable data, 249

standard data field, 250

UPS shipping data field, 251

Maximum Print Area, 379

Maximum values, 379

Modes of operation

extended graphics mode, 16

extended graphics/high resolution mode, 17

graphics mode, 16

normal mode, 16

VGL, 19

Modulo-10 check digit, UCC/EAN-128, 224

Modulo-103 check digit, UCC/EAN-128, 224

MSI, 254

check digit, 255

command format, 255

data field, 254

example, 257

quiet zone, 254

readable data, 255

start/stop codes, 254

Multinational character sets, 15, 337

accessing characters and character sets, 341

character addresses, 338

character set selection command, 345

character substitutions, 338

charts, 349

selecting an ISO character set, 348

user-defined set command, 343

Normal mode, 16, 23

Normal resolution graphic exercise

boxing alphanumeric text, 303

create more alphanumeric text, 304

creating alphanumeric text, 302

horizontal lines, 304

Number system character

EAN 13, 210

UPC-E, 286

Odette Form, 95

On-line form, 14

Overview

manual, 13

PTX_SETUP, 383

Page boundaries

bottom margins, 380

left margins, 381

top margins, 380

Page layout considerations, form example, 311

Page, controlling paper options (Version II), 122

Paper selection, 379

Paper Sizes, 379

Passing hex values, 124

Passing hex values, examples, 124

PCX logo, 120

PDF, PDF-417, 261

PDF-417, 260

command format, 262

Data Field, 261

example, 263

PDF, 261

Quiet Zone, 261

Security Level, 261

Start/Stop Codes, 261

structure, 260

Pixel expansion (Version II), 125

Planet, 264

check digit, 266

command format, 267

data field, 266

example, 268

quiet zone, 266

start/stop code, 266

Planning the form layout, form example, 311

Plot data

byte format, 133

format, 133

line format, 134

413

Plotting

bitmap images, 127

graphics (columns), 129

Plotting graphics (Rows), 132, 133

plot data byte format, 133

plot data line format, 134

POSTNET, 269

command format, 272

example, 272

Power-up character set selection, accessing

characters and character sets, 341

Predefined Forms

AIAG form, 95

odette form, 95

primary metals form, 95

Primary Metals Form, 95

Print Area, Maximum, 379

Printing symbols, 150

PTX_SETUP

commands, 383

CONFIG command, 389

FILE_IO command, 389

overview, 383

Quiet zone

Codabar, 178

Code 128, 195

Code 39, 184

Code 93, 191

Data Matrix, 230

EAN 13, 209

EAN 8, 205

German Interleaved 2/5, 214

Identicon, 239

Interleaved 2/5, 244

MSI, 254

PDF-417, 261

Planet, 266

Royal Mail, 273

Telepen, 275

UCC/EAN-128, 223

UPC-E, 285

UPCSHIP, 293

UPS 11, 297

Quiet/clear zone, BC412 Barcode, 174

Ratio, barccode, 164

Ratio, barcode, 163

Readable data

Code 128, 196

Code 39, 185

Code 93, 192

Data Matrix, 230

EAN 13, 210

EAN 8, 205

German Interleaved 2/5, 215

Identicon, 240

Interleaved 2/5, 245

Maxicode, 249

MSI, 255

Telepen, 276

UCC/EAN-128, 223

UPC-E, 286

UPCSHIP, 294

UPS 11, 298

Readable Data Field, 163

Readable data, Codabar, 179

Reset command code, 135

Resetting the Character Set, 342

Resolution, Barcodes, 162

Reverse print, 15, 136

Reverse string alphanumerics, 38

Rotatable fonts, 82

Rotated alphanumerics, 14

Rotated clockwise alphanumerics, 35

Rotated counter clockwise alphanumerics, 36

Royal Mail, 273

check digit, 273

command format, 274

data field, 273

example, 274

quiet zone, 273

start/stop code, 273

414

Scaling, 138

Security Level, PDF-417, 261

Shaded print, 15

Shading, 140

Shading mask, 142

selecting, 363

Solid lines, 116

Solving program errors, 336

SO, special Data Matrix characters, 233

Spaces, 22

Spacing, line, 138

Special characters using SO, Data Matrix, 233

Special function control code change, 144

Special function control code (SFCC), 21

Special information, 13

Standard alphanumerics, 35

Standard ASCII character set, 361

Standard command format, BC412 Barcode, 177

Standard data field

Maxicode, 250

Standard graphics commands, 27

Standard grid, 375

Start/center/stop codes

EAN 13, 209

EAN 8, 205

Start/stop codes

BC412 Barcode, 174

Codabar, 179

Code 128, 195

Code 39, 184

Code 93, 191

German Interleaved 2/5, 214

Identicon, 239

Interleaved 2/5, 244

MSI, 254

Planet, 266

Royal Mail, 273

Telepen, 275

UCC/EAN-128, 223

UPC-E, 285

UPCSHIP, 293

UPS 11, 297

Start/Stop Codes, PDF-417, 261

Subset A, manual mode operation, 198

Subset B and C switching, manual mode

operation, 197

Substitutions, character, 338

Supplies Department, 404

Symbol characteristics, Data Matrix, 234

Symbols

creating expanded user defined, 148

creating standard user defined, 145

printing, 150

Tab

horizontal, 151

vertical, 155

Telepen, 275

check digit, 276

command format, 276

data field, 275

example, 279

quiet zone, 275

readable data, 276

start/stop codes, 275

Terminator, 22

TIFF logo, 121

Top margins, page boundaries, 380

Translation Table, 341

Type, barcode, 163, 164

UCC/EAN-128

command format, 224

data field, 223

example, 226

Modolo-103 check digit, 224

Modulo-10 data field check digit, 224

quiet zone, 223

readable data, 223

start/stop codes, 223

Underlined print, 156

415

UPC-A, 282

UPC-A, example, 284

UPC-E, 285

check digit, 286

command format, 287

data field, 286

example, 292

number system character, 286

quiet zone, 285

readable data, 286

start/stop codes, 285

UPCSHIP, 293

check digit, 294

command format, 294

data field, 293

example, 296

quiet zone, 293

readable data, 294

start/stop codes, 293

UPS shipping data field, Maxicode, 251

UPS 11, 297

check digit, 298

command format, 298

data field, 297

example, 300

quiet zone, 297

readable data, 298

start/stop codes, 297

User-defined set command, 343

Variable barcodes, 14

Variable Ratio Size (D), barcode, 164

Vertical dot density, 25

Vertical duplication, 57

auto increment/decrement, 59

Vertical duplication (Version II), 63

Vertical justification, 108

Vertical tab, 155

VGL

command standards, 20

configuring with control panel, 17

different features, 15

examples, 301

exercises, 301

high resolution graphic exercise, 306

modes of operation, 19

new features, 15

normal resolution graphic exercise, 302

Wait for online, 157

Warning, 13

416

254079-001B

*254079-001*

PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B PTX PRM VGL T5r 254079B